cr own readers

1
I!
I
i

THE ' ROYAL' S CH OOL ' S E RIES
(RECENT A DDI TI ONS)
E NG LI S H.
K&LSos's SU PPLr.:)(L'~ARY REA DE RS.
Up TO LoS DOS TO UK THE Q UEES (Coutlnuou e Sto ry for Infants).
THE RoYAL Sc . EXC E READEtui (Three Books).
T u e RoYAL C ROW S P8I)lE~ A.SD ISFA ST READE JUt.
THE ROTAL CROWS RUDERS (Seeen Boo k.).
TilE ROt'AL SroRY Booa REAlH!.RS ( 81:1: Books).
TOil: HOYAL SUSDARD READERS (Six Books).
Oua LnTLE Osa SERIE:i. (Continuow Storie. for Infant Schook)
HISTORY (England).
TOE" RoYA.L WISDSOR" HISTORY READ ERS (For Al ternatJ\'"e Course).
THE If ST. GEOR GE " HISTORY RUDERS ( ven Books).
TUE RoVA.L ESOLIsH HI:ITORY RUDERS (81:1: Boob).
GEOGRAPHY (England).
T il E 01 ROYAL 08BOIlSS " GEOGRAPHY R EADER.8( For Alternative Course).
TOE ROYAL ATLAS READERS (Seven Books ).
GEOGRAPHY AND HISTORY Combined (S cotland) .
Tor.: ...°EW RoYAL Scorrrsu RU.DERS (8b: Boob).
WRITING.
T il E ROYAL KISDEnOARTEX Copy BooKS (Eight Books, for Pencil Tracing).
TUE RoVAL PENSY Copy BooKS (Twelve Books).
TH E ROYAL Copy BooKs-RegiBtered-(T\\"enty·n\'e Bookt).
T U I: ROYAL STAR Cop y BoOKS (Th irteen Boolu).
T il E ROYAL UPRIGHT Copy BooK8 (Ten Books).
Til E B118 1SEgg COpy BooKR (Th ree Boob).
'rn s " R OYAL, " .. ROYAL STAR," and u n OVAL UPRIO Il T" \VRI rINo BooK8.
For Pencil Work .
Til E ROYAL D WTATION B OOKS (Eig ht Boob).
TII K R OYA L W RI TING \VALL SIlEETl'I (Tw elve Sheets Mounted on One Roller) .
Til E RoYAL UPRIO IIT WRITING WALL t;IIE ET~ (Twe lve Sheets on One Rolle r).
ARITHMETIC (En gland).
Til E R O YAL E NGLIS H A RITH)IETI CS, Sche me A (Seven Books).
Til E R OYAL };SO LI SH ARIT HMETICH, Scheme 11 (Seven Books).
ARITHMETIC (S cotland ).
TH E ROY AL CUSg ARITHHETIC (Junior and Senior DJviaJo na) .
Til E ROYAL Sc01TI9H ARITBXETIl":8 (Seven B ook.).
DRAWING.
BRC811 DRAWING FOR I S F ANTS.
T H I: R OYAL GRADUATED DRAWINO Boox e (Fifteen Boob).
T UE R OYAL GRADUATED DRAWISG C.l.RD8 (Seven Packett).
K IS DE RG .l.R T ES DUWISO BooKS (SiJ:: 8oo1u).
K I S OE RO A RT E S CoLOURED DRAWls o BooE8 (Fi ve Boob).
WALL MAPS.
T ill: RoVAL WA LL ~h P8 (Seven llaps In Seri••).
T O E ROYAL " "'A L L ATLAJUti OF C OX BI S I: D TZACUJJOO ASD TUT MAps.
For Prices and F ull Putfcuun, l ee Compl ete Catalogue.

THE OU",rEW TOLL. THl[ KNI:LL 011' "A"TIHO DAY."
I".,. o.

1l o 1!al S cboo l Seri es
'\i f rd·
f E
11/ 7
«195
,qlb
c.i:
~be
CRO W N
1Ro~al
READERS
(Sixth Book)
T H O ~ I A S NE LSON

CO N T ENTS.
• • (J T1u Ita lic' indicate Poetieai Pieca.
1. Am ong the Alligators,
2. ~l eas u r c lll eu t of Time,
3. Silkworms,
4. Diamond cut Diamond,
5. A" Ori eutol Lojend,
6. A Hippopotamus Hunt.
- I. ,
7. A H ip popotamus H unt.
- B., ... 29
8. K nmtch utk u and its Peopl e, 33
O. A Lumber Ca mp, 38
10. The Lumberme n, 42
11. About Icebergs, ... 45
I ~ . T he H eroine of Castle
Dangerous, 50
13. A Ci ty in th e Andes, 54
14. Lund and Sea Breezes, 59
15. 1'he Clolld, 62
16. A Desert R ide. - I. , 64
17. A Desert Ride.-II., 68
18. Th e Great F ire of London, ,3
10. On Read ing, 76
20. Ha ..~le not, Rest not, 79
2 1. ... '"alive . ports in Hawaii, SO
2"1. Papua and its P eople, 84
2.1. A T hree Days' Chase.i--d., 89
24. A Three Days' Chasc.-I I., 93
25. The Ocean. 96
2r.. Th e K ra katoa E ru pti on, 08
27. Humani ty in War. ... 102
28. The Battle of Corunna.
II -I.,
107
14 29. T ill Battle of Corunna..
18 - II.•... III
23 30. T he A rsenal at Sprinofi
eld , 116
26 31. Th e Lit tl e Corooral.i-- L , 118
32. The Lit tle Cornoraf.--Tl., 121
33. Per fu mes, ... 126
34. A Dinner Pa rt y in Ancient
Th ebes,
35. Elevy ioritten ill a Country
Churc hyard , .
36. A Tea -cara van , .
37. Across Lak e Baikal,
38. Th e world before Colum -
bus,
39. ~I on t ezuma. -I. t
40. )lontezuma.-II.,
41. lIlontezuma.-III.,
42. Th e Plat e oj Gold,
43. T he Land of the W hi te
130
134
139
142
146
151
156
160
164
Elephant , 167
44. Cr ossing the Bar.s--L, .. . I;I
45. Crossing the llar.- II.. 175
46. Moy Castle, 180
4,. A River in the Ocean, .. . 184
48. T he " K uro iwo," 189
40. Stories of Alexander t he
Great.- I..
193

vi
CONTENTS•
.;0 . Stories of Alexander th e
Great. - II., ...
5!. Da rid:« Lament f or .4 bsa·
lom,
52. Th e Overland Route,
53. The Rubber-trees of
Amazon,
19i
201
204
the
... 20S
54. Use. of Fores t a, . .. 212
55. A Forest Jl ynl1l, ... .., 215
56. 111e••erves and th e Brain, 2"20
5i. Touch, .. . 2"13
58. Taste and Smell , 2"26
59. The Ear, ~'9
60 . Th e Eye, ... 233
L '.4 11eyro,
I I PellSeTOSO,
To a Skylark,
23iIII"alsey 011 l.is Fall, ...
241 M ark .4l1t01lY'S Speech;
.. . 253
246
249
Notes and ~I ean iIl gs ,
W crd -Bullding and Derivation,
Gra mmar and Analysis,
Figures of Speech,
256
2iO
.. 2ill
285

l N°· VI.
1. AMONG THE ALLIGATORS.
1. One afternoon in May, I had paddled a few
miles up a sluggis h Florida ri ver, in an almost uninhabited
part of the country. As evening fell, I
returned in the canoe, floating with the curre nt.
The woods were full of perfume, and I drifted idly
along, drinking in the balmy br eath of th e pin es
and th e fragrance of th e lilies and other flowers
which grew on every side.
2. The gen tle hum of insects filled th e air, and
softened th e shrill voices of the frogs among the reeds,
while now and then trills of exq uisite bell-like notes
rang out from the throats of mocking-birds. Myriads
of fire-flies flashed and faded in th e thick undergrowth.
Pres ently the moon sent her pale light
through the thick foliage of th e trees, and th e misty
vapour over the ri ver shon e with a faint silvery
sheen. Enchanted with th e beauty of th e night, I
let th e current drift me slowly onward, th ough the
damp air warned me to hasten my return.
3. As I entered a wide lagoon surrounded by a rank

8 A)IQXG THE ALLIGATORS,
growth of marshy plants, I found th e air filled with
It musky odour. I knew by experience that it was
th e odour given out by th e alligator. Soon I heard
that sharp clacking noise which these creatures an:
fond of making with th eir huge jaws; and presently
I saw a large alligator not fifteen feet away on my
righ t, close to the bank of th e riv er. In th e bright
moonligh t, and in that clear water, the long body
of the crea ture shone greyish-green. Every mark
on it was distin ct. Right ah ead I saw another, and
th ere was still another to my left ; and farther on,
in th e shadow of the reeds, lay one, two, three big
ones and severa l small ones. In front, th e waters
swarmed with th em.
4. Drifting like a log with th e stream, th e canoe
did not attract th eir at tention. It was necessary to
steer very car efully, howev er, in order to escape a
collision with thcm, as one of th em migh t return the
blow with a snap of his formidable jaws. Iu spite of
all my precautions, while passing und er th e shadow
of some great trees, I ran straight upon the back of
a large female alli gator without secing her. She did
not move ; and as the canoe grated against her side
in pa ing on, her eyes glared into mine so ncar that
I could have touched them with my fingers. I cocked
my rifle, but the great creature made no effort to
attack me. Th en I saw about twenty little alligators
regain th eir places on her back and head, from which
my canoe had th rown th em.
5. Now and th en an alliga tor would lash th e
water Iuriously with its powerful tail, uud utter a
stra nge sighing bellow. One after anoth er all those
within hearing would join in, making the waters foam

A~IOKG THE ALLIGATORS. 9
and gleam, and raising a deafening noi e with their
hoarse cries and snapping jaws. I did not relish the
thought that a slap of some powerful tail might knock
me into th e water; so I went ash ore, and climbed up
an oak which overhung the river,
6. The .J.' orth American alligators do not attack
man, and I had never heard of anyone being in ­
jured by them in Florida ; but I did not care to risk
ALLlGATOaq.
being thrown into the water among them. Th e
Florid a wat ers teem with fish, which furnish th e alli ­
gatOl"S with all th e food they need ; but I once saw
It small hog, which was feeding on th e riv er-bank,
, eized and borne off shrieking and struggling in th e
jaws of an alligator.
i . . itting on a convenient branch, I watched the
alligatOl for an hour or so. Th e smaller one gam ­
bolled and frol icked like k ittens, cha ing one another

o
to A~ IO ~G TH E ALLIGATORS.
over the backs of the older ones, and tumbling about
with the liveliest and most graceful movements, Sometimes
a large one would sweep a tri be of small fellows
oft' his back , and pursue them to the bottom of the
river. Returning with one in his jaws, he would let
it go and catch it again, playing with it some time
before allowing it to escape.
8. After th e frolicking company went out of sight,
I followed th em in th e canoe, and soon overtook th em.
Paddling quickly, I dashed through the startled
th rong. They dived in great alarm und er the wat er,
and for some time I could trace them by the phosphorescent
gleam they made in th eir headlong rush.
I passed herd after herd as I made for the mouth of
th e river. Their not unpl easant musky odour was
wafted to where our schooner lay moored, half a mile
out at sea; and now and then, high above th e wash
of the waves on the low, sandy shore, rose that low,
hoarse bellowing, as th eir curious voices blended in n
chorus of strange sounds.
aI~li-ga-tors
un-in-hab-it-ed
ex-quis-ite
my r-i-ads
fo-ll-age
a-goon'
o-cour
ex-pe-ri-ence
ne~:es-sa-ry
col-lt-sion
for~mid-a·ble
pre-cau-tions
shriek~ing
con-ve-ni-ent
gam-bolled
frol-icked
live-li-est
phos-phor-es-cent
schoon-er
cho-rus
W ORD EXERCISE :-
1. Show th e connect ion in meaning between sluggish, sluggard,
slug, slack, and slouch.
2. ~Iak e a few sentences containing word. like per'fume and perfume',
whose meaning changes with a change of accent.
3. Give th e mean ing of chant, and show how th e root -meaning has
chan ged in th e words enchantment an incantation.
FCYr N OTES , see pafJe £511.

)IEASUREMENT OF TDIE. 11
2. MEASUREMENT OF TIME.
1. How did men first measure time ? We can
picture to ourselves how our ancestors turned their
eyes in wonder to the great sun j how they watched
him rising higher and higher till he reached his
noonday strength, then sinking lower and lower
until he disappeared beneath the west ern horizon
and left the world to darkness.
2. The great sun has sunk to rest, and in his
place have come th e gentle moon and th ousands of
twinklin g stars. But aga in th e sun rises, shines,
and sets. Again he is followed by moon and stars.
Man's first lesson in tim e has now been learned :
th e ligh t he calls day, th e darkness night.
3. Of all th e heavenly bodies, th e moon is th e only
one that seems to change its form and size. At one
tim e it is a mere crescent, at another it is a full
circle. Man counts th e days from new moon to new
moon, or from full moon to full moon, and calls the
period It month. This is th e second step in counting
tim e.
4. He next observ es chan ges in th e length of the
days and in the heat of th e sun. He sees the
flowers spring up, blossom, and decay, and th e trees
put on their gay ga rments of green, change them to
sober brown, ar.d finally lose the m altogether. His
ideas of seed-time, harvest, and winter are formed, and
he begin to count the moons from seed-time to seedtime,
or from winter to wint er, and makes the grand
diseovery- " Twelve months mak e one year." In
such a way as thi s men got th eir first notions of
year, and month, and day.

]2 MEASURE~IENT OF TUIE.
5. Hundreds of years seem to have passed before
hours , minutes, and seconds were th ought of. For a
long tim e morning, noon, and evening were th e only
divisions of th e day. Th e night was divided into
two 0 1' three
" watches." It
must have
been noticed
z o
"ery early
~
that th e shadows
of tree ,
West East
posts, and
Rod
other objects
OF THE S'["X-DIAL.
fell in th e
l'RI ~CIPLE
same direction at th e same tim e every day. From
this was invented th e sun-dial ; but it told the time
only when th e SUll
shone, and was useless
in cloudy weat her
or at night.
6. A great improvement
was made when
water-clocks and sandclocks
were invented,
In the one so much
water, and in th e oth er
so much sand, dropped
in a gi,-en tim e from a
high er to a lower vessel.
SeX-DI A L 0 ,," W.\ LL
Th e water-clock was used for periods of about twelve
hours; th e sand-clock WIts used for one hour , and was
therefore called an " hour-gla." Sometimes people
carried hour -glasses with th em, as we canoy watches.

~IEASURE~IEXT OF TnlE. 13
7. King Alfred of England was one of th e busiest
of men, and knew how precious time was. He
invented a new way of measuring it.
He ordered six candles of equal
weight and length to be made out
of a certain quant ity of wax. Each
candle was divided into twelve
inches, and each inch into tw elve
par ts. As
each cand le
Iiiiii.__........~......... - burned four
HOt:R-GUSS. hours, th c
six candl es la t ed twentyfour
hours. The king kept
such candles burning night
and day wherever he went.
As the cand les burne d one
inch in twenty minutes, and
three-tw elfths of an inch in
five minutes, Alfred was al.le
to do wh at no one before his
day had donc - to measure a
yery short space of time.
8. But the wind blew
through th e walls of his
palaces, th e wind ows of his
chu rches, and th e canvas of
ws\TF.R-c r.ocK .
his tents, and th e candl es
sometimes burned away at
an irr egular rate, and sometimes
were put out altogether.
So Alfred made
~nterns of wood with very thin plat es of horn for

14, SILK WORllS.
th e sides. Thus sheltered, his candles became more
trustworthy time keepers.
9. The fi rst clock with weigh ts and wheels is said
to hav e been invented about th e year 1000 A.D. ; but
clocks of th at kind could not be carried about from
place to place. Oth er four hundred and fifty yem-s
passed away before the first watch W II8 made at Nuremberg
in Germany. As th e works were shut up
in round metal cases, th ese early watches were ofte n
called " Nu rcmberg eggs." Th e cases afterwa rds came
to be made of many different shapes and sizes, and
they were ofte n ornamented with crystal and precious
ston es. as well as with gold and silver.
meas-ure-ment
an-ces-tors
dis-ap-peared'
ho-ri-zon
twiil~k1ing
cres-cent
cir-cle
pe-ri-od
fi~nal-Iy
di-rec-tion
sun-d i-al
bus -i-est
pr~ous
quan~ti.ty
pal-a-ces
can-vas
ir-reg-u -lar
lan-t erns
or-na-ment-ed
crys~tal
'VORD E XERCISE :-
I. Analyze the words ancestor, predecessor, and forefather, and
give the meanin g of the var ious parts of each.
2. Show the connect ion between crescent and increase.
3. Give th e distin ction betw een worthlessness and unw ort hiness,
and show th e connection betwee n worth and worship.
For NOTES, see pa{Je ~56 .
3. SILKWORMS.
1. One of th e most interestin g points in the manufacture
of silk is th e mode in whi ch th e silkworms
are reared. Those who are engaged in th is work
select a certain num ber of well-formed cocoons. At
the end of fifteen or tw enty days, the moth s come out

SILKWORMS. 1 5
of th ese cocoons. All moths whose wings are expand
ed at the time of their birth are regard ed as useful
; whereas those which
have crumpled wings and
no eyebrows, and which
are without down, are
considered useless, and
are at once destroyed.
2. After a day or two, >10TH.
the females, each having been placed on a sheet of
coarse paper, I:egin to lay their eggs. In th e silk
districts of the north of China, owing to the coldness
of th e climate, pieces of cloth are used instead
of sheets of pap er. The num ber of eggs which one
moth lays is generally five hundred, and the period
required for thi s is about three days. The moths die
almost immediately after they hav e laid th eir eggs.
3. During the aut umn and winter months, the
eggs are carefully put away on shelves in a large,
well-aired room. I n spring, each egg hatches out
into a tiny black worm scarcely thicker than a hair.
Those in charge begin at once to feed th e little worms
with the leaves of the mulb erry-tree, cut into very
small pieces with sharp knives, so that the leaves
are not bruised nor their juice lost. When the worms
are quite young, they are fed every half-hour. B.rund-by
their meals are reduced to one each hour ; and
when they hav e attained to th eir full growth, they
get only three or four meals a day.
4. Lik e all other creatures, these young silkworms
have their seasons of rest, and to these seasons the
Chin ese giv e distinguishing names. Th e first sleep,
which takes place on th e fourth or the fifth day after

1 6 SI LKWOR~IS .
birth, is termed the " hair sleep," and lasts but one
day. The second sleep takes place on th e eighth or
the nin th day , and th e third on the fourteenth. The
fourth and last sleep, which takes place about the
twenty-second day , is styled th e " great sleep," in consequence
of its long duration.
5. During each period of sleep, th e worms cast their
skins j and after getting rid of th eir old skins, th ey
grow very quickly in size and strength. When they
have reach ed th e age of thirty-two days, th ey are full-
Ft"LL-GROWN' SILKWORll.
grown, each being about two inches in length, and
almost as thick as a man 's little finger. Th ey are
then of an amb er colour. At this stage th ey cease
to take food, and begin to spin th eir silk cocoons.
6. In spinning, they move th eir head first to the one
side and th en to th e other, and continue this operation
until the whole body has been enveloped in a cocoon
or case of silk. Th e tim e which a worm requires to
accomplish this labour is from three to five days ; and
as soon as it has enclosed itself in th e cocoon, it falls

SILKWORMS. 17
into a deep sleep. The attendants th en place the
bamboo shelves on which th e cocoons lie ncar a slow
fire of charcoal or of wood, in order th at the chrysalids,
lIS the worms are called at thi s stage ,
may be killed by its heat. Otherwise
th ey would, in three weeks more, break
from th eir pri son and appear in th e form
of moth s-the last and perfect state of
insect life.
7. Th e chrysa lids having been destroyed,
the cocoons are removed fr om the
fram es. Women and girls now unwind
the cocoons, placing th em in boiling water,
in order that th e silk may come off more COCOOX.
e. ily. Th ese workers must be deft of hand and
expert in the business, fully capable of making the
threads of equal size, and of producin g th em bright,
clear , and glossy.
8. When the cocoons are put into boiling water,
the outer layer, which is called the silk rind or shell,
is first unwound. Another set of women, who arc
equally expert, are then engaged in unwinding the
inncr layer of th e cocoons, called th e silk pulp or flesh.
In th e course of a day, one woman can unwind five
ounces of silk; th e most expert work ers cannot do
more than eight ounces.
9. From long, white, and shining cocoons a fine and
good thread of silk is obtained j fr om th ose which are
large, dull in colour, and not firm of texture, a coarse
thread is produced. This coarse thread is used in
making th e stuffs with which dresses are lined. When
the silk covering is removed, th e chrysalids are eaten
by the workers, who regard th em lIS excellent food.

(I r)
/W j
18
man-u-fac-ture
co-coons'
im-me-di-ate-Ij'
au-tumn
mul-ber-ry
DIAMOND CUT DIA~[OND .
bruised
at-tained'
dis -tiil~guish -ing
con-se-quence
du-ra-tion
op-er-a-tion
en-vel-op ed
ac-com -plish
at-tend-ants
bam-boo'
chrys-a-lids
bus-iness
cii.~a-bl e
tex-ture
ex-cel-lent
\yORD E XERCISE :-
I. )[ake sentences showing the use of expanse and expansion.
2. Give various meanings of regard and of respect, distinguishing
the literal or primal)' from th e figurative or secondary meaning.
3. Explain the word texture, and give a list of words from the same
root, with meanings.
For X OTES, see J1a!le £56.
4. DIAMOND CUT DIAMOND.
1. :Mansour, an Egyptian merchant, one day visited
th e cadi on account of a law-suit, th e issue of which
troubled him but little, for a private conversation
with th e judge had given him hopes of th e success
of his cause. The old man th erefore ask ed his you ng
son Omar to accompany him, in ord er that lui migh t
be early accustomed to deal with the law.
2. The cadi was seated in th e courtyard of the
mosque. He was a fat, good-looking man, who spoke
little, and this, add ed to his large turban and his air
of perpetu al calmness, ga ve him a gre llo':. reputation for
justice and wisdom. Th e specta tors were num erous.
Th e principal merchants were seate d on th e ground
on carp ets, forming a semicircle in fron t of the magistrate.
Mansour took his seat a little way from th e
judge, and Omar placed himself bet ween the two, his
curiosity being st rongly excited.
3. Th e first case called was that of a young Banian,
with loose, flowing robes, who hod lat ely landed from
(gU)

20 DL·DlOND CUT DIA)!OND.
India, and who complained of IU1\;ng been cheated
by one of )Iansour's comrades in trade.
" Ha ving found a cask et of diam onds among the
effects left by my father," said he, " I set out for
Egyp t, to live th ere on th e proceeds of their sale. I
was obliged by bad weather to put into .Iiddah, where
I soon found myself in wan t of money. I went to
th e bazaar, and inquired for a dealer in precious
stones. The rich est, I was told, was )lansour ; the
most hone t, Ali, th e j eweller. I applied to Ali.
4. " He welcomed me as a son, as soon as he
learned that I had diamonds to sell. He gained my
confidence by every kind of attention, and advanced
me all the money I needed. One day, after dinner,
he examined the diamonds one by one, and said, ' My
child, these diamonds ar e of little valu e; my coffers ar e
fu ll of such stones. The rock s of the desert furnish
th em by thousands.'
5. " 'f o prove the truth of what he said, he opened
a box, and, taking therefrom a diamond thrice as large
as any of mine, gave it to the slave that was with me.
' What will become of me?' I cried. ' I tho ught
myself rich , and here I am, poor, and a stranger.'
'" )ly child ,' replied Ali, ' leave this cask et with me,
and I will give you Ii pric e for it such as no one else
would offer, Choose what ever you wish in .Iiddah, and
in two hours I will give you an equal weight of what
you have chosen, in exchange for your Indian ston e. .'
6. " On returning home, I learned that Ali had
been deceiving me. What he had gi\'en to the slave
wa nothing but a bit of cry stal. I demanded my
cask et. Ali refused to restore it. Venerable magis ­
trate, my sole hope is in your justice ."
\gt4)

D1A~IOND CUT DIA~IOND . 21
7. It was now Ali's turn to speak. " Ill ustrious cadi,"
said he, " it is true that we made a bargain, which I
am ready to kcep. The rest of th e young man 's story
is false. What matters it what I ga\'e the slave ?
Did I force the stranger to leave th e caske t in my
hands ? \Vhy does he accuse me of treachery ? Have
I brok en my word, and has he kept his ?"
8. " Young man ," said th e cadi to the Baninn,
"ha\'e you wit ne. es to prov e that Ali deceived you?
If not , I shall put the accused on his oath, as th e
law decrees." A Koran was brought. Ali placed
his hand on it , and declared three tim es that he had
not deceived the stranger, and that he was ready to
carry out his part of the bargain.
9. Omar had listened eagerly to all that was said.
He now approached th e stranger, and asked, " Do
you wish me to help you to gain your suit? " u Yes,"
was th e reply ; "but you are only a child ; you can
do nothing." " Have confidence in me for a few
moments," said Oma r, "Accept Ali's bargain ; th en
let me choose in your stead what you will take in
exchange for your diamonds, and fear nothing."
1O. The stranger having agreed to this, Omar bowed
to th e cadi. " Ali," said he to th e j eweller, "you have
doubtl ess brought the casket with you, and can tell th e
weight th ereof." " Here it is," said Ali ; " it weighs
twenty pound s. Choose what you will. If th e thing
asked for is in Jiddah, you shall have it within two
hours ; oth erwi se th e bargain is null and void."
" What we desire," said Omar, raising his voice, " is
a.nts' wings. You have two hours in which to furnish
he twenty pounds you have promi sed us." " This is
absurd," cried the jeweller; "it is impossible ! I
CIU) 2

22 DIA )IOND CUT DI AMOND.
should need half a score of slaves and SIX months
labour to satisfy so foolish a demand."
11. " Are there any winged ants in Jidduh ?" asked
the cadi. " Of course," answered th e merchants,
laughing. " Our houses are full of th em ; and it would
be doing us a great service to rid us of th em."
" Th en Ali must ke ep his promise, or give back the
casket ,' said th e ead i. " Tlus young man was mad
to sell his diamonds weight for weight: he is also
mad to demand such payment. 0 mu ch the better
for Ali th e first time; so much the worse for him t11C
second. Justi ce has not two weights and measures.
Every bargain holds good before th e law. Either
furnish tw enty pounds of ants' wings, or restore th e
'cask et to the \ Banian.' " A righteous judgment,"
shouted th e spectators, wonder-struck at such equity.
1 2. Th e casket was at once restored to the st ra nger,
who was now almost beside himself with joy. H e
took from it three diamonds of the first water and
forced them on Omar, wh o pu t them in his girdle, and
seated himself by his father, his gravity unmoved by
th e gaze of the assembly. L EI·E U\"RE·LABOULATE .
di-a-mo nd
ca~i
law-suit
is~sue
con-ver-sa-tion
mosque
per-pet-u-al
rep-u-ta-tion
prin-ci-pal
sem-i-cir-cle
mll~gis-trate
cu-ri-os-i-ty
ba-zaar'
jew-el-ler
ven-er-a-ble
il-lus-tri-ous
treach-er-y
right-e-ous
eq-ui-tv
gra~l-ty
\ V ORD EXY.RCISE:-
I. ~Iak e sentences conta ining th e words repute, reputati on, and
disreputable.
2. Explain th e fonnati on of the word welcome, sud show its use
... vari ous parts of speech.
3. Give th e meanings of the words equity, iniquity, equality, and
inequality.
For XOTES, see pafJe !S7.

A...'> ORIENTAL LEGE~m.
23
5. AN ORIENTAL LEGEND.
1. A king, grown old in glory and renown,
W ith wisdom wished his happy reign to crown.
Feeling the years turn white upon his head ,
H e thought upon his end, and thus he said:
.. Th ree sons I have , strong types of sturdy youth,
Bred in all honour , man liness, and truth ;
H onest and brave ar e they , I know it well ;
But traits th ere are in all that none may tell.
I'll test th em, therefore ; for I fain would know
'Which one shall rule th e best when I must go."
2. Th ereon he sent a sIave to call his sons
I nto his presence. St rong an d manly ones
They surely were , to glad a fath er's sight,
And mind him of his spring-time's manly might.
To whom th e king: "~Iy sons, the tim e draws near
W hen I, you r sire, shall be no longer here,
And I would kno w which of you I may trust
To wield th e sceptre when my hands nrc dust ;
And to that end I make you this requ est,
Which of my three sons loves his fath er best 1"
3. Then spak e the eldest : "Sire, my love for th ee
Is deeper, broade r, greater than the sea,
Vast as it is, that wets thy kin gdom's shore.
Such is my love for thee, my sire, and more."
Th e second then: " ~Iy fath er and my king,
There is not any yet created th ing
I n the whole universe, below, above,
To mark th e scope and measure of my love."
The young est simply said: " I cannot tell
Th ee more t han th is, 1 love my fath er well."
4 The king dis missed them with a tender word,
And sat and pondered well what he had hea rd j

..
24 A~ ORIENTAL LE GEND.
Then called his minister, and to him spake :
" :\ly lord, a pilgrimage I fain would mak e
To far-famed :\l ecca. That I may atone
For sins unpardoned, I will go alone,
Barefooted and bareheaded ; and if I
By Allah shall be called upon to die
W hile on this pilgrimage, 'ti s n:)" command
That my th ree sons together rul e th e land."
5. A year went by, and yello w were th e leaves,
The ri pened grain was gathered into sheaves,
A mi all made ready for the harvest sport,
\Vhen through the kin gdom-city, camp, an d court,
Seaport and hamlet-the sad news was sped,
That the wise rul er and j ust king was dead.
Loved as a monarch tende r, brave, and true,
H is people mourned him deeply as his due.
His sons were told th e words th e king had snid,
And reigned together in their father's stead.
6. The calendar had marked an oth er year,
And 011 th e drooping stalk th e full-grown ear
Throu gh golden husk and silken tassel showed,
Wh en wearily along th e dusty road
A beggar slowly moved towards th e town.
Outside the open gate he sat him down
And rested. Suddenly his thoughts were bent
Upon a man near by, with garments rent,
W ho sighed, and wept, and beat upon his breast,
A nd ever made this moan, " I loved him best."
7. " Friend," said th e begga r, "tell, if I may know,
\Vhat is the cause and secret of thy woe.
Allah hath certain cure for every ill ;
Thine may H e soften! " For a moment st ill
Th e othe r sat ; th en, wit h fr esh t

AN ORIENTAL LE GEND . 25
Ah ! never more shall men see such a one.
H e was Illy father, I his oldest son."
A ud then he beat once more upon his breast,
A nd rent his clothes, and cried, " I loved him best."
8. The beggar sighed. " Such love must Allah prize.
Thy brothers 1 mourn they also in this wise 1"
"Not so," the mourne r said. " The next in age
H is grief wit h other th oughts did soon assuage;
'Yith horse and hounds his hours are spent in sport,
To th e great shame and sorrow of the court.
The youngest bears th e pains and cares of state;
'Yorks out our father's plans ; to low and great
l\Ieteth out justice with impar tial hand,
And is belove d and honoured in the land."
9. The beggar left th e son on grief intent,
And st raightway to th e court his footsteps bent ;
Cast off his beggar's cloth es before th e throne,
And, clad in purple, proudly claim ed his own;
Cried, in a voice that made th e arch es ring,
" Hear ye, my people! As I am your kin g,
My power, my crown, my sceptre, and m:, throne
Go to Illy youngest son, and him alone !-
Son of my heart, I fold th ee to my breast ;
Who doth his fath er's work 100'es him th e best."
O-ri-ent~a1 pres-ence dis-missed' cal-en-dar
l~end wield
pil ~grim-age tas-sel
re.nown' scep-tre Mec

26 A HIPPOPOTA~lUS H UXT.
6. A HIPPOPOTAMUS HUNT.-L
1. After a journey of several days across a tract
of country near the river .l.'ile, we camped for the
night ill a patch of scrub a little larger and greener
than th ose urrounding it. We were th en about sixty
miles to th e south-west of Knssala. Next day we
made a slight deviation in our j ourney , in order to
visit an Ara b encampment. It proved to be th e
camp of a hunting party. Th ey had j ourneyed to
th e "great river " to get hippopotamuses' skins, wh ich
were to be mad e into shi elds, or to be sold at
Kassala ,
2. Aft er the sheik had offered us some coffee and
food, th e conv ersation turned into th e one channel of
interest to th is race-the use of arms nud the man agement
of the horse, Among the wenpons shown us
wail the spear used in hunting th e hippopotamus. It
had a large, heavy head of soft steel about eighteen
inches long, fitted with a single stout barb. 'I'he
shaft, was a light bamboo rod about ten feet long.
Attached to th e iron head was a light but very
strong rope t wenty feet long ; and at th e free end of
th e rope was a float, shaped lik e an oval football and
about the same size, made of a peculiarly light wood
whi ch they called ambatcli.
3. " We will now show .rou the hippopotamus,"
said the sheik.
I n a few minutes about th irty of u were on horse ­
back. We pre ed on to th e river. Th e current ran
strongly in th e middle, and th e banks were ir regular,
as if violently washed by th e acti on of th e great
spring floods. In the coves were quiet pools st udded

A HIPPOPOTA~US H~T . 27
with rocks. iYe left our horses in care of some of the
men. Th e great hunter of th e party, Jali by nam e,
hen put on his hunting costum e, which means that
he discarded most of his clothes, and brac ed a leathern
belt around his waist. He must have been seventy
years of age. He was more than six feet high, and as
stmight as an ar row. With his grey hair and bronzed
skin, he was a picture worth looking at.
4. Seizing a spear, he exam ined it in eyery part.
Then he withdrew the bamboo shaft from th e head,
thr ust th e head through his girdle, and coiled the
rope on his left arm, with th e float oyer his shoulder.
Thus equipped, and using the shaft a a pole, he
I >aped fr om boulder to bould er with the activity of a
boy, until he reached th e deep-water entra nce to a
large pool. As he leaped to the last boulder, two
hippopotamuses aros e from its shadow with a snort
and a ru sh, and swam rapidly through th e passage
into th e open river.
5. " They were awake; we were too soon after
their meal. But I wished to be certain of having
'me to find one to-day," said the sheik, as we proceeded
to another pool about half a mile below. As
we clambered over some rocks , and through a gorge,
at the bottom of which was a small pool, I saw the
immense head of a hippopotamus lying cIo e to a perpendicular
rock that formed a wall twenty feet long,
running at right angles to th e riv er, Th e old man,
Jnli , had been walking along j ust in front of me ; and
I\.S I touched him , and pointed down to the animal's
head, the gnw ity of his face was lift ed as a curtain
rio es : he looked forty years younger in an instant.
Hurriedly telling us in Arabie to halt and remain

28 A HlPPOPOTA~lUS HUX,..
quiet, he climbed up the side of th e gorge again and
disappeared.
6. In abou t five minu tes th e sheik touched my
hand, and directe d his eyes to th e middle of th e riv er,
There, in the rushing current, was the old man , quietly
carried along by it , with only half his head above water,
and the large float bobbing about in his wak e. As
he neared the jutting wall of rock, he could not have
been th irty feet from th e half-asleep riv er-horse, and
his head sank lower and 10wCl' until it was almost
submerged. .
7. " ur ely he, an old man , can never breast tha t
current to ga in th e rock ," I said in a whisper to
the chief But th e sheik only smiled, and made a
motion to be silent. As th e veteran hunter passed
the end of th e rock, he turned on his side, and after
a fierce str uggle with th e water, gain ed a footing
on th e lower part of th e rock, where, hidd en from our
view, he rested until he had regain ed his breath.
8. Th en his hand app ear ed on th e top, next his
head , and th en, by sheer muscular foree marvellous in
so old a man, he raised himself to th e very top of the
rock. He fitted th e shaft of th e spear into th e head;
cast clear the rope and float ; rose slowly to his full
heigh t, his long, sinewy arm raised : and advanced
to th e edge of th e pool. Th e sun behind him suddenly
cleared a large belt of cloud that for a few
minu tes had obscured it, and cast his shadow forward
righ t in front of th e hippopotam us. Slowly
the animal sank. Th e old Arab did not move ; no
statu e of bronze was ever more rigid than this old
river-king, with his dripping body and upraised pear,
just risen from th e flood.

A HIPPOPOTA~lUS HUXT. 29
hip-po-pot-a-mu s
de-vi-a-tion
sheik
man-age-men t
weap-ons
pe-cul-i-ar-ly
am-batch/
leath -ern
e-quipped'
boul-der
pro-ceed-ed
per-pen-dic-u-lcr
cur-tain
hur-ried-ly
sub-merged'
mus-cu-lar
mar-vel-lous . ,
sin-ew-y
ob-scured'
stat-ue
" . ORl> K 'l:ERCISE :-
I. Give a list of nouns in -ity, formed from adject ives, as
ac tivity.
2. )Iake sentences showing the use of th e word s Arab, Arabic, and
Arabian, as adjectives.
3. Give a list of words form ed from th e stem of submerge, with
various prefixes and term inati ons.
For X OTES , seep

30 A HIPPOPOTA~ ru S H U ~T,
3. " POOl' Jali! he is gone," said the sheik, anxiously
peering in all directions over the blood-stained water.
" Well, let us go after the wounded animal." Leading
th e way , he ran quickly down th e bank of the
river to where the hippopotamu had struck the
shall ows and was ploughing his way to land , sending
up showers of spmy into th e air a his ungainly form
gall oped through th e shallow stream.
4. uddeuly he seemed to catch sight of th e float
bobbing behind him, and he immediately turned to
attack it. Th en two men, carrying a long rope,
plunged out into the current and drifted until one
was well past th e animal. As soon as th ey got him
midway betw een them, the two men made th eir way
ash ore, sweeping th e rope along until th ey caught the
float in its loop. Th en all th e Arabs seized the rope,
an d slowly dre w the animal to shore.
5. As long as he was in the water, the hippopotamu
s seemed not to notice th e crowd pulling at him,
and ploughed along in a vain effort to reach th e float,
whi ch was dancing in front. But as soon as he reached
t he land, a change came over him. For a moment
he stood at bay; then, regardl ess of his wound , he
charged stl'l1ight at us, his irresistible rush carrying
to th e ground nearly everyone who was hauling at
th e rope. Woe betide the man who was not swift
in regaining his feet : But th e natives are as act ive
as cats. Th ey scattered in all directions, not running
away, but pas ing behind or to one side of th e an imal,
diverting his attention lind breaking his charge; while
those near 'It th e ends of the rope got a fresh purchase
by passing it round a rock and bringing the an imal
up with a round turn.

A HIPPOPOTAMUS HU~T. 31
SP&.\ Rl XG THE HIPPOPOTA ltl:S.
6. N ow two hunters attacked him , one on each
side. The animal charged one of th e hunters, who
immedi ately fled; but th e other attacked him with
his spear as he passed. Charge after charge he made,
snapping th e spear-shafts like reeds, and biting one
of the ropes in two, until th e son of th e sheik,
taking a tri ed spear in his hand, went to meet him
single-handed. The hippopotamus rushed blindly at
him . Th e hunter jumped warily to one side to avoid
the rush ; th en, as th e rope caused the animal to
swerve round, th e young man ran up and pierced
him to th e heart,
7. As soon a th e excitement had subsided, th e
sh eik with a small party went to see if th e body of
Jali could be seen in the clear wat er, and recovered.
We saw nothing except th e loose shaft of the
spear floating near th e outle t of th e pool. I felt
thoroughly sorry for th e fine old hunter ; but nothing

32 A HIPPOPOTA1IUS HUKT .
could be done, and we turned to go. But what
WIl8 that ? Where did that chuckling laugh come
from ? Lying down on th e wall of rock, and peering
over its side, we saw old Jali hanging to a
proj ection below, quietly laughing to himself at our
gloomy looks.
8. We pull ed the old man up, and found him
uninjured, but yery weak and tired. He told us
that when he fell he had enough presence of mind
to turn oyer beneath the water and div e back close
to th e rock, wh ere he remained submerged as long
Il8 he could. He knew that to k eep und er was his
only chance of safety. Th e animal, not seeing him,
made for th e open ri ver, Then Jali got his head out
of th e water, and quietly rested, not venturing to scale
th e rock until we came back to look for him.
9. On our return to th e camp, I count ed eight hip popotamuses
tha t th e Ara bs had secured in less than
three weeks. Thi s would supply th em with food for
It very long tim e ; and th e hides, wh en transported
to Kassala, would bring high prices.
quiv~red
de-scend-ed
e-no r-mous
for e-most
re-ap-peared'
aiI~xious-ly
gal-loped
ir-re-sist-i-ble
haul-ing'
re-gain-ing
di-vert-ing:
at-ten-tion
pur-chase
war-i-ly
ex-cite-ment
thor'-ough-ly
pro-j ec-tion
un-in-jured
ven~tiir-ing
trans-port-ed
" ' ORD Ex ERCISE :-
I. llake sente nces showing the use of th e words lightening and
lightning.
2. Show th e connect ion between the words drive, drift, and drove.
3. Give vari ous meanings of the word bay, used as different parts of
speech.
For KOTES, Bee JKl1Je 257.

KA)I TCHATKA AND ITS PE OPLE . 33
K.\ llTC HADALS.
8. KAMTCHATKA AND ITS PEOPLE.
1. If you look at a map of Siberia, you will notice
a peninsula jutting southward from its north-eastern
corner. This is Karntchatka, A great mnge of
mounta ins runs through the entire length of the
peninsula, and contains five or six active volcanoes.

34 KA)ITCHATKA AND ITS PE OPLE .
The central and southern pa rts of the country are
broken up by the spurs of th e great mountain range
into deep, picturesq ue vall eys, and th e scenery is perhaps
the most beautiful in all Northorn Asia.
2. We sailed from America aero th e Pacific to thi
northern land. The very nam e of Knmtchatka had
always called up to
our minds e\'erything
ba rre n and
inhospitabl e. We
did not think for
a moment that
such a country
could hav e beautiful
scenery and
luxuriant vegetati
on. But it was
summer wh en we
arr ived, and to our surprise and delight we looked
upon grassy hill s covered with trees and green bushes,
and valleys white with clover and Iu\\'ing little groves
of silver-barked birch. Even th e rocks nodded with
wild roses and columbine, whi ch had taken root in
th eir cleft s.
3. The vege ta tion everywhere, un touched as yet by
the aut umn frosts, seemed to have an almost tropical
luxuriance. High, wild grass, mingled with flowers,
extended to the brinks of the rivers ; alp ine roses grew
in dense th ickets along the bank, and dro pped their
pink and yellow petals like fairy boat upon th e surface
of the still, clear water ; yellow columbine drooped
low over the rive r ; and strange black lilies, with downcast
looks, stood here and th ere in sad lonelin e

KA)ITCHATKA AND ITS PEOPLE. 35
4. Nor was animal life wanting to complete the
picture. Wild ducks with long outstretched necks
shot past us cont inually in their swift, level flight,
utt ering hoarse "quacks" of curi osity and alarm.
Th e cries of geese came to us, softened by th e distance,
from the higher "slopes of the mountains; and
now and then a magnificent eag le, startled from his
solita ry watch on some jutting rock , expanded his
broad-barred wings, launched himself into the air,
and soared upward in ever - widening circles, until
he became a mere moving speck ag l1inst. th e white,
snowy crater of the nearest volcano.
5. Th e population of th e country is made up of
three distinct races-the Russiuns, th e Knrnt chadals
or settled natives, and th e wandering Korak s, The
Kamtchaduls, who are th e most num erou s, ar e principally
occupied in fishing and trapping , and in the
cultivation of ry e, turnips, cabbages, and potatoes.
Th ey live in little log villages, which are built neal'
the mouth of some riv er or stream, or inland among
scattered clumps of poplar and yellow birch, and are
protected by high hills from th e cold northern
winds. Th e houses, which are clustered irrcgularly
tog eth er near th e beach, ar e very low, and
are made of logs squared and notched at th e ends,
and having th e chinks stuffed with ma es of dry
lIlO .
G. Here and th ere between th e houses stand a few
curi ous buildings which are used as fish storehouses.
Th ey are simply conical log-tents raised from th e
ground to secure th eir contents from th e dogs.
Th ey resemble small haystacks sta nding on four
legs. High, square frames of horizontal poles tand

3 6 KA)!TCHATKA AXD ITS PE OPLE ,
beside every house, filled with th ousands of drying
salm on ; and th e smell which fills th e air all around
betrays th e nature of the Kamtchudnls' occupation,
and of th e food upon whi ch th ey live. Half a dozen
dug-out can oes lie bottom upw ard on th e sandy beach,
covered with lm'ge neatly-tied ncts ; two or three
long. narrow dog-sledges stand up on tlu-ir ends
against every house; and a hundred or more sharpeared
dogs, tied at intervals to Ion::!. heavy poles, lie
panting in th e sun, snapping viciously at the Hies and
mosqui toes whi ch disturb th eir rest.
7. In th e centre of th e village, facing th e west, in
all th e glory of red paint and glittering domes, stands
the Greek church, contrasting strangely with the
rude log houses over which it lifts its shining golden
cross. It is generally built of carefully-hewn logs,
pain ted a deep brick-red, covered with a green sheetiron
roof, and surmounted by two onion-shap ed domes
of tin, which are sometimes coloured sky-blue and
spangled with golden stars.
8. The settled natives of Nor thern Kmutchatka
have genel'lllly two different residences, in which they
live at different seasons of th e year-a win ter settlement
and a summer fishing- station. In th e former,
which is gener'ally situated und er th e shelte r of timbered
hills several miles fr om th e en-con t, they
re ide from September until June, The fishi nq-station
is always built near the mouth of a riv er 01 ' stream,
and consis of a few earth-covered huts, and a great
number' of wooden fram es on which fish are hung to
dry, To this fishing-station th e inhabitants all remove
early in J une, leaving their winter settlement
entirely deserted,

K A~JTC H ATKA AXD ITS PEOPLE. 37
9. The wand ering Kora ks of Kamtchatku, who are
divid ed into about forty different band s, roam over
the great steppes in the northern part of th e peninsula.
They wander alm ost constantly with th eir great
herds of reindeer, and so unsettled and restless are
they in th eir habits, that th ey seldom camp longer
than a week in anyone place.
] O. This, however, is not altogether du e to love of
change. A herd of four or five thousand reind eer
will, in a few days, paw up the snow and eat all
the moss within a radius of a mile from the encampment
, and th en, of cours e, th e ban d must move to
fresh ground . Th ey must wander, or th eir deer will
starve, and th en their own starvation follows as a
natural consequence.
11. Th e restl ess habit s thus produ ced have now
become part of th e Korak's very nature, so that he
could hardly live in any other way. This wandering,
free life has made the Koraks bold, impatient of
restraint, and perf ectly self-reliant. Give th em a small
herd of reind eer, and a moss steppe to wander over,
and th ey ask nothing more from all th e world.
pic-tu-resque'
scen~r-y
in-hcs-pi-ta-ble
lux-u~ri-ant
v~ge-ta~tion
col-um-bine
trop-i-cal
con-tin-u-al-ly
m~-nif-i-cent
sol-i-ta-ry
pop-u-la-tion
hor-i-zon-tal
salm-on
vr'-cious-Iy
mos-qui-toes
res -i-den-ces
steppes
rein-deer
ra-di-us
re-straint'
'YORD E XERCISE :-
I. Expl ain the differen ce between the word s luxuriant aud luxurious,
and give the abstract noun connected with each.
2. Analy. th e words surmounted and encampment, and give the
meanin g of th e various parts of each.
3. Explain th e word nodded as applied to rocks in sect ion 2.
For K OTES, .ee pGge !D8.
3

38 A Lm lB ER CAMP.
9. A LUMBER CAMP.
/ 1. Th ere is no summer in a Canadian lumber eamp;
at any rate, th ere is nobody in th e ca mp in summer,
whi ch amounts to the sam e thing. The season of
activity in th e camps, 01' th e " sha nties" as th ey are
generally called, extends fr om late iepte mber to early
April. Let us follow a ga ng that is going upon a
" limit " still un touched by th e ax e, far up th e Black
Riv er, a tributary of th e Ottawa, a hundred miles or
more from the nearest village. Thi gang consists of
about Iorty men, including the foreman, clerk, carpcnter,
cook , and chore-boy, all active, sturdy, and
good-natured fellows.
2. Scouts have previou sly selected th e best site for
the camp. On arriving, the first thing done by the
gang is to build th e shanty, which is to be th eir home
during the long, cold winter. This is the way they
go about it :- Fi rst of all, a number of trees are cut
down . The trunks, cleared of all thei r branches and
roughly squared, are sawed into the propcr lengths,
and ar e th en laid one upon another until an enclosure
is made, with walls eight feet high. Upon the top
of thes e walls strong beams are laid , which are supported
in th e centre by four gr eat pillars. Then
comes th e roof.
3. A floor of roughly-flattened tim bers husing been
laid , and a door cut, it only remains to construct the
" camboose," or fireplace, and th e bunks. A bank of
sand about two feet deep and six feet square makes
the hearth, Over it extend th e two wooden cranes that
support th e capacious kettles. A mighty fire roars
and crackles unceasingly upon th e hearth, its smoke

A LIDIBER CA ~I P " 3 9
escaping th rough a square hole in the roof-a hole
so big that one IDay lie in th e bunks and study the
stars. The bunks are sloping platforms about seven
feet in length, running along th ree sides of the room.
Lt:ll BERlSG.
4" The fortv men ar e divided according to the
nature of their' work. The clerk, cook, and chore -boy
are th e " home-guard." Th e others, according to th eir
various abilities, are choppers, road-cutters , teamsters,
sawyers, and chainers. Th e only duty requiring ex-

40 A LUMBER CA~[P.
planation is that of chore-boy. He is the cook's
assistant, and general servant of th e shanty. He has
to chop th e firewood, draw th e water, wash th e dishes,
and perform a multitude of such odd j obs, in return for
which he is apt to get little thanks ami much abuse.
5. Th e choppers have the most imp ortant and interesting
part of the work. Th ey always work in
pairs, and go out armed with a keen axe apiece and
It cross-cut saw between them. Haying selected their
victim-s-say It splendid pin e, tow ering more than a
hundred feet in th e air-they take up th eir position at
opposite sides of it. Soon the strokes of th e ax es ring
out in quick succession. For some tim e th e yellow
chips fly fast, and presently a shiver runs through the
tree's mighty frame. One of the chopp ers cries warningly
to th e oth er, who hastens to get out of the way.
A few more strokes are given with nice skill. Th en
comes a rending crack, and t he stately tree, afte r
quivering a moment as if un certain which way to
fall, cras hes headlong to the ground.
6. The shantyman leads a fr ee, hearty, healthy
life. From dawn until dark he works in the open
air, exercising lungs and muscles. His fare is substantial
in quality and unlimited in quantity. When
the day's work is over, and he trudges home to the
shanty, he finds the warm welcome of a steaming
supper awaiting him. This usually consists of a pot
of excellent pea -soup, a boiler of strong tea, a big pan
full of fat pork, fried and floating in gra\'y, another
pan containing slices of cold boiled pork, and huge
loaves of bread baked in great iron pots buried deep
in the ash es of the" camboose," better than city baker
eyer made.

A LU~lBER CA ~ I P. 41
7. Th ere is not much change in th e bill of far e all
wint er. Occasi onally, perhaps, if th e roads permit,
fresh beef ., on foot " will be sent up, and th e lumbe r­
men may enjoy th e luxury of stea k and roast. Ofte n
gllme will fall in th eir way whil e th ey are working in
the woods. Great is the rejoicing when th ey succeed
in brin ging down a fat deer. Bear- steak , too, is not
unknown.
. After sup per, the shantyman has an hour or
more before bed-time. The French-Canadians are
especially fond of singing, and many of th eir songs
lire full of spirit and beauty, By nine o'clock, at th e
lat est, all hav e "turned in ," Th e process of going to
bed consists simply in taking oft' one's coat and boots,
lind rolling up snugly in a couple of thick blankets.
In the dusk of early morning th e foreman's loud
voice is heard calling to th e men, " Turn out now,
and get your breakfast:" Th e lumberman has been
asleep ten good hours, bu t he feels 118 if he had j ust
luin down !
J . M. OXLEY.
trib-u-ta-ry
cho;~y
pre -vi-ous-ly
en-clo-sure
pil-lars
cam-boose'
hearth
ca-pa-cious
un-ceas-ing-ly
a-bil-i-ties
team-ste rs
ex-pla-na-tion
as-sist-ant
mul-ti-tude
suc-ces-sion
ex-er-cis-Ing
mus-cles
su b-stan-tial
un-lim-it-ed
oc-ca-sion-al-ly
W ORD EXER CI SE :-
J. ~ l a k e sente nces showing th e use of the words tribute, tri butary,
and attribute, and explain th e conn ect ion Letween them.
2. Explain in what sense th e word timbers may be used in the plu ral ,
and when it rna)' not .
3, Give a list of nouns ending in -s ter , as teamster, with meanings.
For XOTES, see pa[J~ !58.

THE LmlBE R~[ E N.
10. THE LUMBERMEN.
1. 'Vildly round our woodland quarters
Sad-vo iced autumn grieves,
Thi ckly down these swelling waters
Float his fallen lea ves,
Through the tall and nak ed tim ber,
Column- like and old,
Gleam th e sunsets of November,
From th eir skies of gold.
2, O'er us, to the southward heading,
creams the grey wild-goose ;
O'er th e night-frost sounds th e treading
Of th e br indled moose.
N oiseless creeping, while we're sleeping,
Fr ost his nig ht-work plies;
'oon his icy bridges heaping
Shall our log-piles rise,
3. \Vhen with sounds of smothered thunder,
On some night of rain,
Lak e and river break asund er
Wi nter 's weak ened chain,
Down the wild )Iar ch f100t! sha ll bear them
To the saw-mill's wheel,
On where Steam, th e slave, shall tear them
W ith his teeth of steel.
1. H ere are mossy carpets, bet ter
Than th e Persian weaves,
A nd than Eastern perfume weet-r
...; em th e fallen leaves ;
A nd a music wild and solemn
From th e pine tree's height,
R olls its vast and sea-like volume
On the wind of night ;-

THE LU:YBEIUI EN. 43
5. Mak e we here ou r camp of winter J
And t hrough sleet and snow,
P itchy kn ot and beechen splinter
On our hearth shall glow.
H ere, with mirt h to lighten duty,
" ' 1.' shall lack alon e
W omun's smile and girlhood's beauty,
Childhood's lisping tone.
6. But their hearth is brighter burning
For our toil to-day ;
And the welcome of returning
• hall our loss repay ,
Wh en, like seamen from th e waters,
From the woods we come,
Gree ting sisters, wives, and daughters,
A ngels of our home.
r. "Not for us th e measured ringing
From the village spire,

'lHE
L U~Ill E lnI EN.
Not for us the Sabbath singing
Of the sweet-voiced choir;
Ours the old majestic temple,
Where God's brightness shines
Down the dome so grand and ample,
Propped by lofty pines.
8. H eeding truth alone, and turning
From the false and dim,
Lamp of toil, and altar burning,
Are alike to Him.
Strike then, comrades ! trade is waiting
On our rugged toil;
Far ships waiting for th e freighting
Of our woodland spoil.
9. Cheerily on the axe of labou r
Let the sunbeams dance,
Better than the flash of sabre
Or the gleam of lance.
U p, my comrades, up an d doing I
Mauhood's rugged piny
St ill renew ing, bra vely hewing
Through the world our way.
.r. G. W lII TTI£ R.
grieves a-sun-der vol-ume ma-jes-tic com-rades
col-umn Per-si-an beech-en am-ple freight~ing
tread-ing' per-fumes wel /come propped sa-bre
brin-dled so l-emn choir a l-tar hew~ing
W ORD EXERCISE:-
I. Give various meanings of the word quarter, as different I"'rts 01
speech, and in combination with other words.
2. )Iak e sentences showing the connection between freight and
fraught, and give their meanings.
3. "'rite in prose the substance of verses I, 2, and 3.
F or S OTES, SU pa!Je ~58 .

ABOUT ICEBERGS.
4 5
AS
ARCTIC GLACIER.
11. ABOUT ICEBERGS.
1. The whole interior of Green land is covered with
an immense ice-cap, many hu ndred fect in thickness.
Evon in summer the heat of the sun is powerless to
mclt this mass, which only freezes into great er solidity
when thut heat is withdrawn. Th e immense pre ure
of the new snowfall of each ycar helps to turn the
lower parts into solid ice.
2. Th e gr cat weight of snow also acts a a propelling
power, and forces the icy stream down the
valleys towards the COl1.8t, where it app cars as an

46 ABOUT ICEBERGS.
enormous crystal pr eCIpICe. At last th e front of th e
glllCicl' is forced into th e sea, and into deeper and still
deeper water. It begins to feel th e action of th e
wav e and tides, wh ich wear away its base, and
great cliffs of ice overhang th e ocean.
3. A lofty cliff of ice, thus overhanging th e wat er,
begins to show signs of insecurity. Great caverns
hav e been formed in it base, deep fissure are
discernible in its surface. • udd enly, with a roa r
far louder than thunder, the ice-mountain snaps
asunder, and th e detached mass comes cras hing down.
A cloud of spra y dashes high into the air, and a young
iceberg is born. It div es as it touches th e waves, rises
slowly, sways and tumbles to and fro, but at last finds
its balance. Its fr ont is one hundred and fifty feet
above th e wav es ; but there is about nin e tim es as
much bulk beuoath as above t he surface.
4. Th e bcrg is scarc ely launched into life before
it begins to feel the influ ence of the great Arctic
Curre nt that flows southward through Baffin Bay and
Dads Strait. Born e on th e bosom of this stream,
it starts on it s long voyage of six or possibly twel ve
months. Af3 th e berg reach es a warmer climate, th e
silent raj's of the sun and the acti on of th e warmer
air begin slowly to take effect : streaml ets trickle
down its sides; great crags ever and anon fall from
it with a ullen plunge into th e ocean,
5 Soon it becomes top-heavy-it reels and turns
over, Rocky fragments embedded in its now upturned
base are exposed to th e light. Th e berg presents
a completely new front. and is no longer recognizable
as th e same tow ering monst er that left the
portals of th e Korth months before. It is in a

I C E B E R G S.

48 ABOUT ICEBERGS.
state of unstable equilibrium, and as fra gments are
broken oft; it frequently turns over with a hoarse
roar, All sailors know how dangerous are icebergs
in this condit ion. They call them "growle r~:' and
gi\'e th em a wid e berth.
6. Greatly reduced in size, th e berg still holds on
i' eourse, and approaches th e banks of Xewfoundland.
Now it enters th e warm water of th e Gulf Stream,
and its di olut ion is at hand. Cascades are streaming
down its sides; caverns are worn right through
its centre; small lakes are form ed on its summit ;
rents and fissures are constantly widening ; finally ,
it falls to pieces with a noise lik e thunder. Its
shattered remains are scattered far find wide, and
speedily melt in the warm waters. The berg is no
more.
7. Such is th e life-history of all iceberg. "When
it reaches a certain stage-when it becomes" rotten,"
as th e sailors say-it is especially dungerous. Th en
a slight cause will make it break up into fra gments,
raising huge billows which migh t swamp a vessel.
Th e concussion of the air from the firing of a gun, or
even the noise made by a steamer, has been kn own
to cause th e breaking up of an iceberg.
8. Sometim es a berg has projections or spurs underneath
th e water, stretching far out from its base, and
a vessel th at ventures too near may strike on one of
th ese unseen ice-reefs. In July 1890, a steamer with
tourists on board, who were anxious to have a near
view of a large berg, approached so close that she
struck on one of its projecting spurs. Th e shock and
th e weigh t of th e ve el brok e off th e spur, and at the
same time a huge piece of the berg, many hundreds

ABOU T ICEBERGS. 49
of tons in weight, fell into th e water with a fearful
roar close behind the steamer. A great wave lifted
her ste rn, and she seemed to be going to the botto m j
but th e good ship came slowly up, her deck covered
with ice fragments, and cataracts of water streaming
from her sides. It was an extremely narrow escape.
9. There are man,)' berg-producing glaciers on th e
Greenland coast. The largest kn own , the Hum boldt,
was reported by Dr. Kane as extending forty miles
along the coast, and presenting a perp endicular front
three hundred feet high. This glacier is nine hundred
feet thick, and advances at a rate of forty-seven feet
a day.
10. Sir J ohn Ross once saw an iceberg two and
one-fifth miles broad, two and one-half miles long,
and one hundred and fifty -three feet high. In the
sout hern hemisph ere much larger bergs have been
seen, towering from seven hun dr ed to eight hundred
feet above the waves. It must not be forgotten that
in estimating the size of an iceberg, th e visible portion
is only one-tenth part of the whole mass.
In-te-ri-or
so-lid-i-ty
pro-pel-ling
pre 5Q-pice
gla-ci-er
in-se-ciir-i-ty
fis-sures
dis-cern-i-ble
bal-ance
ern-bed -ded
rec-og-nlz-a-ble
por~tals
e-qui-lib-ri-um
dis-sol-u-tion
cas-cades'
con-cus-sions
tour-ists
cat-a-racts
e~ti-mat.ing
vis-i-ble
'YaRD EXERCISE :-
I. Give a list of verbs 'lith th e stem pel, as propel, and the
abs trac t noun form ed from each.
2. ~rak e sentences showing t he use of stability, unstable, and establish,
and their connection in meaning.
3. Give th e meaning of dissolution, so lution, and resolution, and the
verbs from which they are formed .
For XOTES, seepaye U 8.

50 THE HEROINE OF CASTLE DANGEROUS.
12. THE HEROINE OF CASTLE DANGEROUS.
1. Long before th e capture of Quebec by General
Wolfe, a large part of Canada was settled by the
French. The early settle rs " took th eir lives in th eir
hand '," for in those days Indians lurked everywhere,
HUlking wa r upon th e whi te men.
2, One unny morning late in October 16 92 , the
fail' young daughter of eigneur Rocheres came out
of th e ga te of th e fort which form ed her home, and ,
accompanied by a servant, walked down toward th e
riv er, he wa expecting a visitor, Madam e Font aine,
fresh from Paris, who was coming to keep )I adeleine
company whil e her father and mother were away in
Montreal.
3, Suddenly th e report of a gun was heard in the
distance, " Lavi olette,' said Mudeleine to the servant,
"run to th e top of that hillock and see why 'the gun
was fired." Th e man went as he was dir ected, and
Mudelcine an xiously awaited his return. In a few
minutes he came rushing down th e slope, crying, " The
Iroquois : th e Iroquois 1 Run for your life : "
4. Turning round, she saw smile fifty Indians running
to cut oft' her retreat to th e Iort ; but )Iadeleiue
was too fleet for them, Seeing that th ey could not
catch her, th e Indians began to fire. Happily, however,
their bull ets failed to take effect. A soon as
Madeleine was within hailing distance of th e fort, she
shouted brave ly, " To arms: to nrms : "
5. Th e inmates of th e fort--her broth ers (two mere
boys), two soldiers, a servant (an old man of eighty),
and a nu mber of women and child ren-c--were in a
state of panic ; bu t l\Indeleine at once took command,

THE HEROINE OF CASTLE DANGEROUS. 51
and prepared for the defence of th e fort. Th e gate
was barred, and breaches in th e wall were hastily
repaired. Th en the brave girl hurried to th e blockhouse
for arms and ammunition. H ere she found
th e two oldiers hiding, terror-stricken, from th e foe.
One of th em was standing ncar th e powder with a
lighted match in his hand. " What are you going to
do with that match ?" cried Madeleine.
" Set fire to the powder and blow us all up , to
save us from th e torture of the Iroquois," was the
sullen reply .
" You miserable cowards !" she cried, dashin g the
match fro m his hand and sta mping out th e flame
.. Go and defe nd th e fort : " and the men obeyed.
6. lIadeleine sup plied herself with nmmunition,
an d tak ing a gun, said to her brothers, .. Let us
fight to the death ! We are fighting for our religion
and our country." \Vith th ese words the three ;yonng
warriors went to join in th e defence of th e fort. And
right gallantly they foug ht. The boys were born
soldiers. The only tales which had enlivened th eir
long winter evenings had been stories of heroic adventure,
and th ey had been longing for an occasion
lik e this. In spired by their daring sister, th ey now
mad e good use of their opportunity.
i. The Indian s did not know how weak was the
garrison of th e fort, so they determined not to attempt
an attack at once, but in th e meantime to search for
stragglers in th e woods. Whil e th ey were away, the
canoe with the Fontaine family arrived, and reached
the fort in safety.
8. It was most probable that the Indians would
attack th e fort /.l,t night. When it grew dark,

52 THE HEROIXE OF CASTL E DAXGEROUS.
Madeleine assembled the garrison of six, and addressed
them thus : "God has saved us from th e hand s of our
enemies, but we must take care not to fall into th eir
snares to-night. I shall take charge of th e fort with
th e old man , and another who never fired a gun. The
rest of rou must defend th e women and children in
the block-hou e, which is the st rongest place. And if
I am take n, don 't surrender, even if th e I ndians burn
me before r our eres 1 Th e enemy can't hurt r ou in
the block-house, if you make th e least attempt to fight."
9. And so th ey all went to th eir place Every few
minutes " All's well " rang out from fort to blockhouse.
Th e Indians heard it as they gathered round
their council fire to discuss th e plan of attack, and
as th ey heard the shout they thought th e fort must
be full of watchful soldiers. So once more the attack
was postponed till dawn.
1O. For a week the siegc continued. During that
tim e Madeleine took bu t hasty meals, and contented
herself with bri ef intervals of sleep, sitti ng at a table
with her head lyin g on her arms folded oyer her gun,
ready for action. Her broth ers imitated her, and never
showed th e slightest sign of fear. Th e Iroquois now
and then showed themselves ; but the crack of a
musk et and th e whiz of a bullet warned them to
keep out of sight. Dar after day they camped in
th e woods till the garrison should be sta rved out.
11. Aft er seven days th e splashing of paddles was
heard in the • t. Lawrence, and a hail in French told
th e besieged th at help had come at last.--the soldiers
of the king. lladeleine posted a sentry at th e gate,
and walked down to th e ri ver, aluting the officer
in command, she said , " Sir, 1 resign my command."

"THE IROQUOIS I RUN FOR YOUR L IFEI"

54 A CITY I~ THE A~mES .
" Which could not have been more bravely held," was
the reply; and the soldiers marched into the fort to
relieve the worn-out defenders.
The Indians had retired on seeing the soldiers,
but they were pursued and defeated.
12. The brave girl became a brave woman . She
had many adventures among the Indians. Once, rifle
in hand, she saved from the hands of the Iroquois a
young Frenchman, who afterwards became the husband
of his brave preserycl'. But in Canadian history
she will always be most famous lIS the Heroine of
Castle Dangerous.
he r-o..ine
ac-com -pa-nied
bUll~ts
in-mates
pan-ic
breach-es
am..mu-nl-tion
mis-er-a-ble
war-ri-ors
en-llv-ened
op-por-tu-ni-ty
gar-ri-son
prob-a-ble
as-sem-bled
post-poned'
siege
brief
im-i-tat-ed
be-sieged'
re-lieve'
\YORD EXERCISE :-
J. Give lists of nouns in -or, -ar, and -er, denoting agent, with
meanings.
2. Give a list of words connected with probable, and of those in
which the stem has the form provo.
3. :\Iake sentences showing the difference in meaning between effect
and affect.
For K OTES, see pa,e £58.
13. A CITY IN THE ANDES.
1. To reach Quito from th e sea. one must ride
several days on muleback. The highway to the
capital is not yet completed, and only a bridle-path
crosses the shoulder of Chimborazo, at a height of
fourteen thousand feet, so that the j ourney is one of
great hardship and discomfort. Goods for the interior

A CITY IN TH E ANDES.
55
(116)
CROSSL~G THE A:fDES.
4

56 A CITY IN THE ANDES.
Quito has never been written, hut tradition makes the
city Il.S old Il.S J erusalem or Damascus. The Incas,
or native Indians, tell of a mighty nation, called the
Quitos, who lived th ere before th eir' fathers came, hut of
whom th e world has no oth er kn owledge. Pizarro, the
conqueror of Peru, found it th e lllngnificent capital of
n mighty empire exte nding over three th ousand mile,
and Il.S thickly settled as Europe. Th e city WIl.S then
filled with beautiful palaces of stone, adorned with
gold and silver and gems, but nil wa plundered and
destroyed through th e Spaniards' greed for wealth.
Q=.
4. Decay and dilapidation, poverty and ignorance,
filth and depravity, are th e most conspicuous features
of life in Quito ; but th e people ar e as vain and proud
Il.S if th ey had all the good things of th e world , and
th ey think th eir city grander than London or Paris.
.\Ien tand idly around th e street corn ers, wrapped
in th eir ponchos or cloaks, and beggar: reach out
th eir hands for alms to those who pa&; by. Soldiers

A CITY IN THE ANDE S. 57
are nu merous ; they are usually barefoot ed, and wear
uni forms of ord ina ry whi te cotton sheeting.
5. I ndian women clad in black glide to and fro
with their mantles drawn down over th eir heads, or
hit in th e market-place selling fruits and vegetables,
Water-curriers may be seen with great jars of clay
on th eir backs, going to and from th e fountain in
th e square. Th ere are no pipes or wells to supply
th e house , and all the water has to be brought by
th e servants, or purchased from th e public carriers,
6. Th ere ar e no fixed prices for any thing in the
"hops. If you a k the cost of an article, th e merchant
will reply, " How much will you give for it ?" If
you nmue a sum, he will then ask twic e or three times
:~s much as you offer, and bargain with you . The
women in th e market will sell nothing wholesale.
If potatoes are threepence a pound , e\'cry pound will
ne weighed out separately, no matter wh eth er you
buy two pounds or tw enty. There is no money
small er than the quartillo, w hich is worth three
halfpence, so the cha nge is giv en in bread. On his
way to market the buye r stops at th e baker's shop,
and fills his basket with bread to be gi\'en as change
-so mllllY rolls to the penny.
7. Every thing has to be paid for in ad vnnc e, When
you go to a market-woman and tell her that you
wan t some vegetables, she asks for your money.
When you gi\'e it to her, she hands you what you
have boucht. If Y OU order a coat at th e tailor's or
boot at ~he hoel;mker's, you have to pay for th em
in advance ; for th e workmen may not have money
to pay for th e materials at th e wholesale shop , and
th ey have no credit. The landlord at th e hotel or

58 A CITY IN THE ANDES.
the boarding-house where you ar e staying comes round
every morning and asks you to pay your board for
the day. Oth erwise he could not buy food.
8. There is not a chimney in all Quito. The
weather is seldom cold enough to require a fire for
heati ng purposes, and all the cooki ng is done with
charcoal on a sort of shelf like a blacksmith's forge.
There must be a different fire for every pot or kettle.
Two pel'SOns attend to the cooking-the one with a
pair of bellows, to keep the fires from going out; and
the othe r to keep the pots from falling over, for th ey
are made with rounded bottoms.
9. The Indians form the labouring population,
an d they carry all their burdens on th eir backs.
They genemlly go at a slow trot when on a journey,
which th ey can keep up for hours without tiring.
Th ey never laugh or sing, and they have no sports, no
songs, no tales; they are sullen and stupid, and submissive
to all sorts of cruelty and oppression. Three
hundred and fifty years of Spanish rul e have crushed
the spirit of the poor son of the I nca, so that he no
longer smiles.
ex..po-sure
quaint
fea t-ure
civ-il-i-za-tion
go v~rn-m ent
prim-i-tive
tra-dt-tion
co i'l~uer-or
a-dorned'
di-lap-i-da-tion
i~no-r~ce
de-prav-I-ty
con-spic-u-ous
p~~

LAND AND SEA BREEZES. 59
14. LAND AND SEA BREEZES.
1. In many tropical countries the oppressive heat
is modified, and th e clima te of th e sea-shore made
refreshing and healthful, by th e regular alternation of
wind s which come from th e sea du ring th e day and
from th e land during the night. Thi s daily change
of wind is due to the fact that the land heats more
rapidly and also cools more rapidly than the water.
During th e heat of the day, th e air above th e land
becomes warm er than that abov e th e sea, and consequently
lighter. It therefore rises, or rather it is
pushed upwards by the colder air which flows towards
the land and ta kes its place. This movement of the
air constitutes th e sea-breeze.
2. \Vhen th e sun goes down, th e land cOOlS more
rapidly than th e sea, and the air overlying th e land
becomes colder and heavier than that above t he water.
A current of cold air from the land then flows out
seawards, pushing aside the warmer air, and form ing
th e land-breeze.
3. UpOIl the northern coast of Java th e phenomenon
of daily land and sea breezes is finely developed. As
the sun rises up out of the sea into th e cloudless
azure sky, all nature is yet fr esh with th e dews of
night. But as it climbs ever high er, th e land -breeze
goes to rest. Here and there it still plays over the
water, but finally it sinks exhausted, and there is a
great calm. Th e atmosphere becomes clearer und er
the intense heat, and th e gentle swell of the now
poli hed waves reflects th e sunshine lik e a thousand
mirrors.
4. All distant objects become distinct, and seem to

•
60 LA~D A~D SEA BltEEZES.
draw nearer. Small fishing-boats loom up like large
vessels. Th e seama n coasting along the shore is misled
by the clearness, and believes that he has been
driven towards the land by a current. The plan ks of
th e deck burn under his feet; he vainly spreads an
awning to shelter himself from the great heat.
5. The sun is near the zenith, and all nature seems
to ha ve fallen into a sleep. Yonder, far out on the
sea, a darker tint appears on its gla y surface, and
again disappears. Once more it returns j it remains,
and slowly approaches. I t is th e welcome sea-breeze;
but it may be one or two hours more before it has
regularly set in. Small wh ite clouds app ear above
the horizon, a symptom of a fresh breeze. Then we
feel a cool breath from the sea, succeeded by others
whi ch remain longer, and presently th e ref reshing
sea -breeze has really set in.
6. Th e air becomes grey with vapour, which envelops
th e promontories in mist and curtains the
mountain s with clouds. Objects which seemed near
are now apparently removed to a distan ce, and th e
sailor is apt to thi nk him self farth er from land than
he really is. Th e sea is raised into short broken
waves, whose white crests are blown away by th e
wind.
T. As the sun approaches the horizon, the roll of
thunder is heard from the piled-up cloud over th e
mountains, and the gleam of lightning is seen th rough
th e mist. But as the sun sinks, th e mist gradually
disappears. Th e wind and the sea cease their chafing
and frett ing : soon all is aga in still. Thi tillness is
pleasant to th e feelings. The dri ving briny sea-breeze
had gro wn weari ome, and th e calm is welcome.

LAXD MID SEA BRE EZES. 61
8. It is a threatening culm, however. The all'
above the mountains is still dark and cloudy. The
rai n falls there in torrents, and the thunderstorm once
more rages. Soon the clouds spread seaward from
th e mountains, and the whole sky becomes overcast
and threatening. The sailor off the coast knows
what to expect: his sails are soon filled by the landbreeze,
which will calTY him briskly on his way till
morn ing.
9. This alternation of land and . en breezes i most
regular and perfect in the regions of calm which are
found under the equator and each of the tropics. In
Val pa raiso, for example, during the dry season, when
th ere is no prevailing wind to interfere with the
development of those local breezes, the sea-breeze
begins to move towards the land abo ut tell ill the
morning. By three or four in th e afte rnoo n it reaches
the force of a ga le, and st ops communication between
th e shore and ships in the harbour. By sunset,
how ever, the wind has spent its fury, and th ere is
a perfect calm.
op-pres-sive
mod-i-fied
al-ter-na-tion
con -sti-tutes
phe-nom-e-non
" ' ORD EXERCISE:-
de-vel-oped
a-zure
ex-haust-ed
at-mcs-phere
mir-rors
awn-ing'
zen-ith
symp-tom
prom-on-to-ries
ap-pa-rent-ly
wea-ri-some
threat/en-ing'
char-ing
e-qua!.tor . I'
com-mu-m-ca-tion
I. Give a list of verbs ending in -fy , as modify , and the ir
meanings.
2. Give the meaning of constitute, and explain the vari ous meanings
of constitution.
3. Give a list of adjectives in -some, with meanings, and of other
terminations which have a similar force.
For K OTES, 8U JXI{l' f59.

62 THE CLOUD.
15. THE CLOUD.
1. I bring fresh showers for the thi rsti ng flowers,
From the sea and th e streams ;
I bear light shade for the leaves when laid
In th eir noonday dreams.
From my wings ar e shaken th e dews that wake n
Th e sweet birds e"ery one,
When rocked to rest on th eir :1Lother's breast.
As she dances about th e un.
I wield th e flail of th e lashinc hail,
And whiten th e green plains under ;
And th en again I dissolv e it in rain,
And laugh as I pass in thunder.
2. I sift th e snow on the mountains l.elow,
And th eir great pines groan aghast;
And all the night 'tis my pillow white,
W hile I sleep in the arms of the blast.
Sublime on the towers of my skyey bowers,
Lightning, my pilot, sits;
In a cavern under is fettered the 'I'huuder-c­
It str uggles and howls at fits:
Over earth and ocean, with gentle motion,
This pilot is guiding me,
Lured by the love of th e Genii th at move
In th e depths of th e purple sea.
3. The sanguine Sunrise, with his meteor eyes,
And his burning plum es outs pread,
Leaps on th e back of my sailing rack,
When th e morning-star shines dead, ­
As on the jag of a mountain crag,
Which an earthquake rocks and swings,

THE CLOUD. 63
A n eagle alit one moment may sit
I n the light of its golden wings.
A nd when unset may breathe, from the lit sea beneat h,
I ts ardours of rest and of love,
A nd the crimson pall of eve may fall
From the depth of heaven above, -
'Vith wings folded I rest , on min e airy nest,
As st ill as a bro oding dove.
4. That orbed maiden, wit h white fire lad en,
' Vh91ll mor!:lls call the nl02n, -
Glides glimmering o'er my fleece-like floor,
By the midnight breezes strewn;
A nd wherever the beat of her unseen feet,
W hich only the angels hear,
May havll-Proken the woof of my tent's thin roof,
The stars peep behind her and peer;
And I laugh to see them whirl and flee,
Like a swarm of golden bees,
When I widen the rent in Illy wind-built tent,
Till th e calm ri VCl'S, lakes, and seas,
Lik e st rips of the sky fallen through me on high,
Are each paved with th e moon and these.
* * * * *
5. I am the daughter of Earth and 'Vater,
A nd the nursling of the Sky:
I pass through the pores of the ocean and shores;
I change, but Lcannot die.
For after the rain-when, wit h never a sta in,
The pavi lion of heaven is bare,
And the winds and sunbeams, with th eir convex gleams,
Build up the blue dome of air-
I silent ly laugh at Illy own cenota ph,
And out of the caverns of rain,
Like a child from th e womb like a ghost from the tomb,
1 ari se and unbuild it again. SHE LLE Y.

...
640 A DESERT RIDE .
flail
dis-so lve'
a-ghast'
sub-lime'
sky~y
p i~lo t
cav'-em
fet~tered
G~ni- i
sa.ii~guine
me-te-or
plumes
earth-quake
ar-dours
mor-tals
stre wn
nurs-ling
pa -vil-ion
con-vex
cen-o-taph
For XOTF.s, see page 259.
16. A DESERT RIDE.-L
1. When we had come opposite to the fountain, we
found our way blocked by an Ara b enca mpment.
Th e twinkling lights seemed to fill th e whole plain .
All appeared to be fast asleep ; but we knew that
if one of th e Bcdawin saw us, we should soon have
th e whole horn ets' nest after us. As th e wind was
coming from th e fountain, we resolved to try to get
round the other side of the encampment. We alighted,
and , slinging the nose-bags on our horses, carefully
led them as we moved round the Arab flank.
2. It was an anxious ti me ; for, had our horses
whinni ed, Qt. a desert dog discovered us, we should
certainly have been deprived of our horses at least.
By making a circ uit of a mile or more, we got pa t
the northern flank of th e sleeping host. A strong
wind was blowing from the camp, lad en with the
odour of camels and camp-fires.
3. A..'l soon a we thought we had got past the
Arabs, we worked OUl' way baek to th e direct path,
and started for Karyetein at a good pace. The track
was hard, and th e noise of our cantering horses
mused th e camp , which was nearer to us tha n we
had supposed. An alarm shot was fired, and then
th ere arose a babel of sounds, in wh ich the braying

A DESERT RIDE. 65
of asses, th e barking of dogs, and th e shouting of
men were mingled.
4. We kept steadily on our way , but we did not
seem to be getting much further from the noises.
When we had ridden for a bout an hour, we became
aware that we were being pursued. The night was
yery dark , and we could see nothi ng but the campfires
in th e distance j but we could disti nctly hear the
clatter of hal' e . feet, and even the hurd breathing
of horses which were being driv en furiously,
5. Three courses were open to u - to sta nd
and figh t, to race for our lives, or to gi\'c our pursuers
th e lip. To have fought would hav e been
simpl e mad ne , for, fr om the noise our pu rsuers
made, there eemed to be hundreds of them . It was
doubtful if we could have escaped by hard riding,

66 A DESERT RIDE .
for our steeds were jaded, whil e th eirs were fr esh.
Th e dark ness favoured th e third plan.
6. \Ve were th en passing over rough ground, and
ha\·ing reached th e dry bed of a riv er, we turne d up
it at righ t angles to th e path. III a few seconds we
were quite out of sight, among the hills. We again
hun g the nose-bags on our horse ' heads, and set th em
to feed, and I crawled back to a little hill by th e side
of the path .
I had scarcely got to the top of th e hill, and peeped
OVCl', lying Hat 0 11 th e ground, when th e troop swept
past. There seemed to be about a dozen horses, and
Its man,)' dromedaries, and as each dromedary carried
two men, th ere ma,)' have been thirty or forty all told.
7. \Ve 1I0W knew that we had no reasonable cause
for fear. We both had breech-loaders and revolve rs
of the newest patterns, and we shou ld hav e been able,
if the worst had come, to fire forty shots between
us in a minute. 1\1,)' companion, an old Wimbl edon
crack shot, W Its anxious to begin at once ; but I was
deter mined to avoid bloodsh ed if possible.
8. We now mounted our horses, and followed the
Beduwln, who thought they were following us. There
was less than half It mile between us. \Ve could hear
them distinctly ; but if th ey heard us, th ey must have
though t we were some of th eir own party. \Vhen we
had followed th em for an hour or so, and th ey seemed
to be gett ing further and further ahead of us, it became
n e ~ ~SSl1r,)' to shake them off in some way or oth er, as
we kn ew that th e dawn would very soon reveal us.
D. ~Iy companion carried a little flask of brandy,
which I induced him to giv e to me. We th en rode
into th e desert to the left, and I took the muslin

A DESERT RIDE. 67
which was fixed on my helmet as a protection against
th e sun, satura ted it with th e brandy , and set fire to
it on a heap of brushwood. The flame rose sudde nly,
and the brushwood caugh t fire and cont inued the
blaze. I fired two or three shots, sending the bullets
whistling after our pursuers. At the same time we
walk ed our horses between th em and th e fire, and
danced round it, so that we migh t seem more numerous
than we were. Th en we galloped back in th e da rkness
to the road, and crossed out into the desert on
the oth er side.
10. The ruse succeeded splendidly. The fire burnt
itself out quickly, but th e Beduwin hurried back to
th e spot where th ey had seen it. We heard th em
leave th e road, and pass with much noise through
the brushwood. Knowing that our path was now
free, we returned to it, and sped as fast as we could
on our way to Karyetein. We were both profoundly
thankful that we had escaped a real da nger, and that
we had not been obliged to shed the blood even of
desert cut-throats.
whin~n ied
de-prived '
cir'-euit
roused
ba~bel
miil~led
dis-tinctqy
pur-su-ers
drom-e-da-ries
rea-son-a-ble
breech-load-ers
re-volv-ers
re-veal'
in-duced'
sat-u-rat-ed
ruse
'YORn ExERCISE:-
I. how th e connec tion between discover and uncover, and make
sentences showing their uses.
2. Give a list of word s form ed from th e root of induce, with various
prefixes, and give the ir meanin gs.
3. :\Iak e sentences containing th e words splendid, splendour, and
resplend ent, and trac e the connec tion of t he words.
For NOTES, Bee ]XJ{le !e59.

68 A DESER T RIDE .
17. A DESERT RIDE.-n.
1. \Ye continued our journey unmolested at a slow
~llop , and did not pause till it was broad day, Then
we dismounted, and walked by OUI' mares for a mile
or so. hortly afterwards, four horsemen coming from
th e hills appeared on our righl They had long spears,
c1ubs hunging from their saddles, and flint pi tols and
uaggers in th eir belts.
2. It W I a pretty sight to see th ese four sons of the
.1esert bearing down upon us. At first th eir pace was
1he ordinary desert j og-trot. Greater speed, however,
was necessary to catch us, and, as th ey came nearer,
they gall oped as fast as they could to get before us.
The hors es were at full stretch, and th e riders, with
their short stirrups lind high saddles, seemed to sit on
th e tops of their hors es as if on seats, ready to spring.
3. Th ey reach ed the road abo ut fou r hundred ya rds
in front of us, reined up thei r horses, and planted
th emselves right in our way. We brought our horses
to It walking pace, lind prepared for the worst. They
shook th eir spears, lind leaned forward in thei r
saddles, as if about to charge ; but th ey saw our shining
weap ons, and paused.
4. We approached till we wer e within eighty yards
of th e enemy , and halted . I said , " Who are you, and
what do yo u want ?"
One of th em replied with a sharp bark, " Y ou are
tre passel'S on our land, and we will make you repent
it , you dogs."
I said , repeating one of their own proverbs, " Violent
language never yet tore a shirt. I can shoot th e four
of you through th e head in four second s j and if you

A DESERT RIDE . G9
move one step towards us, I will shoot your horses
to begin with. "
5. Th ey did not like th e prospect ; and after they
had exchanged words among th emselves, one of the m
said : " xa man has eyer presumed to pa through
our territory without leave j but if you surrender the
horses you are riding, we will let ~ 'ou pa "
" Let th ere be no fooling," I replied. " Since the
day that Abraham your father, of ble ed memory,
ARAB HORSE1/E.'! .
passed along th is same road, till thi s day, the way has
been open. We are here to inj ure no man ; but if
you attempt to stop us, your blood be upon ~'our own
heads."
6. :My companion said, " Let me empty two of their
saddl e ."
" Xa," said I ; " if they attack u , we will shoot
their horses first."
One of th em then said, " We belong to the great

70 A DESERT RIDE.
Anaz! tribe, whi ch makes pashas tremble, .and we
cannot let you pass."
1'0 this I replied, " Your sheik and I are friends,
and I know his brot her, who spends much time in
Damascus. I hav e just established a school at Karyetein,
and I am only anxious to befriend th e Bedawln;
but you must give way. ~ly fri end wants to shoot
two of you to begin with. We are th e stronger, but
I am loth to ha rm you. I now gi\'e you five minutes
to make up your minds, and if you do not move off
in tha t time, may Allah be merciful to you."
7. ~[y compan ion, whose horse was restive, dismounted,
and stood with his gun ready. I sat in
th e saddle, with my watch in my hand. " Four
minutes are now gone:' I said, " and th e fifth is half
sped." A few seconds later, I pu t my wat ch into
my pocket, and as I lifted my gun to my shoulder
th ey turned and fled.
8. Th ey galloped along th e path before us, and we
gall oped after as if in pursuit. Several tim es they
turned, and waited as if to stop us ; but we galloped
straight at them, putting up our guns to our shoulders.
Th ey then ga lloped off in a wide circle, riding round
us at It respectf ul distance, for some time, and finally
they took up their position at a little hill on th e left
near our path. As we came ncar, th ey rode round th e
hill, out of sight; but one of th em app eared suddenly
from behind the hill, and discharging his blunde rbuss
at me, fled at full gallop with his companions.
9. We hurri ed to th e spot from which the shot
had come ; but the four horsemen were already a
quarter. of a mile away, and going at a tremendous
pace. ~I y companion dismounted, and sent half a

A DES ERT RIDE. 71
dozen bull ets after th em ; but th e distance was too
great for effective shooting. He was very vexed th at
we had let them off; especially when he knew that I
i:.ad been hit.
10. I had had a marvellous escape. Th e gu n fired
was a short, wide-mouthed blunderbuss. Such gun s
are charged with a quarter of a pound of powder and
u pound and a half of pellets, slugs, nails, bits of iron,
and split bullets. The discharge tore up th e ground
round us, and it seemed to sweep my mare almost off
her feet. he had received only a few scratches, I
was not quite so fortunate. I had a slight wound in
th e left hand, and two in the breas t, neither of which
was serious.
11. This adventure was all over in less time than
it ta kes to read the account of it, and we conti nued
our j ourney in the increasing heat, and alight ed at the
new school in Ka ry etein at eleven o'clock, havin g
ridd en the whole distanc e from Palmyra ill a little
over twelve hours, interruptions includ ed.
D n. w», W nIGHT.
un-mo-lest-ed
pis-tols
stir-rups
reined
ap-proached'
tres-pass-ers
re-peat-ing
prov-erbs
laii!guage
pre-sumed'
ter-ri-to-ry
sur-ren-der
pa~shas
mer-ci-ful
res -tive
blun -der-buss
tre-men-dous
ef-fec-tive
in-ter-rup-tion
in-clud-ed
W oan EXERcrsE;-
1. how the force of the prefix, stem , and suffix in the word int errup
tion, and give other words containing each of these parts
in other comb inations,
2. )I ake sentences contain ing the word mount as noun and as verb,
and give a list of words derived from it, with meanings .
3. Give the meanings an d illust rate th e uses of the words effect.
effective, effectual, and efficacy. ' "
For Xon :s.... page !!59.

THE GREAT F IRE OF LONDON.

TH E GREAT FIRE OF LONDON. 73
18. THE GREAT FIRE OF LONDON.
1. 2T1d September 1666.-This fatal night, about
ten , began that deplorable fire, near Fish Street, in
London . 3 I'tl.-The fire continuing, after dinner I took
coach with my wife and son, and went to th e Bankside
in outhwark, where we beheld that dismal spectacle, .
the whole city in dreadful flames near th e water-side.
2. The fire went on all th e night--if I may call
that night which was as light as day for ten miles
round about--helped by a fierce eastern wind in a
very dry season. I saw th e whole south part of th e
city burning from Cheapside to th e Thames, and all
along Cornhill (for it kindled back against th e wind
as well as forward), Tower Street, Fenchurch Street,
Grucechurch Street, and so along to Bainnrd's Castle,
and the fire th ere was now taking hold of St. Paul's
Ch urch.
3. The conflagration was so uni versal, and th e
people were so astonished, that from th e beginning
th ey hardl y stirred to check it. Th ere was nothing
heard or seen but cry ing out and lamentation, the people
running about lik e distracted creatures, without at all
attornpt ing to save their goods. There was a strange
consternation upon th em, as the fire consumed churches,
public hall s, hospitals, monum ents, and ornaments,
leaping from hous e to house, and street W street, at
great distances one from th e other.
4. Wc saw the Thames covered with goods afloat,
all thc barge and boats being laden with what some
person s had had tim e and courage to save. Carts,
also, were on all sides carrying things out to the fields,
which for man.r miles were strewed with movabl es of
~~ 5

74 TH E GREAT FIRE ' OF LONDON.
all sorts ; and tents were erected to shelter both people
and what goods they could get away.
5. Oh, th e miserable and calamitous spectacle ! All
the sky was of a fiery aspect, lik e the top of a burning
oven, the light being seen above forty miles round
about for many nights. God grant that m~' eyes may
never behold th e like-above ten thousand houses all
in one flame ! The noise and crackling and th unde r
of th e impetuous flames, th e shrieking of women and
children, th e hurry of people, th e fall of towers, and
houses, and churches, were lik e a hideous storm.
6. The air all about was so hot th at at last one
was not able to approach the fire. :Men were forced
to sta nd still and let the flames burn on, which they
did for nearly two miles in length and one in breadth.
The clouds of smoke were dismal, and reached nearly
fifty miles in length . Thus I left it thi s afternoon.
London was, 'but is no more !
7. 4th.-The burning still rag es, and it has now got
as far as th e Inner Temple. All Fleet Street, the Old
Bailey, Ludgate Hill , Warwi ck Lane, Newgate, Paul's
Chain, and Watling Street are now flmning. The
stones of St. Paul's have been fallin g on all sides, th e
melting lead of the roof running down the streets in
a st ream, and the very pa vements glowing with fiery
redness, so that no horse or man is able to tread on
them. The easte rn wind still more impetuously drives
th e flames forward.
8. 5th.- Men now began to bestir themselves, and
not to stand dismayed, as th ey had done hitherto. It
was seen that nothing was lik ely to put a stop to the
fire, but the blowing up of as many houses as would
mak e a wider gap than any \ rhieh had yet been made

THE GREAT FIRE OF LOXDON. 75
by the ordinary method of pulling th em down. Some
stout seamen had proposed this early enough to have
saved nearly th e whole city ; but some avaricious men
would not permit it, because th eir houses must have
been among th e first destroyed, Thi s WI1

76 ON READIl'

OX READIXO .
77
s udy, and have definite aim s and wishes in all
their dealin gs with books.
4. Another good rule is this-s-nlways have some
lid reading in hand, some work or au th or which
you carry forw ard fr om one day to anoth er, or fr om
one hour of leisure to the next, with persist ence, till
vou have finished what you have undertaken.
• 5. The wri ter once called upon one of th e greatest
f modern travellers at an early hour of th e day. It
wa after breakfast, and th ough he had but a few
minutes to spare, he was sitting with a book in hand
-a book of solid history, whi ch he was peru sing
day after day. He remarked: " This has been my
habit for j'ears, in all my wanderings. It is only
by reading in this way th at I can overcome the distraction
of mj' attention, as strange persons lind strange
nes pr esent themselves before me from day to day."
6. If several subjects seem to us equally important
and interesting, we should take them in order, and
gh'e to each for the ti me our chief and perhaps our
xclusiv e attention. "One th ing at a tim e" is a good
rule for all activity. ..-
7. ~ ost top ics admit of the use of a considerable
I riety of books, each supplementing th e oth ers.
F Ol' example, if we are reading the history of the
Great Rebellion in England, we should read, if we
, not a singl e author only, as Clarendon, but half
dozen or more, each of whom writes fr om his own
point of view, and supplies what an oth er omits.
8. But, besides th e formal histories of th e period,
here are various novels, th e scenes and characters of
\yhich are placed in th ose tim es, such as Scott's
oodstock . " there are also diaries, such as those of

,78 ON READING .
Evelyn, Pepys, and Burton; and there are memoirs,
such as those of Colonel Hutchinson. There are
poems, such as those of Andrew Marvell, Milton, and
Dryden. There are also hundreds of political tracts
and pamphlets referring to the period.
9. We nam e these various classes of books, not
because we would advise everyone to read all these
books, or even all these classes of books, as a matter
of course, bus in order to illustrate how great is the
variety of books and reading matter that may be
grouped around a single topic.
10. Every person must judge for himself how long
a tim e he can besto w upon any single subject, or how
many and various are the books regal'ding it which
't is wise to read; but of this everyone may be
assured, that it is far easier, far more agl'eeable, far
more economical of time and energy, to concentrate
the attention upon a single subject at a tim e than to
extend it to half a score, and that six books read in
succession upon a single topic are far more interesting
and profitable than twice as many which treat of
distin ct and unr elated topics.
K. P ORTER.
def-i-nite
per -ma-nent
con -scious
de-s ign "
ar-gu-ments
ref'-er-ence
lel-sure
per-sist-ence
dis-trac-tion
ex-clus-ive
va.ri~-ty
sup-ple-ment-ing
Re-bel-lion
char-ac-ters
mem-oirs
po-lit-i-cal
pamph-lets
il-lus-trate
ec-o-nom-i-cal
con-cen-trate
\VORD EXERCISE ,-
I. Give .. short list of words in which the prefix im- means not, and
of those in which it has a different meaning.
2. ~ [ake sentences showing various uses of the word period.
3. Explain the meaning of illustrate, and show its connection with
lustre and illustrious.
For N OTES, BU page !60.

HASTE NOT, REST NOT.
79
20. HASTE NOT, REST NOT.
1. ' Vithout haste ! without rest I
Bind th e motto to thy br east;
Bear it with thee as a spell ;
Storm or sunshine, guard it. well ;
H eed not flowers that round th ee bloom;
Bear it onward to th e toml •.
2. H aste not ! let no th oughtless deed
)[ar for e'er th e spirit's speed ;
P onder well and know th e right,
Onward then with all thy might;
H aste not ! years can ne'er atone
F or one reckless action done .
3. Rest not I-life is sweeping by ;
Do and dare before you die;
Something mighty an d sublime
Leav e behind to conquer time­
;1lorio us 'tis to live for aye
When these form s have passed away.
4. H aste not, rest not ! calmly wait;
:Meekly bea r the storms of fate;
D uty be t hy polar guide-
D o the right, whate'er betide!
H aste not, rest not! conflicts past,
God shall crown thy work at last.
From 1M German of GoETHE.
ac~tion
coil~uer
gl~ri-ous
piil~
be-tide'
con~llicts
W OaD E XERCISE :-
i e th e meaning of tide in such words u.s betide, tidings, noontide.
rite in prose the substance of verses 2 and 3.
For KOT E.~.
au page fGO.

80 NATI VE SPORTS I N HAWAIl.
21. NATIVE SPORTS IN HAWAII.
1. The Pacific Islanders are the most expert of all
nations in swimming and in aquatic games. In all
the tropical groups nearly the entire population lives
upon the seashore. The climate is warm ; the people
have little to do ; and on windy days, when th e
billows roll in heavily from th e ocean, whole villages
somet imes spend an afternoon in the daring pastime
of surf-p laying.
2. Th e Hawaiian practises this sport upon a surfboard,
which he calls a " wave-sliding board." It is
made of firm, light wood ; it is equa l in length to th e
swimmer's height, about a foot wide, slightly oval in
outline, and often convex on both sides. It is polished
and stained black, and it is preserved with
great care.
3. Th e natives choose a spot where immense
billows, driven in by th e trade-winds, break furiously

NATIVE SPORTS IN HAWAII. 81
upon the coast. Each person, t

82 NATIVE SPORTS IN HAWAII.
turned from th e shore, and he is again making his
way into deep water to mount another billow.
6. Th e children have a number of games at which
they play, in and und er th e water, as fearl e ly as
school children gambol in th e playground. One is a
kind of " tig: ' in which the object of th e side that is
" in " is to reach two or three successive stations by
swimm ing and diving, so as to escape being touched
by any play er of th e "out" party, who are th e pursuers.
7. Leaping from high, perpendicular cliffs is a
favourite and daring sport with the men. They
choose a place where the water is not less than

NATIVE SPORTS IN HA WAII.
83
fifteen or twenty feet in depth at th e foot of th e cliff ;
then, taking a rousing run to get fairly und er wa;}",
they bound far into th e air from th e edge of the cliff.
8. As th e diver falls fr om th e dizzy heigh t---sometimes
a hundred feet---toward the water, he bends
himself almost double ; but just before striking the
water, he partially straightens himself, so that his
whole body is slightly curved forward at th e moment
of the plunge, and th e feet are a little in advance of
a perpendicular line from th e head. He strikes the
water without a splash, entering it with that quick,
dull "chuck " that a smooth pebble mak es when
thrown forcibly into water, and at an angl e so
nicely calcula ted that he is actually brought to the
surface again by the momentum of th e fall. He
shoots through the arc of a circle und er th e water,
and after two or three seconds comes up, feet foremost.
The first thing you see of him is his toes, emerging
from the water fifteen or twenty feet in front of the
place where he went und er. No athletic feat is more
darin g and beautiful than this.
a-quat-ic
trop-i-cal
pas~time
pra~tis-es
o!val
for'-eign
lI!quid
In-con-ceiv-a-ble
,.
com-pan-ions
suc-ces-sive
fa~vour-ite
pai-ti-al-Iy
for'-d-bly
cal-cu-lat-ed
mo-men-tum
e-merg-ing
" ' ORD EXERCISE :-
1. Give a list of compound word s, with th eir meanings, showing the
force of the termination -er in various uses.
2. Give a list of adjectives that express very gr eat size, as immense,
and show the force of th e variou s parts in each word .
3. "nat class of words double th e final letter before certain terminations,
like swimmer?
FQr K OTES , Bet pafJ' &60.

84 PAPUA AXD ITS PE OPLE.
PAP't'A S BOAT.
22. PAPUA AND ITS PEOPLE.
1. If Australia be regard ed as the " fifth continent,"
th en Papua or ~ T ew Guinea is the largest island in
the world, having an area of about two hundred th ousand
squal'e miles. It is separa ted from Australia by
a channel about sixty-five miles in width . Th e coastline,
frin ged with coral reefs, deeply ind ent ed with
beautiful bays, and sk irt ed with still more beautiful
islands, is extre mely picturesque ; while its vast mountain
ranges rival the Himalayas in height and th e
Alps in grand eur.
2. And yet Papua is not entirely a paradise. Th e
balmy odours of its forest.'! are often laden with deadly
mias ma, bringing fever and pestilence. Serpents lurk

PAPUA AND ITS PE OPLE.
85
NATIVE HOUSES.
among th e flowers, crocodiles haunt
wild boars roam through th e forests.
the ri vers , and
Mosquitoes and
sand-fli es abound everywhere.
3. The people of Papua are of severa l distinct races
and types, and they differ in charac ter as much as in
form and colour. Th e Malay, the Polynesian , and the
Papuan races are th e most nu merous. The natives of
the interior seem to be further advanced in civilization
than th ose on the coast. In appearance the Papuans
I' emble negroes. Th ey are of somewhat small stature,
and of dark-brown or black complexion, with thick
lip and frizzled or woolly hair.
4. In the ir general habits they have reached a
high er point of advancement than the natives of Australia.
Theil' food consists of yams, bananas, and
sago, with fish, pork, and the flesh of the kangaroo

86 PAP UA A~D ITS PEOPLE.
and th e crocodile. . Th ey vary this diet with such
delicacies 118 rats, frogs, snakes, turtles' eggs, and
caterpillars. Th ey drink
water , and the milk
of th e cocoa-nut.
5. Their mode of
ploughing or digging
is very simple. Eight
or ten natives, each
with It sharp-pointed
stake, stand close togeth
er in It row. At
a given signal th ey
drive these stakes into
th e ground to the proper
depth, and then
use th em as levers to
turn over It strip of
the soil. So regularly
is the work done, th at
It patch of ground
brok en up in this
mann er looks 118 if
it had been ploughed.
PAPUANS. They get abundant
crops of the plants already mentioned, together with
Indian corn, tobacco, and sugar-cane, and these they
must frequ ently protect from th e wild boar and the
kangaroo by a strong fence.
6. Th eir temples are used for social as well as for
religious purposes. Th e older men assemble in them
for eating, talking, and smoking; and in them visitors
and strangers are hospitably entertained. They are

PAPUA AND ITS PEOPL E.
S'T
also places of refuge, where a man is safe from the
pursuit of an enem ~' . /
7, In visiting Kew
Guin ea, one gets a
glimpse of what our
own country must hav e
been in th e "stone
age," as we call it. Th e
nat ives kn ow of iron,
and covet it above
every thing else; but
where they have not
mixed wit h white
men, their weapons
and implements are all
made of wood, stone,
or bone- stone axes
and war-clubs, arrows
tipp ed with bone or
flint, knives of bamboo,
daggers of bone,
and shields of wood
covered with matting.
TREE HOUSES.
8. Th e native houses are usually built on poles
several feet in height, sometimes driven into the
sand on th e sea-shore, so that th ey are surrounded
at high tide. Th ey consist of a light fram ework of
wood, thatched with palm leaves, and floored with
split bamboo. A ladd er reaches from th e ground to
a platform outside, and this platform is frequently
extended from one house to anoth er so as to form
an elevated passage -wa~' through th e village. The
houses have a door at each end. but no wind ow.

88 PAPUA AND 1'1'8 PEOPLE.
9. One picturesque feature in New Guinea is the
tree houses, whi ch are built in some of the lofti est
trees, fifty or sixty feet from the ground. Th ese are
used as watch-towers to observe an enemy, and also
as a refuge for the women and children in case of
attack. As the trees below are often destitute of
branches, these lofty dwellings can only be reached
by means of a long ladder of very primitive construction,
which ser ves the purpose of the drawbridge
of a fortified castle.
10. Th e vari ous tribes engage in trad e among themselves.
Th e natives at Port Moresby manufactu re a .
kind of earthenware for domestic purposes, whi ch
they barter for sago and suga r-cane. I ron is more
valuab le than gold, nnd for a piece of hoop-iron a
Papuan will exchange his dearest possessions. Salt
is also very highly esteemed, and its flavour is
relished much more than that of suga r. Tobacco,
however, is the favouri te medium of exchange, and
circulates as readily as coin does with us.
grand-eur
p~r!.a:dise
mi-as-ma
pes-ti-lence
croc-o-diles
re-sem-ble
stat-ure
com -plex-ion
friz-aled
ba-nan-as
kail~ga-roo
del-i-ca-cies
cat-er-pil-lars
so-cial .
re-lig-ious
hos-pi-ta-bly
el-e-vat-ed
des-ti-tute
, .
po~-s.es-slOns
me-di-um
' V OIW EXERCISE :-
I. Give a list of adj ectives formed from th e names of places, as
Papuan, with vario us terminations.
2. Explain, by showing th e force of the parts of each word , how
nnmerous, numberless, innumerable, and countless ar e alike
in meaning.
3. ) Ia ke sentences showing the use of th e words extend, extent.
extension, and extensive.
Fa" NOTE., seepage 260.

A THREE DAYS' CHASE .
89
1. On Novernber 8th, 1 10, when we were lying
in th at splendid harbour th e Cove of Cork, an order
carne for us to proceed to sea instantly, on a week 's
cruise off Cape Clear, in quest of an enemy vessel
reported to have been seen on the west coa t. Oft
ve went, but it was not till th e 11 th that we
reached our appointed station. Towards evening it
fell dead calm, at which ti me there were two strange
sails in sight-Dne of them a ship whi ch we suppo ed
to be an American, from th e whiteness of her sails ; the
o her a "ery suspicious, roguish-lookin g brig.
2. As th e night fell a light breeze sprang up . and
w made all sail in the direction of th e brig, though
she was no longer visible. In th e cours e of th e middle
watch we fortunately got sight of her with our night-
(QU)
23. A THREE DAYS' CHASE .-I.
fl

90 A THREE DAYS' CHASE,
glasses, and by two in the morning we were near
enough to give her a shot. Th e next instant her
booms were rigged out and her studding-sails set.
Th e most crack ship in His Majesty's ser vice could
hardly hav e made sail more smartly. For our part,
we could set nothing more, having already spread every
sti teh of can vas.
3. The tw o forecastle gun s--long nine-pounders-­
were now brought to bear on th e brig ; and orders were
giv en to fire at th e sails, which, expanded as th ey now
were before us, offered a mark that could not well
be missed. Nevertheless, the little fellow would not
heave to for all we could do with our forecastle guns.
How it happened that none of her yards or masts
were brought down by our fire was quite inexplicable.
4. About half-past four th e breeze began gradually
to die away, after which the chase rather gained
than lost distance. By five o'clock it was almost
entirely calm, and the chase thrust out his sweeps, as
they are called-huge oars requiring five or six men
to each. These give a small light vessel an advantage
over a large ship when th ere is little wind .
In less than an hour he was out of shot. As soon
as he had rowed hims elf from und er the relentless
fire of our gum;, he was busily employed in bending
a new suit of sails and repairing his damaged spars.
By noon next day he was at least ten miles ahead
of us, and at two o'clock we could just see his upper
sails above the horizon.
5. In the course of the aftern oon we perceived
from th e mast-head, far astern , a dark line along the
horizon-the first trace of a breeze coming up. Soon
t he sails were filled, and as we raced along we had

A THREE DAYS' CHASE. 91
the malicious satisfaction of observing that the poor
little privateer had not yet got a mouthful of the
charming wind which was setting us all a-skipping
nbout th e decks. In the spot where th e brig lay
there was a belt of clear white light, within which
the calm still lingered, with th e privateer sparkling in
its centre. Just as the sun went down, however, this
spot was lik ewise ruffled by th e wind , and th e bl-ig,
lik e a hunted hare roused, sprang off" again.
6. It was not till about two o'clock in the morning
that we once more carne within good shot of the brig.
She app eared, however, to po ess th e same invulnerability
as before; for we could neither strike her
hull, so as to force her to surrender, nor bring down
a yard, nor lop off a mast or a boom. It was really a
curious spectacle to see a little bit of a thing skimming
away before the wind, with such a huge monster
as the End ym ion tea ring and plunging after her, like
n voracious dolphin in pursui t of It flying-fish.
7. At last our captain became impatient: he gave
orders for the whole sta rboa rd broadside to be got
ready ; and th en, giv ing the ship a ya w, poured the
whole discha rge, as he thought, right into his wretched
victim .
Kot a man on board th e frigate expected ever to
look on th e poor brig again. What, then, was our
surprise, when th e smoke blew swiftly past, to see the
intrepid little fellow gliding away more merrily than
before; There was a general murmur of applause
at the' Frenchman's gallantry. Kext instant, however,
thi s sound was converted into hearty laughter, when,
in an swer to our thundering broads ide, a single small
gun , a six-pounde r, was fired from the brig's stern.

92 A THREE DAYS' CHASE.
8. Instead of gaining by our manceuvre, we had
allowed th e privateer to gain several hundred yards
upon us ; and his funny little shot, which had excited
so much mirth, passed through th e lee foretop -sail
yard-arm. Had it struck on th e windward side,
where the yard was cracking and straining at a most
furious rate, th e greater part of the sails on the foremast
might have come down quicker tha n we could
have wished, for we were now going at a great rate,
with the wind on the qua rter.
9. Soon another shot cut through the weather
maintop-gallant sheet ; and so he went on, firing
away briskly, till most of our lofty sails were fluttering
with th e holes made in th em. His own sails, I
need scarcely add, were by this time so completely
torn up by OUl' shot that we could see the sky through
them all; but st ill he refused to heave to, and by
constantly firing his single stern-chaser, he showed
that he meant to lose no possible chance of escape.
Had one or two of his shot st ruck eit her of our topmasts,
I really believe he might have got off
cruise
quest
sus-pt-cious
rog~uish
fore-cas-tle
in-ex-pli-ca-ble
re-pair-ing
per-ceived'
ma-ll-cious
pri-va-teer'
cur-fled
in-vul-ner-a-bil-i-ty
vo-ra-cious
dol-phin
wretch-ed
frig~ate
in-trep-id
ap-plause'
gal~lant-ry
man-oeu-vre
' V OR D EXERCISE:-
I. Explain the force of the suffix in roguish, British, ant! g reenish.
2. Analyze the words inexplicable ant! invulner ability, showing the
meaning of each part.
3. Give examples of common word s, as sheet, which have a special
meaning when used of ships.
For NOTt:S, see page 261.

A THREE DAYS' CHASE . 93
24. A THREE DAYS' CHASE.-ll.
1. The breeze had now fr eshened ncarl y to a g"ale,
and th e distance bet ween us and th e brig was rapidly
decreasing, for most of his sails were in shreds,
The guns were reloaded, and orders giYen to depress
th em as much as possible - that is, to point th eir
muzzles downwards-but that not a shot was to be
tired till th e fl"igat e came actually alongside of the
chase. "\Ye were resolved to mak e him surrender, or
to run him down ; such was our duty, and th at the
Frenchman kn ew right well. He waited, however,
nntil our jib-boom was almost over his taffrail , and
not till th en, when he must huve seen into our ports
and along th e decks, which were lighted up Iore and
aft, did he giv e th e sign al of surrender.
2. It may be supposed that th e chase was now
completely oyer, and that we had not hing further to
f 10 th un to take possession of our pri ze. Not at all !
It was found impossible to board the brig, or at least
it seemed so dangcrous that our captain was unwilling
to hazard a boat and crew till daylight came.
The gale increased befor e morning to such a pitch
that there was a doubt if any boat could live, and the
intention of boarding our prize was of course further
delayed. But we took care to keep close to him, a
little to windward , in order to watch his proceedings
as narrowly as po ible. It did not escapc our notice
in th e meantime th at our fri end went on quietly, even
in th e height of th e gale, shifting his wounded yards,
recyin g" new ropes, find bending fresh sails.
3. About th ree o'clock in th e afternoon a furious
squall of wind and rain carn e on, find the brig sud-

94 A THREE DAYS' CHASE.
denly bore up and set oft' once more righ t before th e
wind . At th e heigh t of the squall we tota lly lost
sight of our prize ; and such a hu bbub I hardly
recollect to ha ve heard in my life before.
" Where is she? Who was lookin g out? Where
did you see her last ?" and a hundred similar questions
were poured out in abundance. Sail was made
at once, and oft' we dashed into th e thick of th e squall
in search of our lost treasure.
4. For about a quarter of an hour a dead silence
reign ed over th e wh ole ship, and every eye was
st rained to th e utmost, for no one kn ew exactly
where to look. There was, indeed, no certain ty of
our not actually running past th e privateer, and it
would not have sur prised us much when the squall
cleared up had we seen him a mile or two to windward
, far beyond our reach. Th ese fears were pu t
an end to by th e sharp-eyed captain of th e foretop,
who had perch ed himself on th e jib-boom end, calling
out with a voice of th e great est glee,-
"There he goes ! th ere he goes ! right ahead! und er
his topsails and foresail !"
5. Sure enough th ere we saw him, springing along
from wave to wave, his masts bending lik e reeds
under th e pressure of the sails. In a very few
minu tes we were aga in alongside of him. Nothing
daunted, however, by the style in which we bore
down upon him, th e gallant command er of thi s
pretty little egg-shell of a vessel placed himself on
th e weather-quarter, and with a speaking-trumpet in
his hand, indi cated a wish to be heard.
6. " I have been compelled to bear up ," he called out
in French ; "otherwise th e brig must have gone to the

A THREE DAYS' CHASE. 95
bottom. The sea broke over us in such a way that
I hav e been obliged, as you may perceive, to throw
all lIly guns, boats, and spars overboa rd. w« have
now several feet of wat er in the hold in consequence
of your shot. If, th erefore, you oblige me to heave
to, I cannot keep the vessel afloat one hour in such
weath er."
i . .. Will you make no further attempt to escape?"
ask ed th e captain of th e E1ldym i lYll .
.. AB yet I have made none," he replied firmly. .. I
am your prize; and, as a man of honour, I do not
consider myself at liberty to escape even if I had the
power. I bore up when th e squall came on, as a
matter of nece ity, If you will allow me to run
before th e wind along with you till th e weather
moderates, you may take possession of the brig wh en
you please ; if not, I must go to th e bottom."
8. At eight o'clock in the evening it began to moderate,
and by midnight we succeeded in getting a boat
on board of th e pr ize, after a run of between three
and four hundred miles. Such is th e scale of nautical
sport ! The b-ig proved to be the Milan pri ­
vateer from St. Malo, of fourteen gun s and eighty
men, many of whom were unfortunately wound ed
and several kill ed by our shot. In th e morning
we stopped th e leaks, exchanged th e pri soners for a
prize crew, and put our heads towards the Cove of
Cork again, and we returned righ t merrily to tell our
long story of the three days' chase. The captain's
name wa lII. Pierre Lepelletier of t. Malo ; and
wherever he goes, I will venture to say he can meet
no braver or more resolute man than himself.
CAPTAIN BASIL H ALL

96 THE OCE A:-I.
de-creas-ing'
muz -zles
tal-frail
haz-ard
in-ten-tion
rec-ol-lect'
sim-i-lar
a-bun-dance
treas-ure
cer-tain-ty
daunt-ed
in~i-cat-ed
mod-er-ates
nau-ti-cal
un-for-tu-nate-ly
res -o-lut e
" · OR D EXERCISE:-
I. Give th e literal or primary, and thc figura tive or secondary,
meanin gs of depress, impress, ami express .
2. Give exa mples of words with the suffix -ward, as w indward,
awl their meanings.
3. Give a list of word s, with their mean ings, formed from the stem
of proceed, with various prefixes.
II
25. THE OCEAN.
s-:
1. Roll on, thou deep and da rk-bl ue ocean-roll !
Ten thousand fleets sweep over thee in vain :
)Ian marks th e earth with ru in- his cont rol
Sto ps with the shore; upon the watery plain
The wrecks are all thy deed, nor doth remain
A shadow of man 's ravage, suve his own,
When, for a moment, lik e a drop of m in,
H e sinks into thy depths, with bubbling groan,
Wi thout a grave, unknelled, uncoffined, and unk nown.
2. His steps are not upon t hy pat hs-thy fields
Are not a spoil for hi m- thou dost arise
A nd shak e him from th ee ; th e vile st rength he wields
For ea rth's destruction thou dost all despise,
purning him from thy bosom to th e skies,
A nd send'st him, shivering, in thy play ful pray .
A nd howling, to his gods, where haply lies
H is pet ty hope in some near port or bay,
An d dash est him again to earth : there let him lay.

THE OCEAN.
3. The armaments which thunder-strike the walls
Of rock -built cities, bidding nations quake.
And monarchs tremble in their capitals j
Th e oak leviathans, whose hu ce ribs make
Th eir clay creator th e vain title take
Of lord of th ee, and arbiter of war-
Th ese are thy toys, and, as th e snowy flak ".
Th ey melt into thy yeast of waves, whi ch mar
Alike th e Armada's pride or spoils of T rafalgar.
97
4. Thy shores are empires, changed in all save the!'.
Assyria, Greece, Rome, Carthage, what are they 1
Thy waters wasted them whil e th ey were free,
And many a tyrant since: th eir shor es obey
Th e st ra nger, slave, or sa"age : th eir decay
H as dried up realms to deserts. Xot so thou:
Unchangeable save to t hy wild wav es' play,
Ti me writes no "Tinkl e on t hin e azure brow­
Such as Creation's dawn beheld, thou rollest now,
5, Thou glorio us mirror, where the A lmighty's form
Glasses itself in tempests ; in all time-
Ca lm or convulsed-in breeze, 01' ga ll'. or storm,
Icing t he pole, or in th e torrid clim e
Dnrk-heaving-c-boun dless, endl ess, and sublime­
The image of E te rnity- the throne
Of th ' I nvisible j-eyen from out thy slime
T he monsters of the deep are mad e j each zone
Obeys th ee j thou goest forth, dread, fnth omless, alone!
BYRO".
con-triil'
rav~age
un-knelled'
un-cor-fined
de-struc-tion
de-sp ise '
ar-ma-ments
mon-archs
le-vi-a-thans
cre-a-tor
ar-bi-ter
em-pir es
ty~rant
realms
un-change-a-ble
For X OTES, see !xJ.lle f 61.
con-vulsed"
to r-rid
E- te r-ni.tv
In-vis-i-ble
fath-om-less

98 THE KRAKATOA ERUPTIOX.
KRAKATOA ISLAXD.
26. THE KRAKATOA ERUPTION.
1. About eleven o'clock on Sunday morning, the
thirteenth of May 1883, the trouble began . Java,
Sumatra, and Born eo were convulsed by earthquakes.
Th e surface of th e earth rock ed, houses tumbled down,
and big tr ees were shake n out of the ground. Earthquakes
are no rarity in these islands, but this earthqua
ke showed no signs of ceasing. Th e earth quivered
constantly, an d from its depths there seemed to rise
strange sounds and hollow explosions.
2. On Thursday there came a telegram from Anjer,
ninety miles away, on the north-west coast of Java,
intimating that a volcano had broke n out on Krakatoa
island , about thirty miles west of Anjer, in Sunda
Strait. I was requested by th e Dutch Government to
go to th e scene of action and take scientific observa-

THE KRAKATOA ERUPTIOX. 99
tions, and by four o'clock that afternoo n I started
with a party on board a special steamer from Batavia.
3. As we rounded the northern extremity of J ava,
we saw ascending from Krakatoa, still fifty miles
away, an immense column of smoke. Its appearance
changed as we approached : first it looked lik e flame,
then it would appear to be stea m, and again it would
take the appearance of a pillar of fire inside one of
white fleecy wool. Th e diam eter of thi s pillar of fire
and smoke I should put down at one and a half
miles. All the whil e we heard that sullen, thunderous
roar which had been a feature of this disturbance
ever since Sunday, and was now becoming louder.
4. We remain ed on deck all nigh t and watched.
Th e din increased till we could with difficulty hear
one anoth er's voices. Dawn approached, an d when
the rays of the sun fell on th e shores of Krak atoa, we
saw them reflected from what we th ough t was a riv er,
and we resolved to steam into its mouth and disembark.
When we came to within three-quarters of a
mile of th e shore, we discovered that what we supposed
to be a river was a torrent of molten sulphur. The
smell almost overpowered us. \Ve stea med away to
windward , and made for the other side of the island.
5. This island , th ough volcanic, had up till now
been qui et for at least a centur y. It was eight or
ten miles long an d four wide, and was covered with
forests of fine mah ogany and rosewood trees. It was
inhabited by a few fishermen, but we found no signs
of these inhabitants. The land, down to th e wat er's
edge, was covered with powdered pumi ce stone, which
rained down from th e clouds around th e great column
of fire. Everything with life had already disappeared

I Ou THI> KRAKATOA ERUPTION.
from th e landscap e, which was covered with a steaming
mnss of stones and ashes.
6. Several of us land ed, and began walking inland.
We sank deep in the soft pumice, whi ch blistered
our feet with its heat. I climbed painfully upwards
towards th e crater, in ord er to measu re it by my
sextant ; but in a short time the heat melted the
mercury off the mirror of the instrument. I was
then half a mile from the crater. As I retraced my
steps towards th e shore, I saw the bottom of each
footprint I had made on my way up glowing red with
the heat from beneath. We photographed th e scene
Irom th e deck of th e steamer, where th e fire-hose was
kept playing constantly, wetting th e rigging and
everything about th e ship to prevent her taking fire.
7. The st eamer th en returned to Batavia, and I
went to reside at Anjer, where, from my villa on the
hillside a mile inland, I could see Krakatoa, thirty
miles away, belching out its never-ending eruption.
We supposed that it would go on till it burned itself
out, and then become quiet aga in.
8. On Sunday morn ing, th e twelfth day of August,
nearly three months after, I was sitting on the
veranda of my house taking my morning cup of tea.
I saw the fishing-boats lying at anchor in th e bay,
th e fisherm en th emselves being on shore at rest. As
my gaze rested on the boats, I suddenly became aware
that th ey were all beginning to move rapidly in one
direction. Then in an instant, to my intense surprise,
th ey all disappeared.
D. I ran further up the hillside to get a better
view, and looked far out to sea, Instantly a great
glare of fire right in the midst of the sea caught my

THE KRAKATOA ER UPT ION. 101
eye. All the way across the bay and the strait, ill
a line of flame reaching to Kra katoa itself , the bottom
of the sea seemed to have cracked opcn so that the
subterranean fires were belching forth. On eit her
side th e waters were pouring into this gulf with a
tremend ous noise, but the fire was not extingu ished.
Th e hi in~ roar brought out th e people of Anjer in
excited crowds.
1O. ~ Iy eyes were turned away for a moment as
I beckoned to some one, and during that momen t
came It terrible, deafening explosion. It stunned me:
and when I was able again to turn my eyes to the
bay , I could see nothing. Th e whole scene was
shrouded in darkness, from amid which came cries
and groans, the creaking of breaking beams in th e
houses, and above all the roar of the brea kers on th e
shore. Th e city of Anjer, with its sixty th ousand
people, had been engu lfed!
11. I afterwards found that the water was one
hundred feet deep where th e city of Anjer had been,
and that the coast-line had moved one and It half
miles inlan d, where th e city of Ne w Anjer is now
built. A big island in th e strait had been split in
two, wi th a wide passage bet ween it s t wo parts. An
'i land to the north-west of Kra katoa had disappeared.
Along the coast of Java for fifteen 01 ' twenty miles
man.r new islands were formed which afterwards
disappeared. Th e air was filled with minute particles
of du t, which afte r some weeks spread even to
Europe and America. 'What th e causes of such a
tremendous convulsion may hav e been it is quite
impossible accurately to SllJ'.
From th, Xarrati,." of .J. T. \"A" GESTEL.

102 HmIA...'HTY IN WAR.
e-rup-tion
rar-i-ty
tel-e-gram
sci-en-tif-ic
ob-ser-va-tions
di-am-e-ter
sul-phur
vol-can-ic
cen-tu-ry
ma-hog- a-ny
pu-mic e
sex~tant
mer'-eu-ry
pho-to-graphed
belch-ing:
ver-an-da
sub-ter-ra-ne-an
ex-tiii~guished
par-ti-cles
ac-cu-rate-ly
" ' OR D EXERCISE:-
J. ~I a k e sentences ill ust rating various mean ings of the word observati
on.
2. Give a list of verbs whi ch have two form s of the past part iciple,
as molten.
3. Give the various meanings of th e word column, and mention
words derived from it.
For X OT ES , see page 261.
27. HUMANITY IN WAR.
1. Humani ty in war ! Can such a thing be? Do
not the tw o term s contradict each other ? For what
is war ? It has been well described as "the combination
of all the horrors, atrocities, crimes, and
sufferings of which human nature is capable." And
what is hum anity ? It is th e sum of all th e noblest
qualities of the human heartr--pity, tend ern ess, mercy,
brotherly love. What room can th ere be in war for
th e exercise of these virtues ?
2. Yet it is a fact th at some of the greates t conquerol's
have been the most humane of men. In
the moment of his victory over Pompey, when Romans
were driving Romans fr om th e field, Julius
Cresar rode hither and thither exclaiming, " Spare,
spare th e citiz ens !" And who has not been touched
by th e picture of Wellington moved to tears as he
rode amid th e dead and th e dying over th e field of
\\7aterloo ?

HUMA..,,\ITY IN WAR. ] 03
3. War does not always harden th e soldier's heart,
or crush within it feelings of humanity, even toward
his enemies. Nothing in history is more curi ous, or
more creditable to human nature, th an th e readiness
with which enemies become fri endly during a truce,
or even in an accidenta l lull in th e fighti ng.
4. In the American Civil War, a party of Northern
soldiers -came face to face with a troop of South ern ers
in front of a farmhouse. When the order to att ack
was about to be giv en, a little girl, seeing her pet
kitten in dang er, rushed from the farmhouse to a tree
in th e line of fire, and called out, " Kitty, kitty, come
down !" The soldiers pau sed, then they laughed, and
then they cheered ; and from both sides several men
ran forward to help th e girl , and to warn her of the
danger she was in. After that, fighting was out of
the question. Northemers and Southern ers were soon
exchanging tobacco and sharing th eir rations in the
most friendly way.
5. After the battle of Inkermann , a Russian and
a Frenchman, both severely wound ed, found themselves
lying side by side. As th e cold incr eased with
the advance of night, th ey drew nearer to each other.
Soon the Russian , in spite of his shivering, fell asleep
from sheer weakness. " Then he awoke towards morning,
he found himself comfortably wrapped in a second
overcoat-in addition to his own-s-while his French
friend lay beside him, dead: needless to ask whose
was the second overcoat. Th e Russian carried a
button of that coat in his pocket till his dying day.
6. At Waterloo, a Hi ghland soldier, seeing the
colour-sergean t of his regiment fall with the flag,
rush ed forward in the face of a cavalry charge to save

10-1: HU.llA~ITY 1:; WAR.
his colours, The flag was so fast in th e grip 01 the
dead sergea nt, that it conld not at once be discngaged.
The Highlander th erefore lifted both man and flug on
his back, and car ried them off: Th e leader of the
French cavalry was so struck with the bravery of
th e deed, that he halted his troop and shouted,
" Bravo, Highlander l "
7. Th e great Napoleon was a man who never
hesitated to sacrifice life for th e advancement of his
own ambition. Yet even Napoleon had his humane
moments. Dnring th e battle of Austerlitz, when a
body of Russians and Austrians were fleeing across
a frozen lak e, Napoleon ordered his cann on to be fired
on the ice so as to break it up. Th e result was
th at hu ndreds were drowned. Xext morning, he
observ ed a wounded Ru ian lying on a floe of ice
near the shore of the lak e, and calling piteously for
help. Though the soldier's plight was the resnit of
Napoleon's order, th e emperor's heart was touched,
and he asked his officers to do what th ey could for
the unfortunate man .
8. Several Frenchmen at once plunged into th e icy
water in orde r to effect tl rescue ; but their wet clothes
fr oze, so that they could not swim, and th ey were
th emselves rescued with difficulty. Th ereupon, two
brave young officer , ha \-ing stripped themselves to the
skin, boldly swam out to th e ice-floe, and succeeded in
pushing it to the shore, Th e Russian was rescued, and
soon revived, and he showed his gratitude by taking
service und er th e emperor's flag. His rescuers showed
courage surpassing that of th e battlefield, in saving th e
life of an enemy , and one of them contracted an illness
by it from which he never completely recovered,

AFTER AUSTERLITZ.

10 6 H mlAXITY IX WAR.
9. Th e ru de game of war is being tempered more
and more by the spirit of hum ani ty. Civilized na tions
have agreed to prohibit th e use of exp losive bull ets,
which, like th e poisoned alTOWS of th e savage, prolong
and aggravate th e agonies of the wound ed.
Hu manity has also led to th e improvement of appliances
for th e relief of th e sick and th e wound ed.
Th e field-hospita l with its sta ff of nurses , and the
ambulance-wagon with its attendant surgeons, ar e
now as importan t in th e equipment of an army as
th e ammunition-wagon and the field-battery.
10. Th e most cheering proof, however, of the
ad vance of civilization is th e growing desire of th e
Great Powers to settle th eir disputes, not by war, but
by arbitration and mutual agreement ; and when one
thinks of it calmly, th e decision of int ernational
differences by war- th at is to say, by th e slaughter
of hu ndreds or of thousands of men who have little
kn owledge of, or interest in, th e quarre l-seems tc
be a savage mode of proceeding, and altogeth er un
worthy of the civilized nati ons of th e world.
hu-man-i-ty
com-bi-na-tion
a-tro-ci-ties
hu-mane/
cred -i-ta-ble
ac-ci-den-tal
ser-geant
pit-e-ous-ly
grat-i-tude
res-cu-ers
pro-h ib-it
ag-gra-vate
ap-pl i-an-ces
am-bu-lan ce
sur-geons
am-mu-nt-tion
ar-bi-tra-tion
mu-tu-al
de-cl-sion
in-ter-na-tion-a
\\' ORD E X ERCI SE : -
1. ~I ak e sentences showing the various uses of the 'Word term , an d
give 8 list of compound words formed from it.
2. Give 8 list of words formed from the stem of dispute, with vari ous
prefixes, and the ir meanings.
3. Give 8 list of words in sur-, 88 surpassing, showing its meani ng
io each.
For X OTJ,:s, 8U page 16f.

THE BATTLE OF CO RU ~~ A .
107
'tIR JOHN MOORE.
28. THE BATTLE OF CORUNNA.-L
1. As we sailed into th e harbour of Corunna, on
the morning of th e 15th of January (1809), we distinetly
made out with our glass es the two lines of
troops ; for although the ridge upon whi ch th e British
were posted lay nearer to th e sea, it wu of such inconsiderable
height compared with th at oceupi ed by
the French, that we could ObSCITC th e army of the
~Q 7

l
10 8 THE HATTLE OF CO IW ~ NA.
enemy mustering th ick along the sky-line, and overlooking
ours in a very ominous mann er.
2. When night fell, a double row of fires along
th e summits of the two hills pointed out the position
of th e rival hosts. Th e night proved very dark ;
and as fresh fuel was piled on the fires, th ey became
obscured for a moment, rising again into a sudden
blaze on being stirred up by the groups of soldiers
whom we saw, or fancied we SIl W, sta nding between
us and the light.
3. It will easily be supposed that OUI' curiosity to
see the ground , and to talk with the soldiers on the
field, was very great. We had small hopes, however,
of being allowed to leave th e ship at such a time;
and I can never cease to feel grateful for the kind ­
ness of th e captain, who allowed the purser and myself
to go on shore. 'Ve were personal ly acquainted
with several of the officers in the army, whom we
hoped to find on the gro und ; so next day we pushed
OU I' way through th e town (which was in a shocking
state of disorder), and soon found ourselves on th e
great Madrid road, which cut across thc positi ons of
bot h armi es nearly at right ang les.
4. As th e morning turned out fine, th e whole scene
looked highly picturesque ; and th ough painful in many
respects, it possessed an uncommon degrec of interest.
Th e soldiers lay scattered about, weari ed and dispirited,
ragged in th eir dr ess, and many of them
broken down in app earance, by th e fatigues of this
celebra ted retreat ; th eir hand s and faccs had been
rather less familiar with soap and water th an with
the smoke of their musk ets and the charcoal of th eir
cooking fires. 1iany were sitti ng on th e grass, and

THE BATTLE OF CORUNNA. 109
gazing every now and th en with very wistful eyes
toward th e ships.
5. When we reached the 95th, th e well-k nown
rifle corps, I was happy to meet an old friend alive
and merry among the officers of this regiment. Th ese
gentlemen appeared in better spirits than most of th e
others with whom we had conversed. \Ve were
surprised, indeed, to find them laughing heartily ; and
upon ask ing the cause of th eir mirth, we were shown a
good-sized pig, which the regimental cooks were busily
cut ting up. It seems th at th is unfortunate grunter had
been disturbed by th e French pickets near the village
of Elvina, just in front of the spot where the 95th
were stationed. He had made good his retreat, as he
though t, but fell right upon our fri ends th e sharpshooters.
Th ese merry soldiers, delighted with their
good luck , pressed us much to stay and partake of
their windfall ; but we wished to retrace our steps
along a part of the lin e, so as to gain the road to
Corunna, and return on board before sunset.
G. I ask ed the commanding officer of one of the
regiments, sta tioned near th e top of th e position,
wheth er he thought anything could possibly rouse the
men up. In reply , he said, with a very expressive
smile and a slight nod of his head, implying that even
th en he suspected wha t was about to take place,
" You'll see by-and-by, sir, if the French th ere choose
to come over."
i . Th ese words had hardly been uttered, when a
movement along th e whole of the enemy's line became
apparent. Almost at th e same instant a fur i­
ous cannonade opened from a battery mounting
eleven guns (eight and tw elve pounders), of the

110 THE BATTLE OF CORUNNA.
existence of whi ch I believe no person on our side
had pr eviously had the smallest suspicion, so completely,
up to this moment, had it been mask ed. Had
we remain ed to share th e picnic with our friends of
the 95th , we must have partaken, close at hand, of
the first salvo of round shot and grape from th e
French guns.
8. Th e effect of these preparatory notes of war
was extremely curious. At the first discharge from
th e French battery, th e whole body of th e British
troops, from one end of the positi on to the other,
started to their feet, snatched up their arms, and
formed in line with as much regularity and apparent
coolness as if they had been on parade in Hyde
Park. I really could scarcely believe my eyes when
I beheld these men spring from the ground , full
of life and vigour, though but one minute before
they had all been stretched out listlessly in the sun.
We could hear a loud hum , and occasionally a jolly
shout, and many a peal of laughter, along a distance
of nearly a mile. In the midst of these sounds th e
peculiar sharp " click -click -click " of fixing bayonets
fell distinctly on the ear, very ominously.
9. Many thousand stands of new arms had been
issued to the troops from the stores at Corunna ; and
I could observ e the men rapping th e flint s, tightening
the screws, and tossing about their firelocks, with the
air of veteran sportsmen eager to try their new pieces.
Not a single face could now be seen turning toward
the ships, and we found it difficult to obtain an answer
to any of our questions. All had become animation
and cheerfulness in minds from whi ch, but a short tim e
before, it seemed as if every particle of spirit had fled.

TH E BATTLE OF CORUNNA. 11]
in-con-sid-er-a-ble
om!i-nous
per-son-al-ly
ac-quaint-ed
dis-pir-it-ed
fa-tigues"
cel-e-brat-ed
fa-mil-iar
reg-i-ment
ex-press-ive
can-non-ade"
pre-par-a-to-ry
reg-u-lar-i-ty
pa-rade'
bay'~n;t.
an- i-ma-tion
' Y o R D EXERCISE:-
J. )lake sentences illustrating the vari ous uses of the word post.
2. Give a list of words of similar meaning to purs er.
3. Give a few examples of t hings named from the place of their
invention or manufacture, as bayonet (from Bayonne).
F or N OTES, 8U ]X1{Je tBt.
29. THE BATTLE OF CORUNNA.-II.
1. Th e army, in a few minutes, stood perfectly
ready to meet th at of the enemy, wh ose troops, in
three immense close columns, were by this time
moving rapidly down the side of the opposite
heigh ts.
I have no precise notion of the number of men in
each of these square, solid masses-I think I have
heard it stated at six or seven th ousand. Th ey kept
steadily together, and their appearance was the most
imposing and form idable th ing I recollect eyer having
seen, either before 01' since.
2. Th e purser and I stood neal' th e centre of
th e posit ion when th e battle commenced ; but as th e
ground was rather flat, we found it difficult to see
well int o th e valley. We th erefore climbed an abru pt
rising ground on the left,.on which two or three regiments
were posted. About half-way up this rising
ground stood three British field-pieces. Th ese guns
worked away briskly at the French columns as soon
as th ey cam e within range.

112 THE BATTLE OF CORUNNA.
3. Th e French battery th en set about silencing th e
fire of our artillery, and our position became rath er
unpleasant. Th e sma ll six-pound shot of the British
field -pieces had whistl ed over us merrily enough ;
but when the heavy metal of the enemy came
screaming about our ears, th e story told quite dif ­
ferently. Several of th ese balls hit our guns ; while
every shot that fell short came plump into the little
hollow space where we stood. We ag reed that a
retreat was the proper measure. Th e French gunners
just at th at moment pitched a shot so th at it fell
between us, and threw th e dirt and stones quite
over us. We took th e warning in good part, and
moved oft' towards a rising ground st ill farther to
the left.
4. Here we made acquaintance with the colonel and
th e other officers of one of th e regim ents of th e reserve.
Th e colonel held a pocket spy-glass in his hand, and
very kindly described to us th e nature of th e different
movements as they took place. By this tim e the
centre, and a portion of th e left of th e British line,
gradually became engaged in the valley; but the
severest fighting of all was at th e village of Elvina,
whi ch was in possession sometimes of th e one party,
sometimes of th e other.
5. Th e road leading in to Corunna was ROOn covered
along its whole length with wounded men, some of
whom were walking alone, some supported by comrades
who were less severely hurt, and a good many
in carts. Soon a large group passed near us, bearing
along a wounded officer. It was evident that he was
some person of consequence ; and whi le we were trying
to discover who it could be that engaged so much

BUR IAL OF S IR ,JOHN h'lOOR~.

....
114 THE BATTLE OF CO R {; ~ X A .
attention, an officer rode up th e hill. He told us
that in th e centre WIIS carried th eir brave commanderin-chief,
Sir J ohn 1[oore, who had been stru ck off his
horse by a cannon-shot a few minutes before. The
command now devolved upon ir J ohn Hope.
6. The battle, which had commenced nearly at the
foot of th e British hill , had grndually moved itself
forward toward the French side of the valley ; and
th e much-contested village of Elvi na remained finally
in our possession. The advantage W IIS manifestly on
TOltB OF S IB JOHS lI OORR.
the side of the British, for it became easy to distingui
sh, towards the end of th e day, that th e struggle
W IIS carried on at a position considerably in advance
of that on which the British had stood wh en first
attacked.
7. \Yhen the action WIIS over, and the army was
withdrawn to the position it had occupied in th e morning,
every demonstra tion W IIS made of an intention

THE BATTL E OF CORUNNA. 115
to retain possession of the gro und. Large fires were
kindled along the line, and kept up during the whole
night; which deceived the enemy, and gav2 time for
the different corps not only to retire at leisure in good
order, but to embark almost as regularl y as if nothing
had happened.
8. The details of Sir J ohn Moore's death are now
so well known that they need not be repeated here ;
but at the time I am speaking of, being new to every
one, they produced a great effect.
During the whole nigh t, whil e the troops were embarking,
after their late command er's body had been
consigned to its truly mili tar y grave, his dying remark
that he had always wished to end his days thus, hi"
exultation at the success of his last engagement, and
his satisfaction at the conduct of the soldiers, passed
eagerly from mouth to mouth. Such, indeed, is thc
influ ence of authority, that these expressions appeared
to the army an ample recompense for all th e hardships
they had endur ed on this memorable retreat,
whi ch had ended so mournfully, but at the same ti me
so gloriously.
CAPTAIN BASIL H ALl.
pre-cise'
si-lenc-ing'
ar-t il-ler-y
ac-quaint-ance
colonel (kur' nel )
man-i-Iest-ly
dem-on-stra-tion
de-ceived '
con-signed'
mil-i-ta-ry
ex-ul-ta-tion
a u-tho r-i-ty
ex -pres-sions
rec-om-pense
mem -or-a-ble
mourn/ful-ly
'VOR D E XER CISE :-
I. Give the meaning, showing th e force of the prefixes, of ab rupt,
interrupt, eruption, and irrupt ion.
2. Give a list of words formed from th e stem of devolve, with
various prefixes , and their meanin gs.
3. ).Iake sentences containing various words of similar mean ing to
con test.
For N OTES, see page 161.

11G THE ARS ENAL AT SPR INGFIELD.
30. THE ARSENAL AT SPRINGFr.£LD.
1. This is the A rsenal From floor to ceiling,
Like a huge organ, rise th e burnished arms;
Bu t from their silent pipes no anthem pealing
Startles the villages with strange alarms.
2. Ah, what a sound will rise, how wild and dr eary,
W hen the death-angel touches th ose swift keys!
\Yhat loud lament and dismal J/i.

THE ARSENAL AT SPRINGFIE LD. 117
8. Is it, 0 man , with such discordant noises,
With such accursed instruments as t hese,
Th ou drownest Xature's sweet an d kindly voices,
A nd jarrest the celesti al harmonies 1
9. iVere half the power, t hat fills th e world wit h te rro r,
Wer e half t he wealth, bestowed on camps and courts.
Given to redeem th e human mind from error,
Th ere were no need of arsenals or forts :
10. The warrior's na me would be a name abhorred j
A nd every nation that should lift again
I ts hand against a brother, on its forehead
'" ould wear for evermo re the curse of Cain!
11. Down th e dark future, through long generations,
Th e echoing sounds grow fainter, and then cease ;
And lik e a bell, with solemn , sweet vibra t ions,
I hear once more the voice of Christ say, " Pea ce."
12. P eace ! an d no longer from its brazen portals
The blast of War's great orga n shakes t he skies,
Bu t beau tiful as songs of th e imm ortals,
Th e holy melodies of love arise.
L ONGFELLOW.
ai-se-nal
Mis-er-er'-e
sym~pho-ni es
in ~6-nite
re-ver-ber-a-tions
clam/cur
te-o-cal-lis
be-leag-uered
wrenched
mus-ket-ry
di-a-pa-son
dis-cord-ant
ac-curs-ed
ce-les -ti-al
har-mo-nies
be-stowed'
ab-horred'
gen-er-a-tions
vi-bra-tions
Im-mor-tals
W OR n
E XERCISE:-
J. Give a list of words, with th eir meanings, showing th e use of the
suffix -ry, as musketry.
2. :'Iak e sentences illustrating the var ious meanings of the noun
court.
3. " ' rite in prose the substance of verses 9 and 10.
For NOTES, see page i6S.

11 8 TH E LITTL E CORPORA L.
31. THE LITTLE CORPORAL.-I.
1. Napoleon Bonaparte was for many years known
among his soldiers -as th e Little Corpora l. It was
th eir " pet name " for th eir general ; and Napoleon
lik ed the name, for he knew that it was a sign of
their friendship and devotion. It was given him
during his first campaign as leader of a French army.
He was very yo ung for th e post, being only in his
twenty-seventh year; but the old soldiers lik ed him
all the better for that. As his army won victory
after victory, the veterans used to discuss, in a playful
manner round the camp-fires, wheth er he should
not be promoted for his services. So, afte r one battle
th ey made him a corporal, after anot her a sergeant,
«nd so on, through all th e military ranks. But th e
title of Corporal, th e lowest rank of officer, was the one
that pleased them most ; and for many years, when
Napoleon made his nightly round of his camp, he was
sur e to be greeted by shouts of " Vive le petit caporal! "
2. Never did soldiers love th eir general as those
of th e French army loved Napoleon. Th ey adm ired
his exceptional courage and coolness. Everyone of
them had seen him do some act of conspicuous bravery.
Some had seen him gallop to th e head of a wav erin g
regiment and lead it to a glorious charge; others had
seen him seize the colours from an ensign, dash forward
almost alone, and plant th em in th e very face
of th e enemy; others had seen him coolly turn over
a block of stone sent whizzing past his head by the
explosion of a shell, and had perhaps heard him
remark, " A few inehes more, and that would have
don e its work."

TH E LITTLE CORPORAL. lllJ
3. Napoleon knew how to speak to his soldiers,
just a few words at a tim e, but words that went to
th eir hearts. He recalled th eir past victories, he
prai sed their courage, he stirred th eir patriotism and
their devotion to himself, wh ile at th e same time he
did not hesitate to reprimand th em for any want of
bravery. At Marengo he galloped to th e front of a
retreating squadron, and with th e words, " Soldiers,
remember that it is my custom to sleep upon the
battle-field ," he rallied them for a charge.
4. I n marching fr om Egypt to Syria, a detac h­
ment of his army lost its way in th e desert. Napoleon
himself set oft' in search of his lost troops, and
eventually found them nearly dying of hunger and
thirst. The very sight of the general revived them,
and when he told them that food was at hand they
took heart again. " But ," continued Napoleon, " even
if supplies had been longer delayed, would that have
excused murmuring and despair ? No, soldiers; learn
to die with honour."
5. Th e slightest reprimand from Napoleon had a
wonderful effect on officers and pri vates alike. Many
a fine young fellow exposed himself to certain death
from his feeling of shame at a word of rebuke. Such
was Croisier, wh o mounted an exposed battery before
the walls of Acre, and quietly stood th ere till he met
his death.
6. On 0 :1C occasion Napoleon addressed a regiment
which had shown signs of cowardice in battle. "You
hav e shown," he said, " neither discipline nor courage.
You hav e allowed yourselves 19 be defeat ed wh ere a
few resolute men might have withstood an army. It
should be written on your colours, ' They are no long er

120 THE LITTLE CORPORAL.
French soldiers.''' Cri es, groans, and shouts showed
how much the regi ment felt th e rebuke. Napoleon
then changed his tone, alluding to their bravery on
former occasions, and never afterwards had he any
reason to eomplain of their behaviour.
i . The most striking illustration of Napoleon's
power over his soldiers occurred after his escape from
Elba. )Iarching through the south of France with a
few followers, he met a body of troops sent to arrest
him. Th e two parties quietly advanced till within
a few yards of each other, then halted. Napoleon
th rew open his cloak, showing the star of th e Legion
of Honour. " If there is a man among you who will
kill his emperor," he cried, " let him do it now. Here
I am ." Shouts of " Vive l'Empereltr! " were th e only
reply. Nap oleon threw himself among th e leaders.
Taking a veteran by the whisk ers, he said, " Speak
honestl y, old fellow, could you have th e heart to kill
your emperor?" The man dropped his ramrod into
the barrel of his gun ; the sound showed that it was
empty. " J udge," said he, " if I have done thee much
harm ; th e others are all the same." And with that
all th e soldiers fell into lin e, Napoleon ga ve the word .
and the uni ted party marched forward.
8. Anoth er cause of th e devotion shown to Napoleon
by his soldiers was th e rough , fri endly way
in whi ch he treated them. He would hims elf lend
a hand in any hard work, wheth er in pulling guns
up an Alpine pass, or in digging in the trenches.
He ta lked of t he soldiers as his children, he joked
with them , playfully boxed their ears, or pulled their
noses. He was careful of th eir comfort. On parade
in win ter he would suddenly pin ch a soldier. " What,"

THE LITTLE CORPORAL. 121
he would cry, "no woollen cloth es und er your uniforms
at this tim e of yea r l-See, colonel, that every man in
th is regi ment has them by to-morrow." After a hardfought
battle, Napoleon and his sta ff would sometimes
spend th e wh ole night on th e field caring for
th e wounded.
9. No one was ever sterner with his soldiers at
breaches of discipline; yet th e soldiers knew that
Napoleon could sometimes overlook a fault. One
night, it is said, after a hard day's figh tin g, he found a
sentry asleep at his post. Th e punishment for such an
offence in every army is death . Yet ~ T apoleon, instead
of waking the soldier and putting him und er arres t,
shouldered his musket and moun ted guard till the
man awoke, to receive a full pardon from his emperor.
cor-po-ral
de-vo-tion
cam-paign'
ex-cep-tion-al
pa-tri-ot-ism
rep-ri-mand'
squad-ron
ral-lied
de-tach-ment
e-vent-u-al-ly
mur-mur-ing'
cow-ar-dice
dis-cip-line
al-Iiid-ing'
be-hav-Iour
il-lus-tra-tion
W ORn EXElt CISE :-
1. Give a list of words with th e suffix -ship, as friendship, and
their mean ings.
2. :lIake sentences showing th e various uses of the word s charge and
discharge.
3. Give a list of word s with th e suffix -isrn, as patriotism, and
th eir meanings.
For N OTES , see pa[Je £6J.
32. THE LITTLE CORPORAL.-II.
1. It has often been said that, in 1 Tapoleon's time,
every private in the French army carried a marshal's
Laton in his knapsack. TIllS means that 11 man's

122 TH E LITTLE CORPORAL.
advancement did not depend on hi s wealt h or SOCIal
position, but entirely on his own conduct as a soldier.
The way in which he promoted hi s men made every
(me of them anxious to distinguish himself before
the emperor. After an engagement, Napoleon would
~ather his captains arou nd him, an d ask them to select
the bravest fr om among them for promotion. A brave
action seldom went un rewarded ; sometimes it was by
n pleasan t word-that was enoug h for his soldiers
-but more often the word was accompanied by somet
hing more substantial.
2. Sometimes a quick retort, or a clever speech,
was the first step in the promotion of a ga llant young
fellow. Marsh al Junot owed his advance to a quiet,
cool exclamation. Wh en a private at Toulon, he was
writing to Napoleon's dictation. The letter was j ust
finished, wh en the explosion of one of the enemy's
shells covered it with earth. " Thanks," said J unot,
nodding towards the battery; " we shall not need sand
to dry the let ter this tim e."
3. The devotion of the soldiers was so intense
that no risks were too great when undertaken in his
serv ice. Napoleon seldom ordered. anyone to do a
particularly da ngerou s piece of work ; he preferred
to ask for volunteers, and he never failed to find
them. Du ring his ad van ce on Vienna in 18 09, a
large body of the Austrian s had form ed their camp
on the opposite bank of the Danube. A strong
division had also been posted in fr ont of his line of
march, but it was reported that this div ision had
crossed the river, leaving his way open. The real
posit ion of the enemy could only be determined by
capturing and quest ioning some of the Austrians on

TH E LITTLE CORPOR AL. 123 ~
the opposite bank of th e river, To cross the flooded
Danube, and carry off one of the enemy from th eir
own in trenchments, was a plan so little likely to
succeed, that the emperor would not order any one
to make th e attempt. Bu t on the situation being
explained to one of his young offieers, am bition to win
his emperor's approva l made the danger seem light.
4. Six picked men of the Old Guard accompanied
this officer, but it was only by force that boatmen
could be obtai ned for an expedition of so desperate a
cha racter. When the river had at last been crossed,
and the boat gu ided in to the shelter of the brushwood
on the shore within a few ya rds of the Au strian
sentinels, the officer was at a loss how next to proceed.
For tune solved his difficul ty. First one, and
then two oth ers of th e enemy, came to the riverside
for wa ter. Th ese were silently and swiftly ducked
into the river, and then gagged and bound before
th ey could utter a cry. In putting off fr om th e shore,
how ever, a noise was mad e which dr ew th e attention
of th e sentries, and a brisk fire was opened on th e
retreating boat. Th e occupants owed th eir safety
only to the darkness of the nigh t, and to their own
exertions at th e oars.
5. Napoleon, on their retu rn , reward ed the unwilling
boatmen with most liberal paym ent, and bestowed
the cross of th e Legion of Honour on the soldiers of
the Guard, Th e Au strian soldiers were also kindly
treated. As soon as possible th ey were returned to
their fri end s, with a sum of money sufficient to repay
them for th e rough treatment to whi ch it had been
necessary to subject them, in order to get the information
desired.

A DANGEROU S E XP ED IT I ON .

THE LITTL E CORPORAL. 1" _ iJ -
6. A similar capture was once mad e by t wo of
Napoleon's mar hals, Lannes and ~I u ra t. It was a
during deed. The French and Austrian armies were
ly ing on opposite sides of a rivet'. The Austrians
guarded the only bridge by batteri es on th eir side
of the st ream. I n ord er to mak e their position still
more SCCUl'e, an Au trian officer was sent to de troy
the bridg e entirely.
7, H e was at work there one evening, wh en Lanues
and Mura t st rolled down to the riv erside, and, as
enemies often do in the inter vals of fight ing, they
began to talk to him. They man agcd to k ecp his
nttention fixed on the Austrian sid e of the st ream,
so th at he did not notice a file of French grcnadiers
coming qu ietly up behind him . I n a moment he and
his pat'ty were seized. La nnes lind Mura t then pu t
themselves at th e head of the grenudiers, and advanced
on th e batteries, Taken by surprise, the Austrians
were a fra id to fire, seeing t heir own officers amo ng t he
party, Th e batteries were seized, and th e guns turned
agai nst the very soldiers wh o had erec ted them.
bat-on
knap-sack
ad-van ce-ment
pre-mo-tion
ex-cla-ma-tio n
W OR D E XERCISE :-
dic-ta-tion
par-tic-u-lar -ly
pre-ferre d'
vol -un-teers '
ques-tion-ing
in-trench-ments
am -bi-tion
np-pro v ~al
ex-pe-di-tion
des-per-a te
sen-ti-nels
oc-cu-pan ts
ex-er-tions
in-for-ma-tion
gren-a-d iers ' .
1. Give a list of verbs from whi ch nouns in -sion are formed, ltd
explode,
o ::\Iake sent ence s showing the various uses of the word fo rtune ,
nut! give a list of words deriv ed from it.
3. Explain the meanings of the words office, officer, official,
officiate, and officious.
(~U l
For X OTES, see patJt! ~6j .
8

126 PERFUMES.
CFSS Ens ron
BUR S I S G INCESSE.
33. PERFUMES .
1. It is difficult to realiz e how universal was the
use of perfumes in ancient times. Th e early physicians
freely prescribed sweet odours, especially as
cures for nervous diseases, and seemed to understand
that certain flowers and scents are not only beneficial
to health, but will also purify the air and ward
off disease.
2. Egypt was a great mart for perfumes. J oseph
was sold to a company of Ishmaelites on th eir way
to Egypt bearing spices, balm, and myrrh. Egyptian
women used many essences and rare perfumes, and
wor e necklaces of scented wood, as th e Chinese women
still do. Guests were received in chambers strewn
with flowers, and slaves hung garlands of roses, lotu s,
or saffron flowers round their necks, whil e sweetsmelling
gums were burned in little vases.
3. Th e love of the J ews for perfumes was also very
g reat. In their worship a sacred incense was burne d
whi ch was not allowed to be used in pri vate life. Th ey
p erfumed their rooms with myrrh. aloes. and cinna-

P ERFU~ES .
127
rnon, and scented th eir hair wiL~ myrrh, cassia, aloes,
and frankincense. They carried small gold or silver
boxes, or brightly-coloured vials, suspended from th eir
necklaces, containing
musk ,
attar of roses,
balsam, saffro n,
or spikena rd.
One-tenth part
of a bride's .
dowry was set
apart for the -'
purcha se of
scents.
4. Th e Greeks I~C "" " E' DOX ( RO )fA ~).
well understOod the charm of fresh, fragrant flowers,
and at th eir feasts they decorated th eir rooms and th eir
persons with garla nds and wreaths. The Grecian love
of perfumes spread to Rome, and perf umers' shops,
marked by a bunch of sage for a sign ­
board,crowded one quarter of the city.
5. Pliny tells us that the
Romans importe d perfumes
from India and Arabia to
the value of a million sterling
every year. Julius
Cresar and Crassus tried
GLASS SCE>."T-DOTrLES to restrain this waste by AU;~:S;TER
( RO "A~) . forbiddinz th e sale of for- ( RO )l A~) .
eign perfumes in Rome, but this edict only made th em
more expensi yeo Every one used th em. Hous es,
furniture, and dresses were perf umed ; the amphitheatres
and baths were scented with lavender and

128 PEIU·U~lES.
oth er essences, and on certain feast-d ays even the
military ensigns were anointed.
6. Perfumes were never rich er or more costly in
England th an in the time of Elizabeth.
Th e queen was very particular
in her choice of scents; and her
minister, Cecil, once prevented hCI'
from opening some private letters
which he had received
from J ames of Scotland,
by declaring that they
had an evil odour, and he
thus saved himself from
a dangerous position.
POl,-,~nER .
in the fires to give out gentle odours;
scented lozenges were used to sweete n
th e breath, and pomanders were carried
suspended fr om chains. Edward de
Vere, Earl of Oxford, so pleased Elizabeth
with th e present of a pair of
perfumed gloves, that she had her portrait
painted with th em on her hands,
and their scent became fashionable as
7. Perf umes were burnt
PO lrA ~DER.
" Lord Oxford 's perfume." Scented gloves, embroidered
and richly j ewelled,
were favourite pr esents
until th e middle
of last century.
8. Perfumes were
known in England long before Elizabeth's tim e, however.
Matilda, queen of Henry th e Fi rst, received
£rom France a pr esent of a dish for rose-water in

PERF U~l E S. 129
the form of a silver peacock , the tail being set
with precious stones. Th e pomand er, 0 1' scent-ball,
was also known- a gold musk-ball, weighing eleven
ounces, being mentioned among the po e ions of
Henry the Fi ft h. These balls were pierced, so as
to let out the perfume, and were used bv fas hionable
gentle.len as well as by ladi es, worn "round the
neck, carried in the hand, or suspended from the
girdle.
0. Attar of roses, the most delicat e perfume of th e
Eas t, is made from the roses of Dam uscu and the
vales of Cashmere
am ong other
places- five hun­
.lred pounds of
lea ves being required
to yi eld
one ounce of th e
oil. Next to th is,
sau talwood, or J F.WF.I.LED PE RFUME· BOX.
sand alw ood as it is gene rally called, is th e favo ur ite
Ori ent al perfume. This fragrant wood is much used
for carviug into cask ets and j ewel-boxes, and for
burn ing as incense. A few perfumes are obtained
Irom animals, such as musk , civet, and am bergris.
1O. We import perfumes from all par ts of the
world. Th e rose-gardens of th e East, the flowerfarms
of southern France, and the Invender-fields
of l\litcham if) • urrev show th at th e modern use
of perfume supports "a"large industry; but all this
is nothing compared with the lavi sh use of sweet
scents in anci ent tim es and during the ~li ddle
Ages.

130 A DINNER PARTY I N ANCIENT TH EBES.
phy-si-cians
pre-scribed'
ben-e-Fi-cial
myrrh
es-sen-ces
sar-fron
al-oes
cin-na-mon
, .
cas-si-a
fran k-in-cense
spike-nard
am-phi-the-a-tr es
en-signs
an-elat-ed
Icz-en-ges
pom-an-ders
em-broi-dered
san-tal-wood
civ-et
am-ber-gris
\ V ORD E XERCISE :-
J. Make sentences showing t he nse of th e word suspend, in t wo
meanings, and of suspense.
2. Give a list of word s, wit h t heir meanin gs, formed with t he prefixes
for- and fore- .
3. Give a list of words similar in meaning to vale.
For NOTES, Bee page 268.
34. A DINNER PARTY IN ANCIENT THEBES.
1. Let us invite ourselves to a dinn er party in
Egyptian high life, such as might have been given
in the ancient city of Th ebes about three thousand
years ago. Th e time is mid-day , and the guests are
arrivin g on foot, in chairs born e by servants, and in
chariots. A high wall, painted in panels, surrounds
the fashionable villa, and on an obelisk near is inscribed
the name of the owner. We enter the grounds
by a folding gate flanked with lofty towers.
2. At the end of a broad walk , bordered by rows
of trees, stands a br ick mansion, over the door of
which we read in hieroglyphics, " The Good House."
The building is made airy by corridors , colonnades,
and open courts shaded by awnings, all gaily painted
and ornamented. I ts grounds include flower-gardens,
vineyards, date-orchards, and groves of trees.
3. We shall accompany t he guest whose chariot has
just halted. Th e Egyptian nobleman dri ves his own
horse, but he is attended by a train of servants. One

A DIXXER PARTY IX AXCIEXT THEBES. 131
of these run s forward to kn ock at the door, another
takes th e reins, another presents a stool to assist his
muster to alight, and others carry the various articles
which he may require during the visit. As th e guest
steps into the court, a servant receives his sandals, and
brings wat er that he may wash his feet. He is th en
invited into th e festal cham ber, where his host and
EGTPTIA.."i GABDE...,",
hostess sit side by side on a double chair, to which
their favouri te monkey is tied.
4. On his ..hav en head th e Egyp tian gentleman
wears a wig with little top curls, and long queues
which hang behind. His beard is short---a 10n O' one
is only for the king. His large-sleeved robe is of fine
white linen, and he is adorned with necklace, bracelets,

132 A DI~ ~ E R PARTY IN ANCIE NT THEBES.
and a number of finger-rings. The Indy by his side
also wears a lin en robe over another of a richlycolour
ed stuff Her hair falls to her shoulders in crisp
and glossy braids. Cha rms , in the form of beetles,
dragons, asps, and strange symbolic eyes, dangle from
her gold ear-rings, bracelets, necklace, and anklets.
5. Having saluted his host and hostess, the newcomer
seats him self on a low stool, where a serv ant
anoints his head with a sweet perf ume, hands him a
lot us blossom, hangs garlands of flowers on his neck
and head, an d offers him wine. The servant, as he
receives back the empti ed cup and offers a napkin,
politely remarks, " )Iay it benefit you ." Th is completes
the formal reception.
6. Every lady is attended , in the same manner, by
a female slave. \Vhile the guests are arriving, the
musicians and da ncers belonging to the household
amuse the company, who sit on chairs in rows, the
ladies commenting on one anoth er's jewellery, and, in
complim ent, exchanging lotu s flowers.
7. The room is furnished with couches, arm-chairs,
and footstools, made of '~h e native acacia, or of ebony
and oth er rare imported woods, inlaid with ivory,
carved in animal forms, and cushioned and covered
with leopard ski ns. Th e ceilings are st uccoed and
painted , and the panels of the walls are adorned with
coloured designs. The tables are of various sizes and
fanciful patterns. Th e floor is covered with a palmleaf
matting or wool carpet.
S. And now the ox, kid, geese, and ducks, which,
according to custom, were hurried into th e cooki ng
pots as soon as they were killed, ar e ready to be
served. After hand-washing, the gu ests tak e th eir

A DI~~ER PARTY Il' A~ClENT THEBES. 1:33
seats on stools. on cha irs, or on the floor, one or two
at each little, low, round table. The dishe s, many
of whi ch ar e vegetables, are erved in courses, and
th e guests, haying neit her k nife nor fork , help th emselves
with their fingers. ervnnts keep the wine
and water cool by fann ing the porou~ jars which
contai n them.
D. During th e repast, when th e enjoyment is at
its height, the 0 iris- an image lik e a human mummy
-is brought in and form ally introduc ed to eat h
visitor, with the reminder that life is short and a:1
must die. This little incident does not in the lea: t
disturb the enjoyment of th e guests.
10. There is one, however, to whom th is warning
is not giYen, an d who, though anointed and garlanded
and duly placed at a table, does not partake of the
delicacies set before him . Thi s is a real mummy, a
deceased member of the family, whom th e host is
keeping for some months before buri al. It is in
his honour, ind eed, that the relatives and friends are
assembled : th e presence of a beloved mummy is the
chief pleasure of an Egyptian party.
char-i-ots
ob-e-lisk
hi-er-o-g lyph-ics
co r-ri-ders
col-on-na des "
san-dals
queues
drag-ons
sym-bo l-ic .
re-cep-tion
miis--I~ians
lo-tus , .
a-ca-ci-a
leop-ard
stuc-coed
in-tr o-duced'
in~i-d ent
del -i-ca-cies
de -ceased'
bur-i-al
W ean EXERCISE :-
I. :.rak e seutences showing th e various meanings of th e word cours e,
2. Give a list of words, wi:!: th eir meanings , fonn ed with the prefix
be-, as beloved.
3. Give .. list of words similar in mean ing to repast.
For K OTES, see page ~63 .

13 4 ELEGY WRITTEN IN A COUNTRY CHU RCH YARD.
35. ELEGY WRITTEN IN A COUNTRY
CHURCHYARD.
(05« Frontispi=
1. Th e cur few tolls the knell of parting day,
The lowing herd winds slowly o'er th e lea,
The ploughman homeward plods his weary way,
And leaves the world to darkness and to me.
2. Now fades the glimm ering landscape on th e sight,
And all the air a solemn stillness holds,
Save where the beetle wheels his droning flight,
And drowsy tinklings lull the distant folds ;
3. Save that from yond er ivy-mantl ed tower
The moping owl does to th e moon complain
Of such as, wande ring nea r her secret bower,
l\Iolest her ancient solita ry reign.
4. Beneath those rugged elms, that yew t ree's shade,
Wh ere heaves th e turf in many a mouldering heap,
Each in his narrow cell for ever laid,
Th e rude forefathers of th e hamlet sleep.
5. Th e breezy call of incense-breathin g l\Iorn ,
Th e swallow twittering from the straw-built shed,
The cock's shrill clarion, or the echoing horn ,
No more shall rouse them from their lowly bed.
6 For them no more the blazing hearth shall burn,
Or busy housewife ply her evening care;
No children ru n to lisp thei r sire's return,
Or climb his knees the envied kiss to share.
7. Oft did the han-est to their sickle yield,
Their furrow oft the st ubborn glebe has broke :

ELEGY W RI TT E~ I ~ A COUNTRY CHURCHYARD . 135
How jocund did they drive th eir team afield!
H ow bowed the woods beneath their sturdy stroke!
/ 8. Let not Ambitiou mock th eir useful toil,
Th eir homely joys, and destiny obscure ;
Nor Grandeur hear with a disdainful smile
Th e short and simple annals of the poor.
9. The boast of Heraldry, the pomp of P ower,
And nil that Beauty, all that ' Vealt h e'er gave ,
Await alike the inevitable hour-
The paths of glory lend but to the gra,·e.
10. Nor you, )'e proud, impute to these the fault,
If )Iemory o'er th eir tombs no trophies raise,
"Wh ere through the long-drawn aisle and fretted vault
Th e pealing anthem swells the note of praise.
II. Can storied urn or animated bust
Back to its mansion call the fleeting breath ~
Can H onour's voice provoke the silent du st,
Or Flat tery soothe the dull cold ear of Death i /
12. P erh aps ill this neg lected spot is laid
Some heart once pregnant with celestial fire;
H ands that the rod of empire might have swayed,
Or wak ed to ecstasy th e living lyre.
13. But Knowledge to their ey"s her ample page,
Rich with the spoils of time, did ne'er unroll ;
Chill Penury repressed th eir noble rage,
And froze the gen ial current of thesoul.
14. F ull many a gem, of purest ray serene,
The dark un fathomed caves of ocean bear;

13 6 ELEGY WRITTEN IN A COUXTRY CHURCHYARD.
Full many a flower is born to blush unseen,
An d waste its sweetness on th e desert air.
15. Some village Hampden, th at with dauntless breast
The little tyrant of his fields withstood ;
Some mute inglorious )Iilton, here may rest ;
Some Cromwell, guiltless of his country's 1100

ELEGY WRITTEN IN A COUNTRY CHURCHYARD. 137
A nd many a holy text ar ound she strews,
That teach the ru stic mora list to die.
22. For who to dumb Forgetfulness a prey,
This pleasing, an xious being, e'er resigned j
Left the warm prec incts of th e cheerful day.
• · 01' cast one longing, lingeri ng look behind 1
23. On some fond breast the parting scul relies,
Some pious drops the closing eyc requires ;
E ven from the tomb the voice of Nature cries­
E ven in our ashes live th eir wonted fires.
24. For th ee, who, mindful of th e unhonoured dend,
Dost in these lin es th eir artless ta le relate, ­
If chance, by IonelyContemplat ion led,
Some kindred spirit sha ll inquire thy fat e,
25. H aply some hoary-headed swain may say,
" Oft hav e we seen him at th e peep of dawn
Bru shing with hasty steps th e dews away,
To meet th e sun upon th e upl and la wn.
26." Th ere, at th e foot of yond er nodding beech,
That wreathes its old fantastic roots so high,
His listl ess length at noontide would he st retch,
And pore upon th e brook that babbles by.
2i." H ar d by yon wood, now smiling as in scorn ,
)Iutteri ng his wayward fancies he would rove j
• TO W drooping, woful, wan , like one forlorn,
Or crazed with care, or crossed in hopeless 10"0.
28." One morn I missed him on th e accustomed hill,
Along th e heath, and near his favourite tree ;

138 ELEGY WRITTE ~ I N A COUNTRY CHURCHYARD.
Another came, nor yet beside the rill,
Nor up the lawn, nor at the wood was he;
~9." The next, with dirges due, in sad army,
Slow through the church-way path we saw him borne:
Approach and read (for thou canst read ) the lay
Graved on the stone beneath yon aged thorn."
T H E
E P ITAPH.
30. Here rests his head upon the lap of Earth,
A youth to Fortune and to Fam e unknown;
Fair Science frowned not on his humble birth,
And )lelancholy marked him for her own.
31. Large was his bounty, and his soul sincere ;
H eaven did a recompense as largely send:
He gave u:; Misery all he had-a tea r;
H e gained from H eaven ('twas all he wished) a friend.
32. No fur ther seek his merits to disclose,
Or draw his frail ties from th eir dr ead abode,
(There they alike in trembling hope repose),­
Th e bosom of his Father and his God.
T Ho>rAs GR.

A TEA- CARAYAN. 139
36. A TEA-eARAVAN.
1. Tea is an article of which an enormous quantity
is used in th is coun try. Russia probably stands
next to Britain in the quantity of tea used by its
people ; but th e Russians lik e th eir tea much weak er
than we do, and th ey do not let it stand so long to infuse.
2. All our tea formerly came from China, and many
tal es are told of the races between th e tea-clippers,
each trying to be the first to bring its cargo of the
new sea on's tea to the English markets. Now only
one-fourth of our tea comes from China. In Russia,
th e whole of th e seventy or eighty million pounds
that are used every ~'ea r is brought from China ;
and it is said that the best Chin ese tea is neve r
export ed except to Russia. The following account
of a tea-earavan on its way to Russia is given by a
recent traveller in Siberia :-
3. At last my preparations were complete, and I
..turted on th e next stage of my journ ey. Th e road,
for some miles after leaving the town , lay along the
ice in the v er~' centre of the river Yenisei. As it was
a \'eiT bright moonlight nigh t, th e effect was novel
and beautiful ; and th e track being smoot h and level,
th e hors es went along at th eir top speed. I was
gradually lulled into a .deep sleep, find woke to find
th e first stage of twenty-nin e versts accomplished, and
th e sledge in th e post-yard of Botoisknya.
4. The little village was slum bering ; not a light
was to be seen in any of th e wind ows. In th e posthou
e was th e only sign of life. Looking up the
street, which in th e moonlight had a quaint appearance
with its tumble-down cottages, I saw a most

140 . A TEA-CARAVAN.
curious sight. The centre of th e road had exactly
th e appearance of being laid with railway sleepers.
As far as one could see, th e long ridges in the snow
followed each other sa regularly th at I could not help
asking what was th e reason of so cutting up the road .~
5. To my astonishment I was told that these ridges
were cau sed by th e thousands of horses in th e caravans
which had passed along the road during th e winter.
The horses know that th ey can get a better foothold
1> 1 walking in each other's footsteps, and fall into th e
h.ibit of doing so alm ost mechanically. Shortly afterwards,
I had the first of many opportunities of noting
t his for myself ; for presently a large tea-camvan cam e
a long, and I observed that it hardly ever happ ened
that a horse stepped out of th e grooves- so much so
that th e drivers, strolling alongside, seemed to have
VCl'y little to do, as the animals knew all that was
expected of them.
6. This, my first sight of a caravan on th e great
post-road, was but the forerunner of what we met
and pass ed, both day and night, almost without intermission,
all the way to Irkutsk. While many were
Liden with European goods bound eastwards, most of
them were cowing from China with tea. So great,
i.i fact, was this traffic tha t I could not help wondering
where all this immense quantity of tea could go to,
more especially wh en one considers that what comes.
to Europe by th e great post-road is only a small portion
of the annual amount imported from China.
7. Th e tea of Chi na, packed in bales of hid e, is
brought across th e Gobi desert by ox-wagons or by
camels as far as th e frontier, wh ere it is transferred
to sledges or to Siberian carts; according to th e season,

A TEA- CARAVAK. 141
and the long j ourn ey to Tomsk is commenced, a
journ ey taking over two months. Th e same horses
go the whole way, but they are allowed to take their
own pace, and seldom mak e more than three miles an
hour. At Tomsk the tea is stored till spring, when
it is taken by river-steamer into Russia. Tea brought
overland is said to retain more of its original flavour
than th at which, packed in lead, has made a sea
voyage ; but the difference is so slight that probably
only an expert can detect it.
8. Th ere are comparatively few men in charge
of these immensely valuable consignments- which
often consist of as many as two hundred and fifty
sledges--only one man to about seven horses, as a
rul e. At night the men take it in turn to keep watch,
On the great post-road a peculiar form of highway
robbery exists. Bales of tea are frequently cut loose
and sto len in the dark hours by thieves,wh o lurk around
to tak e advantage of a dri ver dozing in his sledge.
Th e poor fellow th en has to pay dearly for his " forty
winks," as he has to make the loss good out of his
wages- a very serious matter, considerin g th e valu e of
a bale of tea.
car-a-van
re-cent
prep-a-ra-tions
cen-tre
ap-~~ance
a-ston-ish-ment
me-chan-i-cal-ly
grooves
.J. L. GIL)IOUR.
B y perm ission of the Reliyiottl Tract Society.
in-ter-mis-sion
traf-fic
e-sp~ial-Iy
fron-tier
trans-ferred'
com -~ar-~-tive-ly
con-sign-ments
thieves
W ORD ExERCIsE:-
I. Give th e meanin gs 01 th e words consider, consideration, considerate,
and considerable.
2. Explain th e similarity in meaning betw een valuable, invaluable,
and priceless; and contras t with valueless and worthless.
3. Give '" list 01 words with the prefix trans-, as transferred, and
their meanings .
For N OTES, lee page $6L
9

142 ACROSS LAKE BAIKAL.
37. ACROSS LAKE BAIKAL.
1. It was a lovely morning when we once more
sighted the river Angara. But, to my astonishment,
this was no silent expanse of ice, as I had seen it on
the previous night. Before me was a broad, swiftlyrunning
river, its clear waters sparkling like crystal
in the bright rays of th e rising sun, whil e on the
surface no trace of ice could I discern.
2. We followed the banks of th e riv er all th e way
to Lake Baikal. I was pr epared now for any surprise,
after th e transformation that had so startled
me in the morning ; so, when a bend in the road
brought us in full view of this vast inland sea, I was
not astonished to see that it was still held in th e icy
grasp of th e Siberian winter. Th e ice commenced at
the very mouth of the Angara. From one side of the
stream to th e other, the line of the ice was as straight
as if it had been rul ed.
3. Our road now lay along the shore-a sort of
rocky beach, reminding me very much of bits of
Devonshire. The road in one place left th e shore for
a short distance, and went right across a little harbour
crowded with shipping, where we had to dodge in and
out among th e vessels, and duck our heads to avoid
th e ropes and spars. My driver evidently kn ew th e
place well, for we went right through th e fleet at full
gall op, and a few minutes later reached th e point at
which th e journey across th e lake is commenced.
4. Try to imagine what it would be lik e, starting
from Dover on a warm , spring-like morning to drive
over to Calais or to Boulogn e, and you will hav e some
idea of thi s part of my journey. The opposite shore

ACROSS LAKE BAIKAL. 143
was quite invisible j and the ice, owing to ita smoothne
s and th e unusual absenee of snow on ita surface,
presented almost the appearance of a very calm sea
und er th e bright blue morn ing sky.
5. Lake Baikal is remar kable for" the rapidity with
8LEDGE-TB..1VELLlSG.
whi ch its water freezes wh en winter seta in. Th e
appearance of the ice depends entirely on th e weather
at th e time when the water congealed. If th e surface
was th en much agitated, th e ice everywhere will pre ­
sent a broken appearance like waves, plainly showing
how sudden and irresistible is th e icy grasp of the

144 AOROSS LAKE BAIKAL.
Siberian winter. I am informed that along the coast
the curious phenomenon of frozen waves has often
been noticed, the curl of the water, and even the
foam, being distinguishable in the solid mass. I was
fortunate in finding the ice perfectly smooth: it had 1
evidently been a dead calm at the time the frost
set in.
6. The road over the lake is indicated by a double
row of pine saplings stuck at intervals in the ice; a
curious effect being thus produced, not unlike an endless
miniature boulevard, stretching away till it is lost
in the distance. I could not help noticing the way
thc horses are shod for the work. Huge spikes are
fastened to their sho es, which, as they gallop along,
splinter the ice in all directions, but give them a firm
foothold on its treacherous surface.
7. When we were well out in the open, and tearing
along at the horses' top speed, the motion was simply
delightful. For about a mile from the shore the ice
had a thin layer of snow over it; but we gradually
left this dazzling white carpet, and at length reached
th e clear ice, when I saw around me the most wonderful
and bewitching sight I ever beheld. Owing to
th e marvellous transparency of the water, the ice presen
ted everywhere the appearance of polished crystal,
and although undoubtedly of great thickness, was so
colourless that driving upon it appeared like passing
over space. It gave me at first quite an uncanny
feeling to look over the side of the sledge down into
the dark abyss beneath. This feeling, however, gradually
changed to one of fascination, till at last I found
it positively difficult to withdraw my gaz e from the
awful depths.

ACROSS LAKE BAIK AL. 145
8. About half-way across, I sto pped to make a
sketc h, and to take some photogru phs. It was no
easy matter ; for I found, on getting out of th e sledge,
that th e ice was so slippery that, in spite of my felt
snow-boots, I could hardly stand. Th e deathlike
silence of the surroundings remind ed me not a little
of my experiences in the ice of th e Kara Sea. This
wonderful silence was occasionally brok en by curious
sounds, as if big guns were being fired at some little
distan ce. These sounds were caused by th e cracking
of th e ice. I was told that in some parts of the
lak e there were huge fissures, through which the
water omld be seen. For this reason it is advisable
to perform the journey by dayligh t.
9. We reached the opposite coast in four hours
and a half, th e horses having done th e whole dista nce
of over thirty miles with only two stoppages of a few
minu tes each. It was evidently an easy bit of work
for them, as they seemed as fresh when we drew up
in th e post -yard as when th ey sta rted in the morning.
J . L. GILMOUR.
By permissior: of tlce Rel ~J iou8 Tr act Society.
dis-cern/
trans-for-ma-tion
~-~~~e
in-vis -i-ble
ab-sence
re-mark'-a-ble
ra-pid-i-ty
con-gea1ed'
l~~;.tat-ed
min-i-a-ture
bou-le-vard
treach-er-ous
trans-par'-en -ey
un-doubt-ed-ly
a-byss '
fas-c i-na-tion
po s~i-~~e-Iy
ex-pe-ri-en-ces
ad-vis-a-b le
stop-pa-ges
'Ya RD E.XERCISE :-
I. Give a list of words derived from imag e, and th eir meanings.
2. Give a list of words similar in meaning to beach, and show the
difference between them.
3. Give a list of words with th e root graph, as photograph. with
the ir meanings.
For NOTES, seepage f~.

146 TH E WORLD BEFORE COLUMBUS.
38. THE WORLD BEFORE COLUMBUS .
1. Th c discovery of America was not a lucky accident,
which might equally well hav e happened at any
tim e before or after the time when it actu ally did
happen. Th e wny had been paved for it by centuries
of experiment and speculation, and th e actual circumstances
which led up to it form an interesting
study in th e hist ory of mankind.
2. From th e remotest ages, an overland trade had
been carried on between Asia and Europe by "means of
caravans, rivet, uavigation, and coasting voyages round
th e .\Iediterranean. Th e great stream of caravan
traffi c which still crosses Asia to Russia is a branch of
this old-world trade, continued under scarc ely altered
conditions. But, towards the close of what we call
th e .\Iiddle Ages, a barrier was sudd enly thrown across
th e cha nnel of thi s traffic at Constantinople, when that
city was captured by the Turks in 1453.
3. S:Km th e Turkish Emp ire spread over Asia Minor,
Arabia , and Persia, and westward over all the northern
shores of Africa and th e south of Spain ; an empire
which threatened Christendom itself, for th e religion
of ~Iohamm ed, more powerful than the Turk, became
his great ally. The new creed was accepted from
Gibraltar to th e Hoogly, and the world bade fair to
be turned upside down.
4. Great citi es, fostered by the trade with th e East,
had sprung up around the shores of the Mediterranean.
Tyro and Sidon of old had lived on it ; At hens
and Rome had been strengthened by it ; Venice,
Florence, Genoa, Marseilles, Cadiz, and Lisbon arose
on the ruins of the Roma n Empire as the great

THE WORLD BEFORE COLm IBUS. 147
markets of the .world, i\ow this trade was barred
by th e Turk ; and civilized Europe, divided against
itself as it then was , was powerless to restor e its
course. The religi ous enthusiasm which showed itself
in so man y crusades, spent its elf in vain against the
new empire of th e East.
5. Th e traffic which had enriched the Latin rac es
was at an end. The Germanic rac es, hitherto regarded
as barbarians, were now to take th e lead in
Europe and in the world. Up to this tim e England
had counted for little am ong the nations. She had
no share in the carrying trade of the Mediterrnnean.
She was behind th e southern nations in civilization.
But now, since trad e could no longer be carried on
by land, and since men must look to the sea as th eir
highway, the opportunity of England and of the
northern ra ces was at hand.
6. For ages men had speculated as to the shape
of the earth ; but now that a water route to the
East was necessary, this problem became of some
practical interest. Many bold thinkers affirmed, from
what they already knew of the earth, that it must
be a sph ere, which could be every where navignted ;
and if so, it was pla in that the far East could be
reached by sailing westwards. It was in entire confidence
in this theory that Columbus sailed westward
to reach the cast coast of Asia ; and to his dying day
he believed that Asia was what he had actually reached.
7. Not only was the road unknown to Columbus,
bu t the means of travelling were ridiculously inadequa
te, according to our modern ideas. . Ignorant of
the vast ocean, he thought only of the shores beyond ,
and he preferred small vessels, in order to reach the

148 THE WORLD BEFORE COLUMBUS.
land more easily. His largest ship, th e Santa Maria ,
was only about the size of a modern coasting schooner ,
and carried no
more than fifty
men ; whil e the
tw o others, the
P inta and the
Nina, are described
as "small
open boats ," -that
is, only partly
decked .
8. The form of
sail then in use,
as it still is in
th e Mediterranean
and on the Nile,
was the lateen
sail, a large tri-
" SANTA ltfARIA." angular sail with
It very long yard. The square sail was less common,
though also used when running before the wind. Columbus
tells us in his
diary that on reaching
the Canary Islands,
they mad e the Pinta '
square-rigged instead of
lateen ; and this would
be of some ad vantage in
sailing before the tradewinds,
which wafted
th em across the Atlantic.
.. NINA."
'9. Before this time, ships of war had been moved

THE WORLD BEFORE COI.U~lBUS. 149
chiefly by oars; and a raised platform, or " ensUe,"
at either end was I
provided for th e soldiers.
Hence we still
call the forward part
of our ships th e " fore- I
castle.' This cumbrous "
arrangement is seen
in the ships of Columbus,
and it gives them
an appearance very
different from th ose of
our own time.
10. In spite of all
. hindrances, Columbus made his great venture; and
if he did not reach Asia, he at least showed
how Asia migh t be
reached. Th e ocean was
to be henceforth th e
great highway of commerce
; th e Atlantic was
to become the Mediterranean
or " "Iidland Sea"
of a large,!:. world, and
th e maritime nations of
Western Europe were
to ta ke th e place so
long held by those of
the sout h as th e carriers
of the world 's
trade. With thi s great
WOOERS SILE BOA T. revolution the "fiddle
Ages close. and modern history begins .

150 T HE WORLD BEF ORE COLC MBUS.
. THE SEA-WEED.
11. The flying sea-bird mocked the floating dulse :
" Poor, wandering water-weed, where dost thou go,
Astray, upon the ocean's restless pulse 1"
It said , " I do not know.
l 2. " At a cliff's foot I clung, and was content,
Swayed to and fro by warm and shallow waves ;
A long the coast the storm -wind raging went,
And tore me from my caves.
13." I am the bitter herbage of that plain
" ' here no flocks pasture, and no man shall have
Homestead, nor any tenure there may gain
But for a gra ve,
14." .A worthless weed, a drifting, broken weed,
" That can I do in all this boundless sea 1
No creature of the universe has need,
Or any thought, of me."
15. Hith er and thit her, as the winds might blow,
The sen-weed float ed. Then a refluent tide
Swept it along to meet a galleon's prow-
" Land, ho !" Columbus cried.
ex -per-i-ment
spec-u-la-tion
cir'-eum-stan-ces
nav-i-ga-tio n
bar-ri-er
en-thu-si-asm
cru-sades'
bar-ba-ri-ans
sphere
th";"'ry
ri-dic -u-lous-ly
in-ad-e-quate
schoon-er
la-teen '
tri-ail~·lar
cum-brous
mar-i-time
rev-o-lu-tion
herb-age
rer-Iu-ent
W ORn EXERCISE:-
1. ) Iakc sentences containing the words kin, akin, kindred, and
kind, in various meanings.
2. Give the meaning of the words creed, credible, credulous, credit,
and creditor, showing the connection between them.
3. Give a list of words with the prefix en- , used in vario us meanin gs,
as enrich.
F OT N OTES, see page eC4.

MONTEZUMA. 151
:M EXICO.
39. MONTEZUMA.-I.
1. High on th e table-land of Mexico there once
stood a beautiful city, whi ch was built partly on th e
shores of a lake and partly on islands in th e lake.
The houses were built of sto ne, and were of great size.
I n th e squares of th e city stood beautiful temples,
ornamented with silver and gold and j ewels, the principal
of which were th e temple of the sun and the
temple of th e god of war. All round th e lak e th e
country was well cultivated, and produced crops of
cotton, maize, wheat, sugar, and coffee. Great roads
led from the capital to the coasts of th e Gulf of
Mexico and-of the Pacific Ocean.
') The people who dwelt there were called Aztecs.

152 MONTEZU~lA,
Th ey were very different from th e other Indian tribes,
who dwelt on th e Atlantic coasts. They were highly
civilized, and had a written language of th eir own.
They were also powerful in war, and were acknowledged
as masters by all th e nations around. At the
beginning of the sixtee nth century, these wonderful
people were at th e height of th eir power. They were
ruled oyer by a king called Montezuma, whom th ey
loved and reverenced as a god. But in an evil hour
the story of th eir great rich es reach ed the ears of th e
cru el and greedy Spaniards, with whom th e lust for
gold was th e ruling passion .
3. In th e fourteenth year of Montezuma's reign,
th ere appear ed off th e coast of Mexico ships that
roused th e curiosity of the people. They were
Spanish ships, filled with adventurers seeking for
gold and precious stones in th e unknown countries of
th e New World. Canoes laden with meats and fruits
pushed off from th e shore. The Spaniards received
the natives kindly, and gave them some trifling presents.
They th en sailed away, promising to return th e
next year. Th e natives hastened to the capital to
tell the king about th e visitors. They dr ew pictures
of th e ships and th e men, and of all that th ey
had seen.
4. Th e next year the Spanish fleet app eared again,
and this tim e the great Spanish explorer Cortes was
on board. Montezuma was troubled when he heard
of their arrival, for there was a prophecy among the
Aztecs that a white god should one day come and
conquer the kingdom of Mexico. Th e council of the
kingdom decided that it would be best to receive the
Spaniards with all respect, and messengers were ac-

CORTES RECEIVING THE MESSENGERS.

154 MONTEZUM A .
cordingly sent to offer presents, and congratul ations
on th e safe arrival of the whi te god, from his servant
Montezuma.
5. Th e presents were so magnificent that the
Spaniards determined to see the splendours of the
capital. No doubt their minds were set on the
conquest of a country containing such stores of
wealth. Th e messengers were sent back with a few
holland shirts and some toys of little valu e, along
with a message to the k ing that th e Spaniards could
not sail away without accomplishing th eir real object
- that of visiting the great king ~Ion tezuma and his
famous capital.
6. I n a week the ambassadors returned with large
presents of gold, but with a firm message from the
kin g that he ref used to see the Spa niards, and that
he wished them to return to Spain at once. Th e
golden presents, however, had so excited th e greed of
th e Spaniards that th ey car ed not for such messages.
" This is a rich and powerful prince ind eed," cried
Cort es; " but it will go hard with us if we do not
one day visit him in his capita l."
7. On the 16th of August 151 9, Cortes started on
his march to Mexico, just to see " what sort of a king
th e great ~Io n tezuma was , of whom they had heard
so much "-this tyrannical king before whom e\'ery
subject trembled, and who declined to be looked on by
the Spaniards. From tim e to tim e me engel'S reached
him from ~I ontezuma urging him to return to his own
country ; but to all th ese Cortes replied courteously
but firmly, " It is my duty to th e King of Spain,"
and pa 'sed on.
. \':ith th e first faint streak of dawn. on th e 8th

MONT EZUMA. 155
of November, Montezuma's beautiful city of Mexico
was reached by Cortes and his Spanish army. With
beating hearts they gathered under their banners,
th eir trumpets soundi ng, their eyes straining over the
gorgeous sight that met the ir view. The sacred
flames on the altars, dimly seen through th e grey
mists of th e morning, showed the site of temples and
towers. The palace was soon revealed in t he glorious
morning sunshine, as it pour ed over th e wondrous
valley.
9. Mexico was one of the most beautiful cities of
t he world. Situated on a great salt lake, but sligh tly
divided from a large fresh-water lake, the city seemed
to sit upon th e waters with her diadems of gleaming
towers, her expanse of flowery meadows, her eircle of
mountains all reflected in the innumera ble mirrors
fra med by her courts, her palaces, her temp les. No
wonder th e Spaniards looked with envy OIl the fair
city ; no wonder they eoveted th e boundless wealth of
this newly-discovered kingdom.
maize ad-vent-iir-ers splen-dours gor-geous
ack-nowl-edged ex-plor-er am-bas-sa-dors di-a-dems
rev-er-enced proph-e-cy tyr-an~ni-cal in-nu-mer-a-ble
pas-sion ccn-grat-u-la-tions cour-te-ous-ly cov-et-ed
" ' ORD EXERCISE :-
J. )Iake sentences showing various uses of the words principal and
principle.
2. Sho w by examples th e similarity and th e difference in mean ing of
the words rise, raise, and rouse.
3. Give a list of words similar in meanin g to boundless, and show
th e force of th eir different parts.
For N OTES , Bee paye 265.

156 MONTEZUMA.
40. MONTEZUMA.-II.
1. On they went, these seven thousand Spaniards,
on to within half a league of the capital, wh ere, at
a solid wall of stone, twelve feet high, they were
stopped by some hundred Mexican chiefs, who announced
that the grel1t Montezuma had come out to
meet them. Amid a crowd of Indian nobles, preceded
by three officers of state bearing golden wands,
the Spaniards saw the royal litter blazing with
gold. It was borne on the 'shoulders of barefooted
nobles, who walked slowly, with eyes bent down
on the ground. Over it was a canopy of gaudy
feather-work, powdered with j ewels and fringed with
silver.
2. Suddenly it stopped; the great king alighted;
the gTound was spread with tapestry, that the imperial
feet should not be soiled ; and with th e canopy car ried
over his head, th e monarch advanced in all his regal
maj esty. His subjects lined the way, bending forward
with their eyes fixed on the ground as he passed.
He was dr essed in an ample cloak, sprinkled with
pearls and pr ecious stones. On his feet he wore
sandals with soles of gold, on his head plumes of th e
royal 'colour, green.
3. Cortes descend ed fr om his horse, and showed
profound respect to Montezuma. He threw round his
neck a collar made of false pearls and diamonds ; whil e
l\fontezuma returned this somewhat poor present by
pr esenting the Spani sh general with two collars of
shells adorned with golden pendants. Th en with
colours flying and music playing, the Spaniards followed
the great king into his capital. Cortes himself

MEETING OF CORTES AND MONTEZUMA"

1 58 ~ro}lTEZU~I A.
was to lodge in the royal palace. "This palace be.
longs to you and your brethren," said the k ing. " Rest
aft er your fatigu es, and in a lit tle while I will visit
you agam. . "
4. That evening the Spaniards celebrated their
arrival in Mexico by a great· discharge of guns. As
their thunder shook the buildings of the city and
echoed away among the hills, and as the smoke rolled
up in volumes, the hearts of the Indians were filled
with dismay. Th ey had those in their midst who
could spread desolation through their fai r city, who
could call down thunderbolts to consum e th em !
5. Th e following day Cortes paid a visit to l\Iont
ezuma, Passing through courts wh ere fountain s of
crysta l water played by nigh t and day, under ceilings
hung with feath er draperies glowing with
colour, over mats of palm-leaf, through clouds of incense
and intoxicati ng perfumes, the Spaniards were
at last ushered into the royal presence.
G. Cortes soon entered on th e subject which was
uppermost in his thoughts-the conversion to Christianity
of l\Iontezuma and his people. Eloquently he
spoke to the heathen king of the wrong he did in
worshipping idols and st range gods ; eloquently he
begged him to accept the new religion he was sent
from Spain to teach.
7. All his eloquence was in vain . It soon became
clear that neith er the conquest nor the conversion of
l\Iexico would be possible while l\Iontezuma was on
the throne. To seize t he king's person was the only
course open. A few weeks later, having gained a~ l
audience of th e ki ng, Cortes talk ed playfully for a
time, r eceiving present s fr om l\Iontczuma, and gaining

MONTEZ U~IA . 159
his favour. Suddenly changing his tone , he accused
th e ki ng of hav ing been the aut hor of a sk irmish between
the Indians and the Spaniards, in wh ich a great
many of th e latter were killed. He begged Montezuma
to come quickly into their palace to assure them of his
innocence.
8. As th e full meaning of Cortes's words dawned
on Montezuma, he became pale as death; th en his face
flushed, as he cried angrily, u When was it ever heard
th at a great prince lik e myself voluntarily left his
own palace to become a prison er in th e hands of
strangers ? And if I should consent to such a degradation,"
he cont inued firmly, "my subjects never
would." Two long hours were spent in argument.
" Why do we wast e tim e on thi s barbarian ?" cried
one impatient Spaniard. " Let us seize him, and, if
he resists, let us plunge our swords into his body."
Th e fierce tone of th e Spaniard alarmed Montezuma.
-He looked round for sympathy and support, but in
vain. Th en his courage sank, and he feebly COD ­
sented to go. His litter was called for, and so,
born e by his weeping nobles in deep silence, Montezuma
left his palace, never to return.
9. Th ough allowed a certain amount of pomp and
luxury, he was virtually a prisoner. Th e fact was
proclaimed to his subj ects by the appearance of some
sixty men patrolling outside the palace day and night.
Soon the king's hum iliation was completed by fetters
being fastened to his feet . He was speechless under
this new insult. He was as one struck down by
a heavy blow. He offered no resistance, he spoke
no word, but from ti me to time low moans expressed
his anguish. He was a king no longer.
~U ) 10

16 0 ~O NTEZ U~IA.
league
an-nounced'
pre..d~d~d
can-o-py
tap-es-try
im-pe-ri-al
pen-dants
des-o-la-tion
~ra~pe/~..ie_s .
in-tox-i-cat-ing
el-o-quent-ly
au-di-ence
. ,
In-no-cence
vol-un-ta-ri-ly
deg-ra-da-tion
sym-pa-thy
vi~tu-al-ly
pa-trol-ling
hu-mil-i-a-tion
ail~guish
WORD EXERCISE:-
1. Give a. list of words similar in meaning to monarch, and make
sentences illu st rating th eir use.
2. Analyze th e words uppermost and Christian ity, showing the force
of each part.
3. Rewrite sectiou 8, changing th e direct quotations into indirect.
For X OTE S, see pave £65.
41. MONTEZUMA.-III.
1. So firmly convinced was Montezuma that Cortes
was an ambassador from th e gods, whose will it was that
he shou ld und ergo this torment, that he consented to
each new demand of the Spaniards without opposition.
At last came the demand tha t th e king an d his lords
should swear allegiance to Spain, and consent to pay
tribute. Montez uma obediently assembled his lords
and nobles, and addressed them with great emotion.
He told them to show th eir last act of obedience by
acknowledging the great king beyond th e waters, and
by paying him th e tribute due to himself.
2. As he concluded, his voice broke and tears fell
down his cheeks. At the sight of his distr ess his
lords were deeply moved. His will had always been
th eir law, th ey said; it should be so still, they asserted
amid th eir sobs. Even among the triumphant
Spaniards there was not a dry eye that day. Th e
trib ute consisted of three great heaps of gold. " Take

~ONTEZ U ~L\. 161
it," sobbed Montezumn, "and let it be record ed in
your annals th at th e king sent this present to your
mas ter.'
3. l\'ot satisfied with th is, Cortes went a step
fur ther. Th e temple must be giv en up for Christian
worship. " Why, why will you urge matters to an
extremity ?" cried Montezumu, who through all his
troubles turned to his gods and his ora cles. " Why
will you bring down the vengeance of our gods, and
stir up rebellion among my people, who will never
consent to this profanation of th eir temple ?" But
this too had to be conceded.
4. Nevert heless, as tim e went on, it became evident
to Cortes that he had pushed things too far.
Signs of discontent began to show th emselves among
the Mexicans, and th e Spaniards grew uneasy. " Go; '
said Montezuma, " if you have any regard for J'curselves
; go without delay. You hav e enraged my
gods and trampled on my pri ests. °1 have but tc
raise my finger, and every Indian will rise against
you ." Th ese words were spoken in May,
5. It W IIS in the middle of June that tro uble
broke out. Six hundred I ndians were massacred by
th e Spaniards while th ey were engaged in a sacred
rite. Th en all th e pent-up hostility against th e
Spaniards broke forth in one great cry for revenge.
Cortes and his men were driven from th e streets and
besieged in th e palace where th ey lodged. The rage
of the people kn ew no bounds. Hundreds were
mowed down by th e Spanish guns, but still the mob
pressed on.
G. At last Moutezumu agreed to address th e crowd
of Indians, in th e hope of making peace. Surrounded

162 MONTEZ UMA.
by a guard of Spaniards and a few of his own nobles,
t he Indian monarch ascend ed the central turret of his
pala ce. Th e clang of instruments, t he fierce cries,
were hushed, and a deathlike silence reigned over
the whole crowd. Many prostrated themselves on
th e ground, others bent th e knee, and all eyes turned
towards the king whom th ey had been taught to reverence
with slavish awe, from wh ose face th ey had
been taugh t to turn away as too divine to look upon.
7. Once more Montezuma felt himself a king, as
with his old authority he spoke to them for the last
time. " Why do I see my people here in arms aga inst
the palace of my fathers? Is it that you thil{k your
kin g is a prisoner, and that you wish to release him?
If so, you have acted rightly. But you are mistaken.
I am no prisoner. Th e strange rs are my guests. I
remain with them only from choice, and can leav e
th em wh en I like. Return to your homes th en. Lay
down your arms. Sh ow your obedience to me who
have a righ t to it. The white men sha ll go back to
th eir land , and all shall be well again."
8. Then Montezuma was the friend of the hat ed
Spaniards after all ! A murmur of conte mpt ran
through the crowd. Did he not care for the insults
an d injuri es their great nation had received? It was
intolera ble. The blood of the ~I e xi cans was up ;
passion and 're\'cnge urged them on. " Coward !
t raitor! " Such words were flung at th e unhappy
monarch. They were followed by a cloud of stones
and arrows, and ~I on tczuma fcll senseless to the ground.
9. He was born e below by his fai thful nobles;
but he had nothing more to live for. He had tast ed
th e last drop in his cup of bitterness-his own people

MONTEZU~fA . 163
had turned aga inst him. In min did Cortes try to
soothe th e anguish of his spirit, in vain did his
attendants try to nurse him back to life ; he tore the
bandages from his wounds, he refused comfort. He
sat in gloomy silence brooding over his fallen fortunes,
and on June 30, 1520, he died.
10. Cortes th en attacked the natives, and was
almost defeat ed by overw helming numbers. The
Spaniard s had giv en up hope, when Cort es cut down
the Mexican standard-bearer and seized th e sacred
bann er. As soon as th ey saw this in th e hands of the
Spaniards, th e natives threw down th eir arms and fled
to th e moun tains. Thus the country of Mexico, with
its gr eat min es of gold and silver, became th e prop erty
of the King of Spain. The conquered Azt ecs were
compelled to work in th e mines as slaves, For three
hundred years th e country was rul ed by Spain; at
the end of that time it again became fr ee. The
Mexicans of to-day are partly I ndians and partly
Spanish in descent, but there ar e some who still
remember with pride that th ey are descendants of
the ancient Aztecs.
con-vinc ed'
op-po-s t-tion
al-le-giance
o-be-di-ent-ly
con-clud-ed
as -sert-ed
tri-um-phan t
ex -trem-i-ty
or-a-cles
ven -geance
prof-a-na-tion
con-ced-ed
mas-sa-cred
hos- til-i-ty
pros~trat-ed
con-te mpt'
iniu-ries
in-tol-er-a-ble
o-ver-whelm-ing
de-scend-an ts
WORD EXERCISE;-
1. ~fake sentences showing the usc of th e words convince, conviction
(two meanings), convict', and con /viet.
2. Give a list of words with the prefix mis-, as mistaken, and t heir
mean ings.
. 3. ),Iakc sentences showing the various meanings of the word sense.
For ]'IOTES, see paye f!65.

164 THE PLATE OF GOLD.
42. THE PLATE OF GOLD.
1. On e day t here fell in great Benares' te mpl e-cour t
A wondrous pla te of gold, whereon th ese word s were writ :
"To him who loveth best, a gift from H ea ven."
2. Th ereat
The pri ests mad e procl am ation: " A t th e mid-day hour,
Each day, let th ose assemble who for virtu e deem
Th eir right to heaven's gift the best ; and we will hear
Th e deeds of merc)" done, and so adjud ge."
3. The news
R an swift as light, and soon from e'"ery qu arter came
Nobles and peasants, herm its, scholars, holy n-en,
And all renown ed for grac ious or for splend id deeds.
Meanwhile th e pri ests in solemn council sat, and heard
" ' hat each had done to merit Lest the gift of H eaven.
So for a year the claimants came and wen t.
4. A t last,
After a patient weighing of the worth of all,
The priests bestowed the plate of gold on one who seemed
The largest lover of th e race-whose whole esta te
Within th e year had parted been among the poor.
This man, all trembling with his joy, advanced to take
Th e golden plate-when, 10, at his first finger-touch
It changed to basest lead I All stood aghast ; bu t when
Th e hapl ess claimant dro pped it clan gin g on th e floor,
H ea ven' s guerdon was aga in transformed to shining gold.
5. So for another twelvemonth sat the pr iests and judged ;
Thrice th ey awarded-thrice did H eaven refuse th e gift.
)Iean while a host of poor maim ed beggars in the st reet
Lay all about the temple gate, in hope to move

TH E PLATE OF GOLD. 165
DE ~A UES .
That love whereby each claim ant hoped to win th e gift.
And well for th em it was (if gold be cha rity),
For e\'ery pilgrim to the temple gate prai sed God
That love might thus approve itself before th e test.
And so the coins rai ned freely in the outs t retched hands;
But none of those who gave so much as turned to look
In to th e poor sad eyes of them that begged.
6 And now
The second year had almost passed, but still the plat e
Of geld, by whomsoever touched, was turned to lead.
At length there came a simple peasant-not aware
Of that strange contest for the gift of God-to pay

16 6 TH E PL ATE OF GOLD.
A vow within th e temple. A s he passed along
The lin e of shrivelled beggars, all his soul was moved
W ithin hi m to sweet pity, and th e tears welled up
And trembled in his eyes.
7. N ow by the temple gate
Th ere lay a poor sore creature, blind, and shunned by all;
But when t he peasant came, and saw the sight less face
And trembli ng, festered hands, he could not pass, but knelt,
And took both palms in his, and soft ly said: "0 thou
~Iy broth er, bear thy t rouble bravely ; God is good."
Th en he a rose and walk ed straightway across the court,
And entered where th ey wra ngled of their deeds of love
Before t he priests.
8.
Awhile he listened sadly, then
H ad turned away ; but something moved the priest who
held
The plate of gold to beckon to th e peasant. So
H e came, not und erstanding, and obeyed, aIHI st retched
H is hand, and took the sacred vessel. Lo ! it shone
'Vith t hrice its form er lustre, and amazed them all.
u Son, " cried the pri est, "rejoice I Th e gift of God is thine­
Th ou lovest best! " And all mad e answer, " It is well."
won!.drous
proc-la-ma-tion
ad-judge '
peas-ants
sc hol-ars
re-nown ed'
gra!.cious
claim-ants
guer-don
char-i-ty
shriv-elled
shunned
wrail~gled
lus-tre
a-mazed "
\ Y OR D EXERCISE :-
I. Give a list of words with the suffix -ever, as whomsoever, and
show its force in each ,
2. ) Iak. sentences showing the usc of the words council, counsel,
councillor, and counsellor.
So W rite in prose the substance of section 5.
For N OTES , see pa{/e £66.

THE LAND OF THE WHITE ELEPHANT. 16 7
43. THE LAND OF THE WHITE ELEPHANT.
1. Fifty years ago, we knew very little of the
kingdom of Siam, beyond th e fact th at th e people
worshipped whi te elephants. But English civilization
made its way through India to Burmah , and opened
th e closely-sealed ports of Siam and Cochin China.
Th e lat e King of Siam chose an Englishman for
one of his counsellors. The new king has not only
opened his kingdom for English education, but is
encouraging th e schools by royal gifts and favour.
2. Siam has not th e tropical heat of India. The
climate is delicious. Th e Bay of Bengal on the one
side, and the Gulf of Siam on th e other, keep this
kingdom refreshed. with sea- breezes. Bangkok, the
capital, built out into the river Menam , is called the
"Venice of th e East." Indeed, it is even more of a
water city than th e "Queen of th e Adriatic; " for
whil e Venice has its foundations on solid ground,
Bangkok actually floats on the water. Huge bamboo
rafts ar e constructed, and on th ese houses, shops, and
even gardens ar e built.
3. We chanced to arrive at Bangkok on a feastday.
It was evening when we came round a bend in
the river and caught sight of th e floating city. A
marvellous pan orama, an illuminated world , seemed
spread out before us. Thousand s of fire-globes shed
th eir brilliant light over th e broad bosom of th e wat er;
and on either side, as far as th e eye could reach, there
was an endless suecession of ligh ts of every imaginable
eolour and shape, forming an illumination such
as only Eastern ingenuity can devise.
4. Every house was decorated with lanterns ; the

1 uS THE LAND OF THE WHITE ELE PHANT.
yards and masts of every ship-s-even the tiniest
boat-spa rkled with brilliant coloured fire ; wh ile the
more distant pagodas and palaces were a blaze of
glory. It was the great annual Iestival of iam , the
F er st of Lanterns ; and had we arrived one day later
we should 1I1\'e missed this fairy-land spectacle.
5. Th e temples, of whi ch th ere are one hundred,
are built on the river-bank H ere also stand th e king's
palaces, the houses of the foreign consuls, and th e
residences of the nobility. During last century the
capital of Siam stood on the river -bank some distance
above the position of the present capital: but the
annuliI ove rflow of the river caused such a deposit
of mud that the place became \'eIT unheal th y , and
a new town was buil t further down th e river,
6. The floating houses have no communication
with each other by land ; all travelling is done
by boat. Almost every conceivable commodity is
borne in these little boats- rice, fish, fruit, and flowers
- and cvcry sort of handicraft is carr ied on in
them. Here you may sec a Chinaman man ufacturing
rich soup over a hissing kettle, and delivering it
to his custom ers ; another peI'son is baking bread ;
an oth er, under a gaily-striped awning, is weaving
gold thread into embroidery, while a mite of a child
manages th e little boat. The scene in the water
st reets arc always new and interesting.
7. The religi on of Siam is a form of Buddhism.
The reveren ce with which the iam ese rcgard the
white elephant is not difficult to understan d, wh en
we remember that the white elephants are supposed
to be the abodes of the souls of their dead kings.
One of the most splend id te mples near the city is

IN A BUDDH IST TEMPL E.

1iO TH E LAND OF THE WHI TE ELEPHANT.
set apart for the royal white elepha nt, It stands
in a garden of palms, and at the time of my visit
to it, a dozen pri ests, dr essed in yellow robes, were
in attendan ce on the great white animal. He stood
lazily waving his trunk, and helping himself to leaves
and branches from th e heaps placed before him .
8. His room was lofty; the floor was covered with
a mat of pure, chased gold, each interwoven plait being
about half an inch broad, On this costly carpet th e
unwieldy animal stood and sta mped his great feet,
with no more care for its magnificence than if it
had been his native turf, Several pri ests were constantly
engaged in cleaning th e floor and in piling
up fresh herbage for his maj esty to feast on. Goldsmiths
were taking th e worn strips out of th e golden
carpet, and replacing them wit h new, shining ones.
9. The man who was so fortunate as to entrap
this sacred an imal was rewa rded with a hereditary
pension, an d was raised to a very high office in the
kingdom- that of water-carrier to the elephant, Th e
jars in which the water is carried, and the trough
from which the sacred animal drinks, are of pure gold.
coun-sel-lors
en-co ur-a g-ing
pan-o-ram-a
il-lu-mi-nat-ed
i.m ll~gin-a·ble
in-g e-nu-i-ty
no-bil -i-ty
com-mu-ni-ca-tion
con-ceiv-a-ble
com-mod-i-ty
hand-i-craft
at-tend-ance
un-wield-y
mag-nir-i-cence
her-ed-i-ta-ry
trough
\YO&D EXE RCISE:-
I. Give a list of words formed from th e stem of constructed, with
various prefixes, and tl, ~ir meanin gs.
2. ) Iake sentences showing the use of the nouns succession and su c­
ces s, and of the verb succeed, in the meaning correspondi ng
to eac h of th ese n OU DS.
3. Explain the meaning of the words annual, annal, annuity , anniversary,
and per annum, showing thei r connection.
For X OTF..s, see pa ge £65.

CROSSING THE BAR. 171
44. CROSSING THE BAR.-I.
1. [The felucca Midge was employed, along with
H.M. frigate Gazelle, in suppressing th e slave-trade
on th e west coast of Africa. Her commander, ha\'ing
received information that a slayer was l.ring at some
distance up a large river, had taken his ship up the
stream to try to capture her. In an attack on a
sla ying settlement. near th e mouth of th e river, the
crew of th e llIulge were driven back , but succeeded
in regaining th eir ship, which was anchored in midstream.
The frigate being unable to cross th e bar at
th e mouth of th e river, was hovering in th e offing.]
2. "There is the Gazelle, sir," said Clinker, the
master-at-nrms ; " you see her top-gallant sails oyer
the grcen bushes there, sir."
The long j ib-boom of the frigate appeared past
th e mangroves at the river's mouth , and gradually
the beau tiful craft came into full view, rising and
fallin g on the long swell. She moved silently along,
th e bright green wave curling from her bows, as
the cut-water slid gently through th e heaving water.
As we looked, a string of small round bundles, each
apparently about th e size of a man 's head , slid up to
th e m in royal mast-head. Th e instant th e upp ermost
reached the truck, a gun was fired, and at
th e same moment th e round balls blew out steadily
in so many flags.
3. " What signal now, Mr. :Marline ?"
" Th e signal to weigh and sta nd out, sir."
" Why, we can'~it is impo ible ; the swell on
the bar puts it out of our power."
" Very true," said old Pumpbolt : " I, for one, won't

172 CROSSING TH E BAR.
under take to carry you over until there is less broke n
water at the ri ver's mouth ."
Th e lieutenant comm anding the felucca telegraphed
to this effect. Th e frigate acknowledged it, and an ­
swered that she would remain in the offing all night,
in expectation of our getting oyer at high water,
wh en possibly there would be less sea on th e bar.
4. While we were talking an d laughing on deck,
Mr. Marline cam e aft to us. " There are a good many
dark specks passing and repassing abo ve us in the
upper reach of the ri ver-yonder, sir, as fa r as
you can see. Will you please to look at them, Mr.
Sprawl ?"
Sprawl took a long look , and then handed the
glass to me. I could perceive a number of small
black spots slowly descending the river,
Sp rawl had also noticed this. " Why, Brail, those
gentry seem mustering in some strength. There cannot
be fewer than a hundred canoes paddling about
there. What say you ? "
5. H owever, we went to dinner ; and we were in
th e very middle of it, when down came Wadding, the
gunner. " Beg pardon, sir," said the old seaman, " but
these chap s are comin g nearer than seems quite
conveni ent."
" I ndeed!" said old Sp rawl.- " We must keep a
bright look-out here, Brail."
' Ve went on deck , and found that the report
was literally true ; but although the whole sur face
of the ri ver in the distanc e seemed swarming, still
th ere was no warlike demonstra tion made, beyond
th e occasiona l descent of a fast-pulling canoe now
and then, 11 mile or so below the main body. But

caossrso THI; BAR, 173
they were always very easily satisfied in their reconnoitring,
so far as we could judge, for th e whole of
th em kept a wary distance.
6. It was now half-past foul', and low water 3.'1
neal' as could be. The bar astern of us-by this time,
th e breeze having taken oft; we were riding to the
ebb - was one roaring ledge of white breakers;
but it wn smooth water wh ere we lay, th e fall
of th e tid e having compl etely brok en th e heav e of
th e hea\'Y swell that roll ed in fr om th e offing on
th e bar, The clouds had risen over th e land, some
large drops of rain fell, and altogether we had
strong prognostications of a wet if not a tempestu
ous evening.
i . oon after sunset a thick haze began to ma ntle
over th e water, and continued to increase until you
could scarcely see the length of the felucca.
We had been some time at qu arters, the boats
astern having been hauled up alongside, lest in the
fog some of the can oes might venture neal' enough
to cut the painters, But everything continued so
quiet and still, th at we were beginning to consider
that our warlike pr epara tions mig ht not have been
call ed f01'.
" These poor creatures will not venture down on
us, after th e lesson they had yesterday," I said to
Sprawl.
" Don't you trust to that," said one of th e negro
sail ors. ' I know something-ah, you shall see ! "
. " .Men!" shouted Lanyard, after we had been
waiting in silence for some tim e, " keep a bright look ­
out; th ere are native canoes cruising all about us,
and close, too, in the thick mist .th ere. Peer abo ut,

174 CROSSING THE BAR.
will you ? Clear away both guns. Hush ! what is
that ?"
" Nothing," said Sprawl; " I hear nothing but the
rushing of the river, and th e rubbing of th e boats
alongside against the gunwale."
" But I do," said Mr. Marline. " There is th e splash
of paddles as plain as can be-there-"
" Wh ere ?" said De Wald en.
" There," said Binnacle- " th ere; " and at th e very
instant I saw th e dark prow of one canoe emerge
from the fog, th e after-part being hid und er th e thick
but moon-illumined haze.
9. Presently another app eared close to her; but
less distinctly, both assuming a wavering and Impalpable
appearance, lik e two large fish seen, the one
nearer and th e other farther off, in muddy water.
" :Mr. Marline, fire at that fellow near est us."
The moment the musket was discharged, th e canoe
back ed into the fog again; but we could plainly hear
the splash of a number of padd les rapidly plied, as if
in great ala rm. But even these sounds soon ceased,
and once more all was still.
fe-luc-ca
sup-pres s-ing
aft~hored
man-g rov es
lieu-ten-ant
tel-e-gra phed
ex-p ec-ta-tio n
lit-er-al-ly
de-scent'
rec-on-noi-tring
prog-nos-ti-ca-tions
tem-pes-tu-ous
cru is-ing
gun-w ale
as -sum-ing'
im-pal-pa-ble
'VORD EXERCISE ;-
I. Mak e sente nces to show the various uses of th e word bar.
2. Give a list of words form ed from th e stem of undertake. with
various pr efixes, and th eir meanings.
3. Rewrite sectio n 8, turning the direct quotation into indirect.
For NOTES, see page £66.

CROSSIN G THE BAR. 175
45. CROSSING THE BAR.-II.
1. For half an hour after this th e silence continued
unbroken, so we went below for supper, intending to
make a start for the mouth of the riv er wh enever th e
swell on th e bar was qui eter. Soon Binn acle trundled
down th e ladd er in red-hot ha ste. "The canoes are
abroad again, sir ; we hear them close, and th e fog
is thicker than ever." So we all hurried on deck.
2. I t was clear that our adversaries were clustering
round us in force, although we could see nothing
through th e fog at a distance of ten paces.
"I say , master," said Sprawl, " the bar should be
alm ost passable now for a ligh t craft like th is?"
" Certainly," said Pumpbolt--" I do not doubt
that it is ; and if this mist would only clear away,
I would undertake to take the Midge across it us
sound as a bell."
3. " What is th at?" It was a ra ttle, as if a loose
purchase or fall had suddenly been sha ken, so as t o
make th e blocks clatter, and th en haul ed taut.
Suddenly the mist thinn ed. " Look there !" I
shouted. " It is a large schooner, one of those slaving
villains, stealing past us under cover of the mist.
Th ere-there he is on our qua rter !"
" Clear away both guns," sang out the lieutenant.
Th e strange sail continued to glide noiselessly down
t,he ri ver.
4. " What vessel is that ?" N o answer. " Speak,
or I will fire into you." All silent.
Both cannons were discharged, and, as if by magic,
the veil th at had hid everything from our view rose
fr om the river, disclosing suddenly the dark stream

176 CROSSING THE BAR. '
ON THE R EEF.
above and on each side of us covered with canoes;
whil e the large schooner that we had fired into,
instead of trying to escape oyer th e bar, now shortened
sail, and bore up across our bows, firing two
guns and a volley of small-anus in passing.

CROSSIXG THE BAR. 177
5. " We are beset, Lanyard ; that chap is the commander-in
-chief. His object is not to escape, but to
capture us, take my word for it ," cried Sprawl.
" Forward, master, and look out for th e channel.­
Lanyard, let Brail take th e helm; I will mind the
sail."
" Sta nd by to cut the cable; hoist away th e sail
th ere. All ready forward ?,.
" All ready, sir."
. "Cut away, th en."
Th e clear axe glanced in th e moonlight, and fell
twice in heavy, gashing thumps, and th e third time
in a sharp, trenchant chip. The next moment the
little ve el slowly floated away with th e current.
" Hoist away there-hoist--haul aft th e sheet."
6. At that moment th e breeze fr eshened. We
were about a mile from th e bar, on wh ich the swell .
was breaking in thunder; but we had ru n clear of
th e mist, an d the placid moon was shining bright
overhead. Yells rose from the canoes, and a volley
of spears was discharged at us, severa l of whi ch fell
on board, but without doing any injury. Th e strange
sail was right in our path.
" What shall we do ?" sang out old Pumpbolt from
forward.
Trusting to th e great strength of th e ill idge,
Lanyard shouted, " Plump us right aboard of him,
if you can't do better ; but creep und er his stern, if
you cun." · •
But th e slaver would not give us th e opportunity
of doing either, for as he saw us booming along,
aim ing at him right amid-ships, he bore up, and stood
right for th e bar.
(914) 11

.........
178 CROSSING THE BAR.
7. At this tim e we had a distinct view, not only
of our formidable antagonist, a large topsail schooner,
apparently full of men, but also of th e bar which
we were about to pass, in such uncomfortable fellowship.
The canal of deep water at which we aimed
was about fifty yards wide.
" Do you see your marks now, JUl'. Brail ? " cried
th e master.
" Yes : we are running straight as an arrow for the
channel."
On th e right hand and on th e left th e swell was by
this time breaking in thunder, flashing up in snowflakes
and sending up a misty drizzle into th e cold
moonlight sky; but the channel right ah ead was still
comparatively qui et.
8. Th e schooner made an attempt to luff across
our bows.
" Aim at him again," sang out old Dade Doublepipe-"
aim at him again, Lanyard ; to heave to here
is impossible."
But once more, as we approached him, he kept
away.
\Ve were now actually on the bar. The noise was
astounding, deafening. Th e sea foamed and raged,
and flew up in mist, and boiled in over our decks
on either hand, as if we had been born e away in
some phantom ship , that floated on white foam instead
of water. \Ve ran on, the strange sail on our
lee-beam.
9. "Now is your chance !" shouted old Pumpbolt;
" j am him down against the long reef there. Up with
your helm, Mr. Brail."
" Ease off the sheet," chimed in the first lieut enant.

CROSSIXG THE BAR. 179
In an instant our broadsides were rasping.
" St arboard ; shove him down , :\Ir. Brail ! " again
shrieked the master ; " keep her awaJ', an d ram him
on the reef there- time enough to luff when he
strikes,"
I wa fully alive to all this. Th e whole scene was
now brightly lit up by th e glorious moon, and we
could perfectly see what we were about. We sheered
close aboard of the schooner.
" Jam her on the reef : " again yelled the master.
1O. I did so. Crash: th e schooner st ruck. Her
masts bent like willow wands, th e cordage and blocks
rattling, and th en the foretop-mast went oyer the
oow s, The next sea broke over her in smoke, and
hove her, broadside on, 'upon th e reef ; an oth er shock,
lind th e mainm ast was oyer th e side. The sea was
maki ng a fair breach oyer her ; and while the cries
of the unfortunates aboa rd of her rent the air, we
all at once slid out of the turmoil of dashing waves,
and rose buoyantly on the long smooth swell that was
rolling in from th e offing. lI11CilAEL ScOTT.
Abridged from II The Cr uise of the .;.ll idgc."
trun-dled
ad -ver-sa-ries
vil~lains
mA~gic
dis-clos-ing'
ca- ble
tr en-chant
plJi~d
an-tag-o-nist
un-com -fort-a-ble
driz-zle
a-stound-ing
deaf'-en-ing
phan-tom
tur-m oil
bu oy~ant-ly
' Y ORD EXERCISE:-
I. Explain the meaning of th e words adverse, adversary, and adversity,
showing their connection.
2. lI1ak e sentences to show th e use of the words capture, captor,
captive, captivity, and captivate.
3. Give a list of words of similar meani ng to antagonist.
For NOTES, see pag e _66.

180 MOY CASTLE.
46. MOY OASTLE.
A.,,< EPISODE OF THE 'FOR1T'FIVE.
1. There ar e seven men in )Ioy Castle
Are merry men thi s night ;
Th ere ar e seven men in Moy Castle
Whose hearts are gay and light.
2. Prince Charlie came to )loy Castle,
And asked for shelter there,
And down came Lady l\I'I ntosh,
As proud as she was fair.
3."I'm a hunted man, Lady l\I'Intosh­
A price is on my head i
If Lord Loudon kn ew thou'dst sheltered me,
Both thou and I were sped."
4."Come in! come in, my princ e! " she said,
And opened wide the gate j
" To die wit h P rince Charlie St uart,
I ask no better fate."
5. She's called her seven trusty men,
The blacksmith at th eir head :
" Ye shall keep wat ch in th e castl e wood,
To save your prince from dread."
6. Th e lady has led the prince away,
To make him royal cheer;
The seven men of l\l'Intosh
Have sought the forest drear,
'7 And th ere th ey looked and listened,
Listened and looked amain ;

:MOY CASTLE.
181
And they heard th e fallin g of the leaves,
And the soft sound of the rain.
8. Th e blacksmith knelt beside an oak,
A nd laid his ear to the ground,
And under the noises of th e wood
H e heard a distant sound.
9. He heard a sound of many feet
Warily treading th e heather­
H e heard a sound of many men
Marching softly together.
10."There's no time now to warn th e prince.
The castle guards ar e few ;
'Tis wit will win the play to-night,
And what we here can do."
11. He 's gi'en the word to his six brethren,
And thro ugh the wood they' re gone ;
'The seven men of 1\1 'Intosh
Each stood by himself alone.
12." And he who has the pipes at his back,
His best now let him play ;
And he who has no pipes at his back,
His best word let him say."
13. It was five hundred Englishmen
Were treadin g th e purple heath er,
Fiv e hundred of Lord Loudon 's men
:Marching softly togeth er.
14." There's none to-night in nloy Castle
But servants poor and old;

182 MOY CASTLE .
If we bring th e prince to Loudon's lord,
H e'll fill our hands with gold."
15. Th ey came lightly on th eir way,
H ad never a thought of ill,
When suddenly from th e darksome wood
Broke out a whistl e shrill.
16. An d st raight the wood was filled wit h cries,
\Yith shouts of angry men,
And the angry skirl 0 ' the bag-pipes
Came answering th e shouts again.
1T, Th e En glishmen looked and listened,
Listened and looked amain ,
And nought could they see through the mirk night,
But the pipes shrieked out ngnin,
18." Hark to the slogan of Loehiel,
To Keppoch's gathering C1"y !
H ar k to th e rising swell that tells
Clanranald's men ar e nigh !
19."Now woe to the men that told us
Lochiel was far away!
The whole of th e Highland army
I s waiting to bar our way.
20." It's little we'll see of Charlie Stuart,
And little of Loudon's gold,
A nd but we're away from th is armed "'00

MOY CASTLE. 183
22. And woe t o him who was lam e or slow,
F or th ey trampled him on th e heather !
A nd back to the pla ce from whence they came
They're hirpling all togeth er.
23. Lord Loudon's men, t hey are gone full far
Over th e bro w of the hill ;
Th e seven men of M'lntosh,
Th eir pipes and cry ing are still.
24. Th ey lean ed them to a tree and laughed.
"I'would do ye good to hear,
And th ey are away to )loy Castle
To tell th eir lady dear.
25. And who but La dy )l'lntosh
Would praise her men so bold 1
A nd who but Prince Cha rlie Stuart
W ould count th e good F renc h gold 1
26. There ar e seven men in May Castle
Are joyful men this night ;
There are seven men in 1\1oy Cast le
Whose hear ts will aye be light.
a-main'
knelt
heath-er
breth-ren
pur-ple
shrill
skirl
sl~gan
tram-pled
hir-pling
'Ya R D EXERCISE :-
I. Re write the seute nces in th is ballad which are grammaticehy in ­
complete.
2. Show th e pecu lia rities in grammatical structure of verses 20 and
2.1.
3. " ' ri te in pros e th e story of the ba llad, avoiding direc t quctations,
For XOTES . 8et rall e ~6 6 .

184 A RI VER IN THE OCEAN.
COURSE or TH E GULF STREAJ){.
47. A RIVER IN THE OCEAN.
1. What is the Gulf Stream ? Wh ence does it
come? 'Where does its current cease to flow? To
what cause or causes is it due ? Th ese questions have
often been asked from the time wh en Columbus made
his great voyage of discovery, four hundred years
ago, down to the present day ; and even now th ere
are some of them which have not been satisfactorily
answ ered.
2. It has been well described as " a river in the
ocean." It flows along the coast of North America

A RIVER IN THE OCEAN. 185
fro m the south
of Florida to
Cape Hatteras,
and thence
crosses the Atlantic
toward
the shores of
Europ e. It
has its source <
in the Gulf of -
Mexico, which
is fed fr om
th e Caribbean
BENEATH THE BunFACE.
Sea. This in
turn receives its waters from the Atlantic Ocean,
into whi ch the Gulf Stream itself again pours
its own supply. Thus there is, in reality, a grand
circular movement of the whole of th e North Atlantic,
and of this movement the Gulf Stream is
a portion.
3. This river is very warm , because it has been
heated by th e sun during its course through the Gulf
of }lexico and th e Caribbean Sea. It has its own
finny inhabitants and other animal life: curious crabs
that make nests in the floating sea-weed; beautiful

186 A RIVER IN THE OCEAN.
little j elly-fish, floating or swimming near its sur face
in such countless numbers th at at times th e waters
are brown with th em ; graceful flying-fish, which dart
out of the water in shoals; and coun tless myriads
of minu te animals floating about, so tha t th e water
seems to be filled with motes.
4. In point of size, this ocean riv er far excels
th e ri vers of the land. Th e Mississippi near its mouth
is ab out t wo thousand feet wide and one hu ndred feet
J eep. Th e Gulf Strea m, at its narrowest point in th e
Strai t of Florida, is more than two th ousand feet deep,
and over forty miles wide. In point of speed, few
nav igable ri vers equal the Gulf Stream at this part
of its course, as it hurries along at a ra te of four,
five, and sometimes over six miles an hour. Th e
water is of a beau tiful deep blue; and on th e edge
nearest the coast, its line of meeting with th e shore
water is frequently so sharply defined that at one
end of th e vessel you may see th e clear warm water
from th e south, whil e at th e oth er end is th e cold
dark wat er from th e north.
5. When Columbus crossed th e ocean to America
for the first tim e in 1492, he discovered the existence
of the current whi ch enters th e Caribbean Sea, and
helps to form our Gulf Str eam. All th e old Spanish
navigators noticed thi s current, and wondered what
could be its cause, Th e Gulf Stream itself was not
discovered until the famous Ponce de Leon went to
search for the" foun tain of youth." He had been told
of a wonderful well or spring on the island of Bimini ;
and the Spaniards, who were always on the look-out
for remarkable or valuable objects, fitted out an
expedition of discovery.

A RIVER IN THE OCEAN. 187
AT THE SOURCE OF THE GUU' STIlE.U f.
6. Th ey did not know where Bimini was, except
that it lay somewhere nort h-west of Porto Rico ; but
they set out, hoping to find the means of cheating
time, and making the old young again. They sailed
along th e eastern side of th e Bahama Islands, and
finally reached the coast of Florida. Then they
turned south, and sailed again st th e current for several
hundred miles, all th e time wondering whence
the water came and whither it went. It was th ought
by many persons th at all the water of the sea was
moving ; that it reached a hole in th e earth and went
down, and at some other point, a great distance away.
returned again to the surface.
7. Now what is th e origin of the Gulf Stream?
The trade-winds, always blowing toward the west,
blow th e surface water in th e same dir ection, and i t

188 A RIVER IN THE OCEAN.
is to this cause that the movement of the Gulf Stream
is due. Th e wat er is driven by the wind into th e
Caribbean Sea, fr om t he western end of which th e
accumulated water runs into the Gulf of Mexico ; and
from th ere it escapes through th e Strait of Florida
into the Atl antic Ocean.
8. Th e effect ef thi s current of warm water on th e
shores of Western Europe may be easily seen by comparing
the ~te of places whi ch are in the same
latitude on opposite sides of th e Atlantic. Thus th e
to~of Bergen and the Shetland Islands are no farther
south than Cape Farewell in Greenland and th e north
of L~r , where the climate is of an arctic character.
Th e Gulf of St. Lawrence, which is closed to navigation
during the~~y ice, is as far south asthe
English Channel and the north of France. A line
joining places whose average tempera ure for January
is 32 °, or th e freezing-point of wat er, inst ead of runnin
g east and west as it might be expected to do, runs
from New York, past the south of Newfoundland to the
south of Iceland, and thence to the north of the Lofoden
Isl es in Norway , which lie inside the Arctic Circle.
sat-Is-fac-to-ri-ly
r ~-;'l~i.ty
... cir-cu-lar
myi-i-ads
nav-i-ga-ble
ex-ist-ence
• val-u-a-ble
oi-i-g in
ac-cum-u-lat-ed
com-pili-ing
lat -i-tude
av'-er-age
'VORD E XER CISE:-
1. Explain th e meanin gs of expediti on (in two senses), expeditious,
and expedien t, and show th eir connection.
2. Give a list of words formed from the ste m of direction, with
various prefixes, and their meanings.
3. :\Iak e sentences showing th e use of th e word cnrrent as noun and
as adjective, and of th e noun formed from it in th e latter sense.
For NOTES, see pafl e 266.

TH E " KURO Sl WO: 189
48. THE .. KURO SIWO:
1. Those who study geography can hardly fail to
notice the remarkable difference between the climate
of the eastern or Atlantic coast of British Korth
America and that of the western or Pacific coast in
the same latitude. Tak e, for exam ple, the shores
of Newfoundland, Labrador, and Greenland , as compared
with those of Vancouver Island, Queen Charlotte
Islands, and Alaska. On the Atlantic coast are
found icebergs, ice-fields, fr ozen bays, stunted shrubs,
and only th e most hardy ki.nds of plants and grasses ;
while on the Pacific coast are noble forests, lux uriant
grasses, and a generally equable climate th rough ­
out the yea r.
2. Sitka in Alaska is but three degrees farther
south than Cape Farewell in Greenland, yet near Sit ka
there are grand old woods, where firs grow to a great
size. The cedars of the Queen Charlotte Islands also
attain an enormous size, and from their trunks the
Indians excavate immense canoes, ofte n sixty feet in
length by six or eight in breadth, whi ch are capable
of carrying forty or fifty warriors.
3. \Ve are so much accustomed to regard climate
as depending merely on distance from the equator
that th ese facts strike us as strange, and require to
be explained. Why does th e west coast have so
much the milder and better climate ? One answer,
though not a complete one, as we shall see lat er,
may be given in two words, K uro Siuio. These
two words are from th e J apanese language, and
signify" Black Stream." The Kuro Siwo, so called
from the dar k tint of its wat ers, is a branch of

190 THE "KURO srwo .
COURSE 010' THE xnno SI\ VO.
th e great ocean current which flows north from
the equatorial seas, and renders the climate of th e
J apan island s so equable, and th e land so fruitful.
A part of t his warm st rea m crosses the Pacific fr om
the coasts of Asia, and, caught in the great bight
of the Alaska peninsula and th e Aleutian Islands,
flows in and out among all those hundreds of islands,
from Vancouver to Sitka, and gi ves to this wh ole
coast its moist, mild winter, just as th e Gulf Strea m
does to the west of Europe.
4. But the Kwro Siwo has not only brought
warmth and moisture to the north -west coast ; it is
now believed that the current must also have carried
::.1;.a first human inhabitants to America. Many
years ago, th e attention of the people of Sitka
was attracted one morning to a strange - looking
craft, which had come ashore during the night OD

THE " KURO SIWO. " I!H
one of the little rocky
wooded islands that lie
round the har bour. The
stranger was found to
be the dismasted, waterlogged
hull of a J apa- DRI>'TII:D RY THE KURO SIWO.
nese junk. Strange to say , there were ten or twelve
J apanese on board , still alive, though nearly dead from
exposure and famine.
5. The junk had been dismusted in a tempest,
while on a voyage from one J apanese port to anoth er,
and had drifted steadily north-eastward in the Kw ro
Siuio, which sets constantly and strongly from the
coasts of China and J apan across the Pacific toward
America. There are also tradit ions that, on two
former occasions, J apanese or Chinese junks have
drifted to the coast of America further southward.
How many times such accidents ma.)' have occurred
ill the past no one knows.
6. Many people believe that th e I ndian tribes of

192 TH E "KURO SIWO."
North America are of t he same ra ce !1S the early inhabitan
ts of Siberia and J apan. Did the Kuro Siwo
br ing them ? The theory t ha t it did, suggested by tho
J apanese j unk born e to Sitka by the K uro Siwo, is
at least pr obable. But the fact of the mild climate
being caused by t his current is clearly proved.
7. In contrasting the climate of Sitka with that of
Newfoundland, there is, however, one other current to
be taken into account. This is a cold cur rent whi ch
flows through Davis Strait and washes t he coasts of
Labrador and Ncwfoundland. Th is polar current is
often freighted with ice-floes and icebergs fr om the
Greenland coasts , and hu ge bergs may be seen carried
by it right against the warm surface cur rent.
8. Thus the difference of climate on the east and
on the west coast of North America is caused by the
action of two opposite forces-the genial warmth
of the K u ro S iwo on the one side, an d the cold and
fogs br ough t by the polar cur rent on the other. Th e
combined influence of the t wo currents is so great,
that latitude is of little account in dcter mining the
temp erature of places on eit her coast.
ge-og-ra-phy
lux-u-ri-ant
e-qua-ble
ce-dars
ex-ca-vate
si~ni-fy
e-qua-to-ri-al
moist-ure
ex-pos-ure
fam-ine
sug-gest-ed
in~f1u-ence
'" OR D EXERCISE ;-
1. E xplain th e various mean ings of the word degree, and show th eir
connect ion.
2. Give a list of word s of similar meanin g to fruitful.
3. Make sentences showing th e use of th e words origin, original,
originate, and originality.
For NOTES , see pag e 266.

ALEXANDER THE GREAT. 19P
49. STORIES OF ALEXANDER THE GREAT.-I.
1. There is no more romantic figur e in history
than Alexand er, the son of Ph ilip, King of Mncedonia.
Hc was 10m in the yea r 35G B.C., and succeeded his
fathcr on the throne when barely t wenty years of
age. Having first secured his position as kin g over
thc Grecian states, he led an army across the H ellespont,
to cont inue th e war with Persia. Asia Minor,
Palestin e, and Egypt were in tum subdued ; and
then the Persian power was destroy ed at the battle
of Arbela, which left Alexander mast er of th e empire.
An expedition still farther to th e east carried the
conquerol' across the Indus ; and he was only prevent
ed from reaching the Ganges by the murmurs
of his followers. On his return to Babylon, he died
at the early age of th irty-t wo years. Plutarch, th e
Greek historian , has preserved for us a large number
of inte resting anecdotes, which throw ligh t on the
character of this great conqueror.
2. Ambassad ors from Persia happened to arrive in
(g14) 12

19'1< ALEXANDER THE GREAT.
DOMINIQXS 0.' ALEXANDER THE GREAT.
th e absence of his father Philip, an d Alexand er, who
was a mere boy, received them in his stead. He
impressed them greatly by his politeness and solid
sense. He asked them no childish or trifling question,
but inquired t he distances of places, and th e
roads through the pro vinces of Asia ; he desired to
be informed of the charac ter of their king, in what
manner he behaved to his enemies, and in what th e
st rength and power of Persia consisted. The ambassadors
were struck with adm iration, and looked upon
th e celebrated shrewdness of Ph ilip as nothing in comparison
with the lofty and enterprising geniu s of his son.
3. Wh enever news was brought that Philip had
taken some strong town or won some grea t battle,
the young man , instead of appearing deligh ted with
it, used to say to his compani ons, "My father will

ALEXA.. ' W ER THE GREAT. 195
go on conquering till there will be nothing great left
for you an d rue to do." As neither pleasure nor
riches, but valour and glory, were his great obje cts,
he thought th at, in proportion as th e dominions he
was to receive from his father grew greater, th ere
would be l ess room for him to distinguish himself.
4. Th e horse named Bucephalus was offered for
sale, and King philip, with th e prince and many
others, went into a field to see some trial made of him.
The horse appeared ext remely vicious and unmanageable,
and would not allow anyone to 1II0unt him.
Ph ilip was displeased at th eir bringing him so wild and
ungo,-ern able a horse, and bade th em take him away.
Bu t Alexan der, who had observed Buceph nlus well,
said, " \Yhat a horse th ey are losing, for want of sk ill
nnd spirit to manage him 1" Philip at first took no
notice of this; but upon th e prince's oft en repeating
the snme expression, and showing gl eat uneasiness, he
said, " Youug man, you find fault with yo ur elders,
as if you knew 1II0re than they, or could IIIlmage the
horse better." " And I certa inly could," answered
th e pri nce. " If you should not be able to rid e him,
what forfeit will you pay for ~-our rashness ?" ask ed
th e k ing. " I will pay th e pri ce of th e horse."
5. "["pon this all th e company lau gh ed ; but the
ki ng and the prince agreeing as to th e forfeit, Alexand
er ran to the horse, and layin g hold of the bridle,
turned him to the sun ; for he had observed, it
seems, th at th e shadow which fell before th e horse,
and moved whenever he moved, grea tly disturbed him.
While the horse's fierceness and fury lasted, Alexander
kept speaking to him softly and strok ing him ; after

196 ALEXANDER THE GREAT.
which he gently let fall his mantle, and leaped lightly
upon the horse's back. Th en, without pulling the
reins too hard, or using either whip or spur, he set him
going. As soon as he perceived that he was qui et,
he put him to a full gallop, and pushed him on both
with voice and spur.
6. Philip and all his court were in great distress at
first , and look ed on in profound silence; but wh en th e
prince had turned his st eed and brought him straight
back, they all received him with loud acclamations,­
except his father, wh o wept for joy, and kissing him
said, "Seek anoth er kingdom, my son, that may be
worthy of thy abilities, for Macedonia is too small
for thee."
7. A genera l assembly of . th e Greeks being held
at Corinth, they resolved to send their troops with
Alexander against the Persian s, and he was unanimously
elected captain-general. Many statesmen and
philosophers came to congratulate him on th e occasion;
and he hoped that Diogenes, who was then living at
Corinth, would be one of the number. Finding, however,
that he preferred th e enjoy ment of his leisure
in the suburbs, he went to see him.
8. Diogenes happened to be lying in th e sun; and
at th e approach of so many people, he rai sed himself
up a little and fixed his eyes upon Alexander. Th e
king addressed him in an obliging manner, and aske d
him if there was any way in which he could serve
him. " Only stand a little out of my sun shine," said
Diogenes. Alexander, we are told, was struck with
such surprise at finding himself so little regarded, and
saw something so 'great in that carelessness, that

ALE XANDER THE GREAT. 197
whil e his courtiers were ridi culing the philosoph er,
he said, " If I were not Alexander, I should wish to
be Diogenes."
ro-man -tic
sub-dued'
his-t o-ri-an
an -ec-dotes
ad -mi-ra-tio n
shrewd-ness
com-par-i -son
en-ter-pris-ing
ge-ni-us
val~ llr
pro-por-tion
un-m~~age-a.-ble
un-ea-si-ness
for~feit
ac-cla-ma-tio ns
u-nan-i-mous-ly
phil-os-o-phers
con-grat-u-late
sub-urbs
court-i-er s
" ' OR D EXERCISE :-
I. Give a list of compound words formed from stea d, and the ir
meanings.
2. Explain the meanings of the worth consist, consistency, and
consistent, and show their connection.
3. Analyze the word unmanageable, showing t he force of each part.
For K OTES , see pa!Je £67.
50. STORIES OF ALEXANDER THE GREAT.-U
1. Upo n taking Gordium, in Asia Minor, he found
a famous chariot, fastened with cords made of the
bark of th e cornel tree, and was informed of a tradition,
firmly believed among th e barbarians, that the
fates had decreed the empire of th e world to the man
who should untie the knot. Alexander, finding he
could not un tie it, cut it asunder with his sword.
2. While on his march through Asia Minor, Alexander
was st ruck down by IJ serious illness. Th e
physicians were afra id to try any remedy, in case
of its failure lending to th eir own destruction at the
hands of th e king's fri ends. One Philip, a faithful
Greek physician, determined to risk his own life in
trying to sa ve that of th e king, and prepared for him

198 ALEXAXDER THE GREAT.
such medicines as were in use at the time. In th e
meantime, Alex ander received a letter from a friend
telling him to bewa re of Philip, whom Darius, the
Persian king, had bribed to poison him . Alexand er
read th e letter and put it under his pill ow, without
showing it to anyone.
3. Soon Philip, with the king's fri end s, entered the
chamber, having in his hand th e cup which contained
th e medicine. The king received it without th e least
mark of suspicion, and at th e same tim e put the letter
in his hands. It was a strik ing situation. They
look ed upon each ot her, but with a very different air.
Th e king, with an open and unembarrassed countenance,
expresse d his regard for Philip, and th e confidence
he had in his honour; Philip's looks showed
his indignation at the calumny. H e threw him self
down' by th e bedside, entreating his master to be of
good courage and trust to his care. Th e medicine,
indeed, was so strong th at at first th e king was
speechless, and showed scarcely any sign of life; but
afterwards he soon recovered,
4. Many instances are given of his gen erosity.
One day as a Macedonian of mean circumstances was
driving a rnul e laden with the king's money, the mule
grew tired; th e man then took th e burden upon his
own shoulders and carried it till he totter ed under the
weight and was ready to fall. Alexander happening
to see him, said, " Hold on, fri end, th e rest of the
way, and carry it to your own tent, for it is yours."
Indeed, he was generally more offended at tho se who
refused his pres ents, than at those who ask ed favours
of him. He had given nothing to Serapion, one of

ALEXAKDER THE GR EAT. 199
ATTOCK, WHERE ALEXANDER CnOBBED THE INDU S.
the youths who played with him at ball, because, as
Alexand er said, he asked nothing. One day wh en
th ey were at play, Sera pion took care always to throw
the ball to others of thc party ; upon whi ch Alexand er
said , " Why do you not give it me 7" " Because ,rou
did not ask for it ," said th e y outh, Th e repartee
pleased the l.ing much; he laughed, and immediately
made him very valuabl e presents.
5. When Alexander was upon the point of setting
out for India, he saw that his troops were so laden
with spoils th at they were unfit to march ; th erefore
early in the morning when he was to take his departwoe,
af ter the carnages were assembled, he first set

200 ALEXANDER THE GREAT.
fire to his own baggage and that of his fri ends, and
th en gave orders tha t the rest should be served in
th e same manner . Few were displeased at th e order,
and numbers received it with acclamations of joy.
His tastes were simple, and his habits fr ee fr om
luxury. Wh en some of the best cooks and bakers
were sent to wait on him, he said tha t he had no
need of th em, for his tutor had supplied him with
mt{ch better-a march before dayb reak to give a
relish to his dinner, and a light dinn er to prepar e
for his supper.
6. It is said th at th e dominions of Taxiles, in India,
were as large as Egyp t. Th ey were very fertile, and
afforded excellent pasturage. As he was a man of
gr eat prudence, he ' waited on Alexander, and after
th e first compliments, thus addressed him: " "'hat
occasion is there for war between you and me, if
you are not come to tak e fr om us our water and
other necessaries of life- the only things that reasonable
men will tak e up arms for ? As to gold and
sil vel' and other possessions, if I am rich er th an you,
I am willing to oblige you with part ; if I am poorer,
I have no objection to sharing in your bounty."
Charmed with his frankness, Alexander took his
hand , and answered, " Think you , then, with all this
civility, to escape without a conflict ? You are much
deceived if you do. I will dispute it with you to th e
last ; but it shall be in favo ur s and benefits, for I will
not have you exceed me in generosity."
7. Wh en Poru s was taken pri soner, Alexander
asked him how he desired to be trea ted. He answ ered,

DAVID'S LA)lEXT FOR ABSALQ)l. 20 1
" Like a king." " And have you nothing else to
request 7" replied Alexand er. " No," said he ; " e\'el'ything
is comprehended in the word • ki ng.' " Alexunder
not only restored him his own dominions
immediately, which he was to govern as th e king's
lieuten an t, but added very extensive territories to
them; for havi ng subdued a free country, which eontained
fifteen nations, five thousand considera ble cities,
and villages in propo rt ion, he bestowed it on Porus.
de-creed'
rem-e-d y
sit-u-a-tion
un-em..bar-rassed
coun-te-nance
in-dig-na-tion
cal -um-ny
gen-er-os-i-ty
rep-ar-tee
de-part-ure
tu-t or
do-min-ions
pas~tiir.age
pru-dence
com-pli-ments
ne'i~s.sa-ries
ob-jec-tion
ci-viI~i-ty
ex-ceed'
com-pre-hend-ed
\ \'ORD EX ERCISE:-
1. Explain the various uses of the word mean, by itself, ana in cornbin
ations, as meantime.
2. Give a list of words formed from the stem of acclamation, with
various prefixes, and their meanings.
3. Make sentences showing the usc of the word s dominion, dominions,
domain, dominate, and domineer.
For X OTES, 'lee page 267.
51. DAVID'S LAMENT FOR ABSALOM.
1. The pall was set tle d. H e who slept beneath
W as stra ightened for t he grave; and, as the folds
S un k to the st ill proportions, they betrayed
Th e match less sym metry of A bsalom.
H is hair was yet unshorn, and silken curls
\Vere lIoating round t he tassels as th ey swayed
To t he adm itted air......
2. His helm was at his feet ; his banner, soiled
\Vith trailing through J er usalem, was laid

202 DAVID'S LA~IENT FOR ABSALOM.
R eversed, beside him j and the jewelled hilt,
Whose diamonds lit th e passage of his blade,
R ested, like mockery , on his covered brow.
The soldiers of the king trod to and fro,
Clad in the garb of battle j and their chief,
The mighty J oab, stood beside the bier,
And zazed upon the dark pall steadfastly,
A s if he feared the slumberer might sti r.
3. A slow step startled him. H e grasped his blade,
As if a trumpet rang ; bnt the bent form
Of David entered, and he ga\'e command,
I n a low tone, to his few followers, .
A nd left him with his dead. The kin g stood still
Till the last echo died j then th rowing off
The sackcloth from his brow, and laying back
The pall from th e still features of his child,
lIe bowed his head npon him, and broke forth,
In th e resistless eloquence of woe:-
4." Alas, my noble boy! that th ou shouldst die!
Th ou, who wert made so beautifully fair !
That Death should settle in thy glorious eye,
And leave his stillness in thi s clustering hair I
H ow could he mark thee for the silent. tomb,
1IIy proud boy Absalom l
5." Cold is thy brow, my son! and I am chill.
A s to my bosom I have tried to press thee,
H ow was I wont to feel my pulses thrill,
Lik e a rich harp-string. yearning to caress thee,
And hear thy sweet ' Jf y father/' from these dumb
A nd cold lips, A bsalom !
6." The grave hath won t hee! I shall hear th e gush
Of music, and th e voices of the )'oung j
And life will pass me in th e mantl ing blush,
And the dark tresses to the soft winds flung j-

DAVID'S LA)[EXT FOR ABSALmr. 203
But thou no more, with thy sweet voice, shalt come,
To meet me, Absalom!
7." And, oh! when I am stricken, and my heart,
Like a br uised reed, is waiting to he broken,
H ow will its love for thee, as I depart,
Yearn for thine ear to drink its last deep token !
I t wer e so sweet, amid death's ga thering gloom,
To see t hee, A bsalom !
8." A nd now, farewell ! 'Tis hard to give thee up,
\Vith death so like a gentle slumber on th ee !­
And thy dark sin !-oh, I could drink the cup,
If from this woe its bitterness had won thee.
) Iay God have called thee, like a wanderer, home,
)ly erring Absalom!"
9. H e covered up his face, and bowed hi mself
A moment on his child; th en, giving him
A look of melt ing tendern ess, he clasped
H is hands convulsively, as if in pra yer.
A nd, as a stre ngth w ere given him of God,
H e rose up calmly, and composed th e pall
Firmly and decentl y- and left him there,
A s if his rest had been a breathing sleep.
X. P. W ILLI S.
straight'-ened
be-trayed'
sym!m e-try
ad-mit-ted
re-versed'
bier
stead-fast-ly
slum-Ser-er
star-tied
feat-ures
re-sist-less
bea u-ti-Iul-ly
yeam~ ing
ca-ress '
man-tling
de-cent-ly
W oan ExERCI3E:-
1. how th e connec tio n in meaning between the wor ds thrill, trill,
and drill
2. ~ [ ak e sente nces showing the use of the words betray (t wo mean ­
ings) , traitor, and treason, and the compound words form ed
from t hem.
3. 'Vrite in pro se t he substa nce of th e first thr ee sections,
For X OTES, see '[Ofjf !67.

204 T HE OYERLAXD ROUTE,
52. THE OVERLAND ROUTE.
1. Th e idea of reaching I ndia by the l\l editerranean.
the Isthmus of Suez, and th e Red Sea, and thus saving
th e ti me spent in doubling th e Cape, first occurred to
a man named Thomas \Yaghorn . In 1827 he was
app ointed by the directors of th e East India Company
to report on the navigation of the Red Sea, and
to com' ey certain dispatches by thi s route to Bombay.
2. He got notice of this mission on th e 24th of
October, and was desired to be at Su ez by the 8th of
December, in order to catch th e steamer Enterpr ise,
and proceed in her to India. He took only four day s
to mak e ready for th e journey, and on th e 28th of
Octob er left London for Dover on the " Eagle " stagecoach.
He then crossed the English Channel in a
packet-boat, and proceeded to make his way, a" rapidly
as possible, OVeI' land to a Mediterran ean port, from
which he could get a vessel to carry him to Egyp t.
3. Circumstances were against him, Bridges broke
down ; falling ava lanches had to be avoided j an accident
disabled the steamer in whi ch he was to sail.
In spite of all, he dashed thro ug h five kingdoms, and
reached Tri este in nin e days, or little more than half
the ti me then taken by the mails for th e same
journey.
4. An Austrian brig had left for Alexandria th e
nigh t before j but th e breeze had fallen , and she was
still to be seen from the hill-tops. A carriage was
obta ined, and off went Waghorn along the coast in
chase of th e vessel, hoping to mak e up to her at
a village twenty miles down the Gulf of Venice.
Every hour lie gained on he~ ; he began to mak e out

THE OYERLAXD ROUTE.
205
her hull , her sails, and her rigging. He urged on th e
post-boys with redoubled vehemence : he kept them
going at a furious rate.
5. He was within three miles of the vessel ; another
half-hour would see him safe on board, and th enhurrah
for I ndia I But sudd enly a str ong northerly
wind sprang up; th e sails of the brig swelled out
ALEXASDR U ..
before it, and poor Waghorn, wit h his panting, jaded
horses, was left far behind. Th e chase was hopeless
now, so he went back to Trieste, exhausted with
fatigue and disappointment.
6. Two days afterwards, he sailed from Venice on
board a Spanish ship. Aft er a voyage of sixteen
days, he arrived at Alexandria, where he hired donkeys

20(3 THE OVERLAND ROUTE .
to take him to Rosetta, In spite of many delays, he
succeeded in crossing the desert in time to keep his
app ointment at Suez on th e 8th of December.
7. But th ere was no sign of th e stea mer. After
waiti ng two days, with feverish impatience, Mr. "Tag_
horn determined to sail down th e Red Sea in th e hope
of meet ing her. The people of th e distri ct held up
th eir hands in horror at the purpose of th e mad
Engli shman, and tried 'to dissuade him ; but Waghorn
could not rest. He was commissioned to inqui re
into th e nadgability of th ese waters, and he would
do so in an open boat if nece ary, let folk say what
they would ; and so he did.
8. In ix and a half day he arrived at Jiddah-six
hundred and tw enty miles from uez-and anch ored
his boat close to one of th e East India Company's

THE OYERLAl'D ROUTE. 20 7
crui sers, the Benares. On going on board to learn the
news, he was told by the capta in that th e En terprise
was not coming at all. This inte lligence seems to
have felled him lik e a blow, and he was immediat ely
seized with a deliri ous fever. It was six weeks before
he could proceed to Bombay, wh ere he arrived on th e
21st of March. In spite of all th e drawbacks in his
way, he had accomplished th e journey in four months
and tw enty-one days, which was a very short time
for such a journey in those day s.
•9. During th e next tw elve ,)'ears, Wagh om devo ted
himself to the establishment of the Overland Route.
He provid ed English carriages, van s, and horses for
th e conveya nce of th e passengers aero th e Eg,)"ptian
deser t, placed small steamers on th e Nil e and Alexandria
Canal, built eight haIting-places betw een Cairo
and Suez; and he " converted th e wandering robbers
into faithful gu ides, so that even ladi es and children
could crOBS and re-cross the desert with as much
security as if they had been in Europe."
10. What a change has tnk en place in the journ ey
to the East by th e Overland Route since the days of
Waghorn ! Having crossed by steamer from Dover
to Calais, th e traveller is swiftly borne by train to th e.
French port of Marseilles, or, further still, through th e
Alps to Brindisi, near " th e heel of the boot " form ed
by the south of Italy. Thi s ends th e overland part
of th e journey, for he has next to j oin th e powerful
steamer which will bear him across the :Mediterranca n
to Port Said, through th e uez Canal and th e Red
Sea to Aden, and then aCI"OSS th e Indian Ocean to
India, Ceylon , Singapore, China, or to Australia,
should that continent be his goal.

208 THE RUBBER-TREES OF THE AMAZON.
route
di-rec-to rs
dis-patch -es
av -a-lanch-es
a-vo id-ed
dis-a-bled
re-doub-led
ve-he-m en ce
ex-haust-ed
ap-point-ment
fe-ver-ish
im-pa-tience
dis-suade'
com-mis-sioned
nav-i-gn-bil-i-ty
in-tel-li-gence
de-lir-i-ous
e-stab-lish-ment
con-vey-ance
se-cu-ri-ty
IVCR D EXERCl'E :-
1. Mak e sente nces to show t he uses of the word s direc t, directio n
(in various meaniugs), directo r, and indirect .
2. Give a list of word s ending in -g " e, QS fatigue, showing where
the letters ar e silent.
3. Explain the difference in meaning between north, south , etc. , and
their deriv atives northerly, sontherly, etc.
For N OTES, see paye 267.
53. THE RUBBER-TREES OF THE AMAZON.
1. In studying th e great valley of th e Ama zon, the
first step is to distinguish betw een the mainland and
th e flood-plain. ' Th e mainland is alw ays beyond reach
of the floods, th ough it may be only a few iriches
ab ove them; and it has a foundation of rock , which
crops out in many places. Th e flood-plain, on the
contrary, has clearly been form ed by th e river itself.
Its islands and flats ar e built up of mud and clay, with
an occasional sand-bank ; but they are never stony,
and only isolated points are above the level of the
highest floods.
2. Wh en sailing among th e islands and through
th e channels of th e flood-plain s, with their swampy
forests, th eir great stretches of meadow , and th eir halfsubm
erged plantations, any one who is not blind must
feel his soul moved within him by the marvellous
beauty of th e vegetation. No ground is seen ; straight
up from the water the forest ris es like a wall-dense,

RUBBER-TREES.
13

210 TH E RUBBER-TREES OF THE AMAZON.
dark, impenetrabl e, a hundred feet of leafy .spl end our.
And br eaking out everywhere from among the heap edup
masses rise th e pa lm trees in thousands. F or hen .
th e palms hold court ; nowhere else is thei r glory
unveiled as we see it here. If palms standing alone
are estee med the most beautiful of trees, wh at shall
we say wh en their numbers are counted, not by scores
or by hundreds, but by thousands, and where they are
seen against a background of such for est as can never
be found outside of the tropics ?
3. The I ndian pil ot of our boat poin ts out numbers
of rubber-trees, and we learn to recognize their wh ite
trunks and shining brigh t-green foliage. This low
region is one of the most important rubber districts,
I\nJ hundreds of natives are employe d in gathering
and preparing the crude gum. Occasionall y we see
th eir tha tched huts along the shore, bu ilt on piles, and
always damp, reeking , dismal, suggestive of ag ue and
rh eumatism ; for the tide-lowlands, glorious as they
appear from the river, are sodden marshes .within,
4. The rubber -trees are scattered through marshy
fores ts, wh ere we clamber over logs, and sink into
pools of mu d, and leap the pu ddl es ; where the. mosquitoes
are bloodthirsty, and natu re is dam p and dark
and threatening; where the silence is un brok en by
beast or bird.
5. In the early morning, men and women come
with baskets of clay cups on their backs, and little
hatchet s to gas h the trees. Wh ere the whi te milk
drips down from the gashes, th ey stick their cups on
the trun k with daubs of clay. If the tree is a large
one, four or five gashes may be cut in a circl e round
the trunk. By noon the flow of milk has ceased.

THE RUBBER-TREES OF THE AMAZON. 211
and the natives come to collect th e contents of th e
cups in calabash j ugs. A gill or so is the common
yield from each tree, and a single gatherer may
at tend to a hundred and twenty trees or more, wading
through these dark marshes, and paying dearly
for his profit in fever and weak ness.
6. A day's ga thering will be a calabash of white
liquid, in app earance precisely lik e milk. If left in
thi s condition, it coagulates after a while, and forms
a whi tish gum. To mak e th e black rubber of commerce,
th e milk must go through a peculiar process of
manufacture. Over a smouldering fire is placed a
clay chimney, like a wide-mouth ed, bottomless jug ;
through this chimney th e thick smoke rises in a
constant stream from th e fire beneath. Now th e
rubber-gatherer takes a mould lik e a round -bladed
paddle, dips it in the milk , and holds it over the
smok e until th e liquid coagulates.
7. Th en anoth er coat is add ed ; but now, as the
wood is heated, the milk coagulates faster, It may
take th e gatherings of two or three days to cover the
mould thickly enough. Th e rubber is still dull white;
but in a short time it turns brown, and finally almost
black. Th e mass is th en cut from th e paddle and
sold to traders in the village. Bottles are sometimes
made by coating with rubber a clay mould, which
can be broken up and removed.
8. During the wet months, from February until
June or July, th e ground is und er water, and the
huts of the natives are wholly deserted. The gum
is then weak, and of comparatively little value. Besides,
th e trees need this period of rest to make up
for the constant drain in summer.

21 2 USES OF FORESTS.
con-t ra-ry
i~so·lat·ed
plan-ta-tions
ve-ge-ta~tion
im-pen-e-tra-ble
e-stee med'
rec-og-n ize
re-gion
crude
sug-gest-ive
a-gue
rheu-ma-tism
cal-a-bash
pre-cis e-ly
co-ag-u-lates
smoul-der-ing
' V OR D E X ERCISE :-
1. Mak e sentences showing th e various uses of th e word crop.
2. Give a list of words der ived from native and from liquid, with
th ei r meanin gs.
3. Mak e sentences showing th e use of th e words esteem (noun and
verb), estimate, estimation, and estima ble.
For N OTES, Bee Parle 267.
54. USES OF FORESTS.
1. The greater part of th e land surface of the
earth is thickly covered with growing plants. Th e
influence of this plant covering is very important in
many ways. The most imm ediate effect produced by
trees is the improvement of the soil into which th eir
roots penetrate. Wherever they succeed in finding
a foot-hold, they at once proceed to make and to
pr eserve a coating of soil, which in the end may
become ,fit for cultivation.
2. Th e roots penetrate downward into crevices of
th e rock, starting as slender filaments which grow
in size and wedge the stones apart, and thus make
the beginnings of a soil. I nto every cranny of the
disrupted stone other roots find th eir way, and repeat
the process of br eaking. In thi s way th e rock is
fractured into bits, and becomes subjected to the dissolving
action of the rain-water, and so affords food
for plants. Th e root- hairs, also, produce an acid
capable of dissolving certain min eral substances, and

USES OF FORESTS. 213
this acid helps to decompose the par ticles of stone.
In tills way the rootlets of plants serve in part to
make from the solid rocks the soil that gives th em
support.
3. Not only do trees help to make the soil upon
whi ch th ey live, but th ey also pr eserv e it fr om
destruction. In a time of heavy min, th e soil is
rapidly born e away to the riv ers, and th ence to the
sea, in the form of mud. In countries wh ere th e
soil has long been till ed, it constantly diminishes
in depth i and unless great care is taken, in a few
centuries it all passes away into th e strea ms, except
where the surface is very level. Thus in Italy, and
in many of th e countries th at have long been cultivated,
th e soil on th e steeper slopes, whi ch once were
fertile, has so far disappeared that many extensive
districts ar e now barren wastes.
4. Forests serve not only to prevent th e wasting
of the soil und er th e pelting influence of th e rain,
but they also gr eatly restrain th e action of even the
largest rivers. Willows, poplars, and oth er waterloving
plants thrive along th e banks of a stream, send
th eir roots downward beneath th e surface, and so
make a strong net-work whi ch resists th e cutting
action of the river, and keeps it within narrow bounds.
5. Forests also help to prevent floods. If the rain
falls on an unforested country, the wat er flows quickly
over the bare surface to th e brooks, and th ence to th e
larger ri vers, on its way to th e sea. When, however,
th e rain falls on forests, th e water enters a thick,
spcngy lay er, composed of partly-decay ed leaves, togeth
er with fallen trunks and branches of trees.
Through thi s sponge the water moves but slowly on

214 USES OF FORE STS.
its way to th e streams, and when it is actually in
th e brooks , its progress down ward is retarded by
numerous dams made of fallen timber and drift-wood.
Th e result is that instead of pouring swiftly to the sea,
th e flood waters creep slowly away, requiring week >;
in place of hours for their journey to the greater
rivers.
6. Th ere is another effect which forests have upon
the soil. Th e strong roots of trees, penetrating far
down in to the sub soil and into the crevices of th e
rocks, draw upward and build in to their trunks th e
solid matter wh ich we find in th e ash of burnt wood.
Th e trees also gather a large par t of their substance
from the atmosphere. All the material which goes
into the air when wood is burnt came from the air
during the growth of the plan t. Wh en the tree dies,
or wh en its leav es and branches fall, this mixture of
decayed vegetable matter is mixed with the soil, and
serves to increase its fertility. The farmer has to
imitate th e natural process which goes on in the
forest, and introdn ce similar subs tances into th e soil
in order to main tai n its producti veness.
7. From the forests we derive the tim ber which
constitutes a large par t of our houses, and whi ch is
also necessary for the construction of our agricultural
machinery, of part of onr ships, and of a host of
other st ructures which are essential to the well-being
of man.
8. Although mineral coal has, in the more civilized
parts of the world, to a great extent taken t he place
of wood for heating pur poses, probably three-fourths
of the domestic hear ths in the world are still supplied
from th e forests. It is to be hoped that the use of

A FOREST HDIN". 215
coal will become yet more extensive, and so diminish
th e tax which is laid upon the woods. and spare them
for more necessary uses.
9. Last of all, we may note the elements of
beauty which are afforded by our woods. One accustomed
to dwell near pine trees, or within a short
dista nce of a great forest, has probably neve r realized
how important are these elements in the landscape.
If he dwells for a whil e on plains where trees are
found only near the larger streams, and there, indeed,
in scanty growth, he will soon come to recognize how
much of his enjoy ment of natural beauty is derived
from the presence of forests.
pen-e-trate
crev -i-ces
fiI~.ments
dis-rupt-ed
frac-tured
de-com-pose'
di-min-ish-es
re-strain '
pop-lars
fer-til~i-ty
main-tain'
pro-duc-tive-ness
con-sti-tutes
con-struc-tion
ag-ri-cul-tu-ral
ma-chin-er-y
struc-tures
es-sen-tial
do-mes-tic
el-e-ments
'VOR D EXERCISE :--
1. Analyze th e word decomposition, and give a list of words from
the same root, and their meanings.
2. Make abstract nouns from the verbs diminish, restrain, thrive,
flow, and enter.
3. Make sentences showing the usc of th e words matter, material
(noun and adjective), materially, and immaterial.
For K OTES, see [X1{}e f 68.
55. A FOREST HYMN.
1. The groves were God's first temples. Ere man learned
To hew the shaft, and lay' the architrave,
And spread the roof above them; ere he framed
The lofty vault, to gather and roll hack
The sound of anthems,- in the da rkling wood.

216 A FOREST H YMN.
Amid th e cool and silenc e, he kn elt down ,
And offered to the :'Ii ghtiest solem n th anks
And supp lication. F or his simple heart
Might not resist th e sacred influ ences
Wh ich from the st illy t wilight of the place ,
And from the gre y old trunks that high in heaven
:'IIingled their mossy boughs, and from the sound
Of th e invisible breath th at swayed at once
All th eir gr een to ps, stole over him, and bowed
H is spirit with th e th ough t of boun dless power
A nd inaccessible maj esty.
2. Ah, why
Should we, in th e world's riper years, neglect
God's a ncient san ctuaries, and adore
Only am ong th e crowd , and und er roofs
That our frail hands have rai sed 1 Let me, at least,
H ere, in the shadow of this aged wood,
Offer one hymn-thrice happy if it find
Acceptance in His ear.
3. Fath er, Th y hand
H a th reared th ese venerable colum ns, Th ou
Didst weav e this verdant roof ; Thou did st look down
Upon t he na ked earth, and forthwith rose
A ll th ese fair ranks of trees. They in Th y sun
Budded, nnd shook th eir gre en lea ves in Thy breeze,
And shot to wa rd heav en. Th e cent ury-living cro w,
Whose birth was in th eir tops, gre w old and died
Among th eir branches, till at last th ey stood,
As now they stand, massy and tall an d dark-
Fit shri ne for hum ble worshipper to hold
Communion with his ) laker.
4. These dim vaultsa,
These winding aisles, of human pomp or pride

•• THE G~OVES WERE GO O 'S FIRST TEMPLES."

218 A FOREST HYMN.
Report not ; no fantastic carvings show
The boast of our vain race to change th e form
Of Thy fair works. But Thou art here- Thou fill'st
The solit ude : Tho u art in th e soft winds
That run along the summit of thes e trees
I n music ; Thou art in th e cooler breath
Tha t from th e inmost darkness of th e place
Comes, scarcely felt ; th e barky trunks, the gro und,
The fresh moist ground, are all instinct with Thee.
5. Here is continual worship ; Nature here,
In th e tranquillity t hat Thou dost love,
Enjoys Thy presence. Noiselessly aro und,
F rom perch to perch, th e solitary bird
Passes ; and yon clear spring, that midst its herbs
'Veils softly forth, and wand eri ng steeps the roots
Of half the migh ty forest, tens no tale
Of all th e good it does. Th ou hast not left
Thy self without a witness, in th ese shades,
Of Thy perfections; grandeur, strength, and grace
Are here to speak of Thee.
6. Thi s migh ty oak,
By whose immovable stem I stand and seem
Al most annihilated-not a prince
E'er wore his crown as lofti ly as he
Wears the green corona l of leaves wit h which
T hy hand has graced him. Nestled at his root
Is beauty such as blooms not in the glare
Of the broad sun. That delicate forest flower,
\Vit h scented breath and look so like a smile,
Seems, as it issues from th e sha peless mould,
A n emanation of the ind welling Life,
A visible token of the upholding Love ,
That are th e soul of this great universe.

A FORE ST HYMN. 219
7. l\Iy heart is awed within me when I th ink
Of th e great mirac le that still goes on
In silence round me-the perpet ual work
Of Th y creation, finished, yet renewed
For ever. Written on Thy works I read
Th e lesson of Thy own ete rn ity.
Lo ! all grow old and die; but see again
H ow on th e faltering footsteps of decay
Youth presses- ever gay and beautiful youth,
I n all its beautiful forms, Thesc lofty trees
Wave not less proudly that th eir an cestors
Moulder ben eath th em. Oh, th ere is not lost
One of ear th's charms; upon her bosom yet,
A fter th e flight of untold centuries,
Th e freshness of her far beginning lies,
A nd yP.tshall lie. Li fe mocks the idle hate
Of his arch-enemy, Death- yea, seats himself
Upon the tyrant's throne, the sepulchre,
And of the triumphs of his ghastly foe
Makes his own nourishm ent. F or he came forth
From Thine own bosom, and shall have no end.
W. C. BRYANT.
ar'-chi-trave
sup-pli-ca-tion
twi~light
in-ac-ces-si-ble
sanc-tu-a-ries
ac-cept-ance
ver'-dant
com-miin-ion
fan-tas-tic
sol-i-tude
con-tin-u-al
tran-quil-Ii-ty
im-mov-a-ble
an-n i-hi-lat-ed
cor'-on-al
em-a-na-tion
mir-a-cle
an-ces-tors
sep-ul-chre
nour- ish-ment
" . OR D E.'CERCISE:-
1. Anal yze th e word inaccessible, sho wing t he force of each part,
2. Explain th e two meanings of untold, an d giv e sentences showing
th e use of each.
3. Point out the cases of Personifi cation in th e poem.
For X OTES , Bee JXVJt S68.

220 THE NERVES AND THE BRAIN.
56. THE NERVES AND THE BRAIN.
1. Have you ever looked carefully at a rabbit when
your mother has got one in from the butcher for your
dinner? If so, you may have notice that, when the
skin is removed, the red muscles can be easily seen
on the body and limbs of th e animal. If you separate
carefully the muscl es that lie along the back
of the hind leg, you will see a little white thread
running down the leg. This is a nerve, the largest
nerve in the whole body, and it is known as the
sciat ic nerve. We have a similar nerve in our bodies ;
and when it becomes inflamed, it causes the painful
disease called sciatica.
2. If you follow this nerve down the rabbit's leg, it
will be seen to branch again and I1gain, same or the
tittle tw igs passing to the skin, and others to the
muscles of th e limb. If you trace the nerve upwards
into the body, which is not so easy, it will be seen to
pass into the backbone. Th e backbone consists of a
string of bones forming 11 hollow tube, which is filled
with 11 long cord of soft white material. In the
head this cord expands into the brain. A great many
other nerves leav e the spinal cord on both sides and
pass to the body and the limbs, and some twenty
more pass from the brain to the head and such parts
as the eyes, the nose, and the ears.
3. Small as these nerves are-some of them thinner
than the thinnest thread-the microscope shows that
each of th em is composed of hundreds, sometimes
thousands, of microscopic threads closely packed side
by side, and bound together by material of very great
delicacy. The nerves, then, form a system of cords

THE NERVES AND THE BRAIN. 221
JOllllllg the brain and spinal cord with all parts of
the body, and this sys tem is very much alike, in the
human body and in that of the higher animals,
4, You may ask, what is the use of all this?
and in ord er to explain its use, I shall give you an
illustration. You all know what the telegraph is.
Now, the nervous system is of much the same use
to the body as the telegraphic sys tem is to Great
Britain. 'When a ship tou ches at any port, the news
is wired to London; and if a foreign force were to
attempt a landing in tim e of
war, the message to London
would be followed by other
messages sent to all parts of
t he country, calling the people
to arms. So, in like manner,
when anything touches the
human body-a pin point, or
even the rubbing of our clothing-the
tiny nerves convey
t heir messages to the spinal
cord and the brain; and not till
then do we feel the prick or the touch. When a
flash of light falls upon the eye, or when sound
breaks upon the ear, the tiny nerv es are affected, and
send their messages to the brain ; and then, but not
till then, do we see or hear.
5. We know, too, that something else may follow
or accompany our feeling. The flash of light may
cause 'Us to start. Th e sound of the word" Attention"
will cause all th e soldiers in a company to draw their
heels together and to hold themselves erect. In these
cases the movem ent that is mad e is due to messages

222 THE KERVES AND THE BRAIN.
conveyed from th e brain and spinal cord through the
nerve threads to the muscles of th e body, which th en
move as directed. We see, th en, that the brain and
spinal cord ar e lik e a great centralJtelegraph office,
where messages are received and dispatched, and that
the nerves ar e like the telegraph wires.
6. But th e brain has many oth er uses than those
I have described. It is th e seat of memory, the
storehouse of th e feelings and thoughts of our past
lives. By means of th e /brain we ar e able to think,
and to compare one thing with another. Doctors
tell us that, when certain portions of th e brain are
diseased or injured, the patient may hav e large parts
of his past life blotted out from memory, or that the
powers of his mind may be so, injured or destroyed
that speech and thought are impossible.
7. Like all other parts of the body, the brain requires
rest, and this it shonld obtain for eight or nine
hours every night. When we are asleep, no sound
should disturb us. Without this sleep, the greatest
fati gue ensues, and th el weariness and discomfort
become at las t unbearable.
8. Although we have learned something regarding
the uses of the bra in, we shall never be able to explain
everything concerning it. Here, as everywhere else,
we find that th e more we know, the more there is to
be known. People who study a/great deal always
should be, and generally are, the most modest and the
most ready , to acknowledge their ignorance. The
reason is, that they most fully understand how small
is man 's capacity for acqui ring knowledge , how short
is his life, and yet how vast is the material upon
which he has to work.,

TOUCH.
223
sci-at~ic
in-flamed'
spin-al
mi-cr o-scope
del-i-ca-cy
sys-tem
af-re ct~ d
at-ten-tion
en-sues"
wea~r i.ness
un-bear-a-ble
con-cern-ing
ig-no-rance
ca-pacli-ty
a c-quir-in g
W ORD .E XE RCISE :-
J. :\Io.ke sentences showing th e use of the words flame, in1lame {t wo
meanings}, inflammation, and inflammable.
\!. Trace the connection bet ween thc meanings of the words affected
{two meanings}, disaffected, unaffected, affection (two mean,
ings), and affectation.
3. Give 0. list of words formed from the stem of acquiring, with
various prefixes, and their meanings.
For KOTES, see pa y' f68.
57. TOUCH.
1. The skin, as we all kn ow, is very sensitive to the
«to ueh II of outside obj ects. It is also sensitive to
heat and cold, and to pain. All parts of th e body are
not equally sensitive to touch. Th e skin of th e fingertips
is more sensitive th an th e skin of th e' knuckl es,
but/not so sensitive as th e skin of the forehead or of
parts that are covered with hair. In order to show
that th is is true, touch with your finger-tip a knuckle
of the clenched hand of a fri end. You can touch it so
'lightly that he does not feel the touch upon th e knuckle,
while you can feel it quite distinctly upon the finger.
The skin of th e lips and face is as sensitive as that
of th e finger-tip, and th e tongue is even more so.
2. Not only can you feel that an object has touched
the skin, but you have learned by expe rience to kn o
what part of th e body has been touched. Shut your
eyes, and tell a fri end to touch different parts of your
face, and you will be able to tell him what parts he

224 TOUCH.
has tou ched. This pow er of locating a touch is greater
in some parts of the skin than in othersl and is
possessed in the highest degree by the skin of the
finger-tips and of the tongue.
3. If you bandage a friend's eyes, and touch his
finger -tips with the points of a pair of compass es: he
will be able to distinguish each point until they are
nearly closeltogether-say one-tenth of an inch apart.
Wh en they are closer than this, he will think that he
is being touch ed by a single point. Now touch the
palm of th e hand, and the points of the compasses
must be a quarter of an inch or half ani inch apart
befor e the two points can be felt sepa rately. On the
back of the arm a touch is even more badly locat ed,
and the points of the compasses must be an inch or
so apart before each is felt separately.
4. Th e roots of the hairs are very sensitive to touch,
as you can readily observe ; for if a hair on the back
of the hand or head be disturbed ever so little, this
disturbance will be felt. Many animals, such as dogs,
cats, and rabbits, are provid ed with special hairs of
touch, whi ch spring from th e sides of the mouth, and
from / the templ e, eyebrows, and edges of the ears.
'I'hese hairs ar e very long and stout, In the dark th ey
warn the animal of any obstacle in its path.
5. As we ha ve already seen, the skin is sensitive
to heat and cold, but it readily becomes accustomed
to any change of temperature.; If you put your hand
into lukewarm water, it feels warm at first, and then
the warm feeling passes away. If after keeping your
hand in really hot water for half a minute, you
plunge it into th e lukewarm water, the latter feels
quite cold. As in the one casej the lukewarm water

TOUCH. 225
feels warm and in th e other case cold, it is evident
that the skin is not a judge of th e act ual temperature
of things. It only informs us wh eth er heat
is coming to the skin, or wheth er heat is leaving
the skin. Thus lukewarm water gi\'es heat tal the
skin when the hand is cold, but it takes heat from
the hand which has previously been heated by hot
water.
6. A piece of iron and a piece of wood in the same
room app ear to the hand to have quite different temperatures.
The iron appears to be nuch the colder.
Th ey ar c really of exactly th e same temperature, as
a thermometer would show. The iron f eels colder
simply because it is a better carrier (or conductor) of
heat than t he wood, and 80 it draws the heat out more
quickly from the hand. In a very hot room, where
both the iron and the wood arc hotter than the hand ,
the iron f eels th e hotter of th e two, because it carries
more heat to the hand than the wood does.
7. The nerv es of heat and of cold do not pass to
all parts of th e skin. I Th ey ar e to be found only in
certain localiti es called th e " heat spots" and th e " cold
spots." The latter are most easy to find, and we can
map out th eir position in our own hands quite readily.
Take a pin, dip its head in water to cool it, and draw
th e head ' slowly along the back of th e hand. Su d­
denly here and there you will feel the cold of th e pin.
If you mar k one of th ese spots with ink, you will find
th at whenever th e pin is dra wn over it the same
feeling of cold is prod uced. You must not do it too
qu ickly, or too often, however, or th e pin will get
warm, and th e nerves of that spot will be exhausted
and become less f

22 6 TASTE AND SMELL.
sen-si-tive
lmuck~les
lo-dt~ing
bar~age
com-pass-es
dis-turb-ance
ob-sta-cle
luk e-w arm
ther-mom-e-ter
car-ri -er
con-duc-to r
lo-cal-i -ties
WORD ExERCIS E;-
1. Give a list of words formed from the stem of locating, with
meanings.
2. Give a list, of word s compounded with -me ter, likc th ermometer,
and th eir meanings.
3. :>Iake sentences showing the use of th e words distin gu ish , distinguished
(adj ectiv e), distinct, distinction, and distinctness.
For NOTES, see pay . £68.
58. TASTE AND SMELL.
1. We may begin our study of taste lind smell
by making a very simple experiment. Get a raw
potato, peel it, cut it into slices, and wrap these
up in pieces of clean paper. Do the Slime with
an onion, ta ki ng care to hold it in It cloth whil e
cutti ng it up, and/to remove the cloth and the knife,
so that no smell of the onion remains in the room.
Then blindfold a friend, place him on a chair, and
explain what he is to do. He is to hold his nose
with his hand , and th en he is to get a piece of /
fruit put into his mouth. He must chew the fru it,
and gues.'l what it is. You ar e to mention several
fruits, lind he is to nod his head when you come
to th e righ t one.
2. When he is ready, you slip a piece of the pota to
into his mouth. He will perhaps guess/th at it is an
apple 01" a pear; but as soon as he tak es his hand
away from his nose, so that he can smell, he will
know th at it is a pota to. You can then try the

TASTE AND SMELL. 227
same experiment with the onion; and even th e onion
will not be recognized until ! the nose is brought
into use.
3. "1'his shows that it is to our noses and not to
our tongues that' we owe the power of distinguishing
fr om each other the flavours of fruits, and of a
hund red other things whi ch in common language we
are said to taste. It is only the saline/or salt, th e
sweet, the acid or sour, and th e bitter substances that
we really taste. Many substa nces, like table salt, have
no smell at all, and it is by our tongue alone that
we recognize them.
___ 4. The nerves of smell, or olfactory nerves, ari se
from the delicate lining of the nose, high uplbeyond
the nost rils, and pass directly to th e brain . Many
animals have more sensitive noses th an we have. The
foxhound can detect th e odour of th e fox 'on the turf
an hour or more afte r it has passed swiftly over th e
spot, and th e bloodhound can recognize the scent of
a particular man as easily as you can recogniz e his
face.
5. Turning now to the sense of taste, we find
th at the tongue and th e back of the throat are both
capable of tasting. Sweet, sour, and salt substa nces
are best tasted by the tip, the side, and the middle of
th e tongue, while bitter/ substances are tasted at the
back alone. If you taste some quinine, or chew some
hop leaves, you will find th at the bitter taste is not
felt until some of the substance gets to the back of
th e mouth .
6. The nerves of tast e, or gustatory nerves, arise
in the red sk in of thel tongue and the back of the
mouth, probably in little tiny projections or papillce,

228 'fASTE AND S ~[ELL.
which are of various kinds. Hound th e edge and
also on the top of the tonguc arc scat tered a few
big papill oe, which often look lik e littlc red spots.
Between th ese are others, more num erou s and much
smaller. j. At the back of the tongue, so ftlr back that
it is very difficult to see them, are some fifteen or
twenty large papillre-c-as large, in fact, as small warts.
Th ey are probably the spots wh ere th e taste nerves
for bitter substa nces arise.
T, We cannot tas te everything. Chalk and sand,
for example, are tasteless! A substance must be dissolved
in the saliva or juicc of th e mouth before it
can be tasted, and chalk and sand cannot be dissolved.
Among th e substances which can be dissolved in the
saliva, there ar e some which have no taste at all, such
as th e wh ite of an unboiled egg,}pure starch, paste,
and gum; but t he list of such substances is not a long
one. If you think over th e matter, you will find that,
as a ru le, sulx.tances which have a pleasant tast e and
smell are good for food; while, on th e contrary, th ings
that have au unpleasant taste and smell/ nrc hurtful
wh en we eat or drink them.
8. We have th erefore two senses b'11l1rding us from
danger. Th ey are placed in the mouth and the
nose, ready to direct us in th e choice of food. If we
followed the leading of th ese senses more obediently,
it would be much better for many: of us. Too many
people force themselves by habit to acquire tastes,
such as a taste for beer, whisky, pepper, mustard,
and tea, none of which are lik ed by children. Our
taste for them is not a natural one, and many of
th e diseases that trouble us arise from th e consumption
of th ese articles.;

THE
EAR.
229
f1a~vo urs
on-ion
sal-ine
ol-fac-to-ry
nos-trils
quin-in e
gu s-ta-to-ry
pro-jec-tions
pap-il-lse
sa-li-va
mus-tard
con-sump-tion
" ' OR D EXERCISE:-
1. Show the connectiou in meaning between experiment, experience,
and expert.
2. Make sentences showing the use of the words project', proj'ect,
pr ojection, and pr ojectile.
3. Give a list of words simila r in meani ng to hurtful
For K OTES, seepage £68.
59. THE EAR.
1. If you look into the ear of th e boy sitting next
you , you will see a little tunnel leading right into the
head. Thi s tunnel leads to the most imp ortant parts
of the ear, which are lodged within a mass of hard
bone for protection . What we commonly call th e
ear is only th e external ear. It is a trumpet for
collectin g th e quick tremors of th e air, which we call
" sound-waves," and for directing them into the tunnel
we have just mentioned.
2. This external ear is not necessary to hearing,
and those who have had their ears cut ofl:--a punishm
ent sometimes inflicted by the Red Indians
upon th eir enemies- can hear fairly well, th ough not
qui te so plainly as before. To many animals the
outer ear is of greater service than it is to man :
the horse, by turning its ears about, finds out in
what direction a sound is loudest, and thus knows
whence it proceeds. Notice how a horse will turn
its ears towards you, if you make a noise to attract
its attention.

£30 THE EAlt.
3. Savage men also have th e power of finding out the
direction of sounds by moving th eir ears ; and travellers
in Australia relate how th e Bushmen, squatting by
night round the camp fire, constantly turn their eyes
and ears about, suspicious of every sight and sound.
We have no need of being so continually on the
alert, for we are not always going about in terror
of our lives ; and after many generations of disuse,
the muscles have lost their power of movement.
Most of us, however, have tiny ear muscles still left,
and one or two in the class will probably be able to
use th em so as to cause a very slight movement of
the ears .
4. You will hardly believe that, owing to th e want
of this power, you cannot tell , without th e help of
your eyes, whether a sound comes fr om behind or
from the front. Bandage your eyes, and ask two
friends to stand one in front of you and the other
behind. Let one of them click two pennies together,
and you will not be able to say which fri end made
the click. You will generally think that the sound
comes from behind; for we are so accustomed to see
any sounding body which is situated in front of us,
that when our eyes ar e bandaged and we do not
see it, we are deeeived into thinking that it must be
behind us.
5. If an insect should crawl into th e tunnel of
your ear, it would not be able to go very far . At
a distance of less than an inch , it would be stopped by
a thin partition, called the drum of th e ear. Beyond
this partition there is a chamber called the middle
ear, and this communicates with the back of the
throat by a long passage.

THE EAR. ~31
6. Th e middle ear contains a chain of three little
bones, called, from th eir curious shapes, the hamm er,
th e anvil, and the stirrwp ; and these attach the ear
drum to another drum, whi ch closes the entra nce to a
third cham ber, called the inner ear. This inner ear iii
filled -with a watery fluid. Wh en sound-waves cause
the drum of the ear to vibrate, th e moti on is transmitted
by the chain of bones to the inner ear, and
th e fluid within it
vibrates III the
same way.
7. This inner ear
consists of some
very long winding
passuges in th e
bone of th e head.
IIence it is termcd
the labyrinth.
Floating in the
tlu id which it contains,
we find a
membrane, called
the basilar membrane,
which is composed
of thousands SECTIO~ OF THE EAR.
of tiny microscopic threads; and from these, thousands
of nerve fibres, lik e white threads, pass to the brain.
8. In order to understand how it is that the brain
is affected by the sound-waves, you would require to
open th e top of a piano and watch th e piano wires.
Wh en you sing a note, one or two wires will be set
in motion by th e sound-waves of your voice. Stop
singing and listen, and you will find that these

232 TH E EAR.
wires have take n up the note you sang, and by
their vibrations are producing a faint sound of t he
same pitch. If you tie a thread to one of these
wires, it too will be set in motion. Th is is pra cticall
y a model of wh at tak es place in th e ear ; for
the tiny threads of the basilar membrane move to
and fro, just lik e the piano wires when a sound is
mad e. These affect the nerves, just as t he pian o wire
affects the thread tied to it.
9. Th e ear is a very wonderful an d complicated
organ, and the work it has to do is very varied. By
its help we become conscious of all the hundred
sounds of the city or th e country-side, from the
deepest to the shrillest ; an d if we listen carefully
to a tolling bell, we hear in every note the several
blend ed tones th at it rin gs forth. Of even greater
imp ortan ce is thc 'power whi ch hearing gives to us
of understanding our fellow-creatures' t houghts and
wan ts, of listening to t he voice of fri end or teacher,
and of developing our minds and charac ters by what
we learn fr om them.
ex-ter-nal
trem-ors
in-flict-ed
squat-ting'
par-tl-tion
stir-rup
vi~brate
trans-mit-ted
lab-y-rinth
mem-brane
bas-i-lar
fi~bres
prac-ti-cal-ly
com-pli-cat-ed
con-scious
de-vel-op-ing
'VOR n
EXERCISE:-
1. Give a list of words form ed from the stem of attention, wit h
various prefixes, and their mea nings .
2. Show the difference in meaning and in structure betw een 'the
words en/trance and entrance",
3. Mak e sentences showing th e use of t he word s'varied, variegated,
variable, and variety (in severa l meanin gs ).
For N OTES, see page i!611.

THE EYE. 233
60. THE EYE.
1. The best way to study the more impor tant parts
of t his very bea utiful and wond erful orga n, is to
get a bullock's eye fr om th e
butcher and exa mine it well
In front yOIl will see a transparent
part, lik e th e gla..

234 THE EYE.
that the pupil changes its size : wh en there is much
light, the pupil is small; but wh en there is ·little light,
or immediately after th e eyes have been closed, the
pupil is large. The iris has, therefore, the power of
changing its shape, so that the hole in its centre may
become small wh en there is much light, and large
wh en th ere is little.
4. If you now look at the remaining half of th e
bullock's eye, you will observe two thin coats inside
th e white. Th e first is a black layer which at some
parts has a glistening green colour ; this is called th e
choroid coat. .Th e second is very thin, yellow in colour,
and so delicate that you will probably have torn it with
your scissors; this is called the retin a. It is full of
nerv es, which all run to the back of the eye, unite to
form the optic nerve, and then pass to the brain.
FORMATION OJ!' AN IMAGE IN THE EYE.
5. When we look at an object, say a piece of white
paper, the rays of light from th e paper pass through
the transparent corn ea and the pupil, and are brought
to a focus by th e lens, so as to form an image upon
the retina. This image affects the nerv es of the
retina, and these affect the brain, and we are conscious
of th e white paper. It is quite easy to see th e image

THE EYE. 235
that the lens is capable of making. You may set
about it in the following way:-Get a pill-box,
remove th e top, cut out a hole in the botto m into
which ~'ou can fit the lens, and fast en it th ere.
Take a piece of thin whi te paper, rubbed with oil
or grel1Se to make it transparent, and hold it over
the top of th e pill-box. Then tum the box with
the lens towards a lighted candl e or a window, and
look from behind at th e greased paper. You will see
upon it a tiny image of th e candle or of th e window
turned upside down.
6. As we have seen, the retina receives th e images
which are Cl1St upon it; but all parts of it are not
equally sensitive. When we look at the middl e of a
page of print th e letters there are seen qui te clearly,
but at the side th ey are blurred and indi stinct. When
we wish to sec anything, we tum the eye so that its
image may fall on the centre of the retina. But very
near the middle of the retina there is a small spot
whi ch is absolutely blind; this is called the blind
spot. Make a dot on a piece of white pap er, and
about three inches to the right of this draw a cross.
•
Now close th e left eye, look at the dot with th e right
eye, and holding th e paper some ten inches in front
of th e face, move it about a little, always keeping the
eye fixed on the dot. In most positions both th e dot
and th e cross are seen ; but in one position th e image
of th e cross is Cl1St upon th e blind spot, and the cross
suddenly disappears .
7. Th e lens- so transparent that it is generally
called th e " crysta lline" lens-frequently becomes

236 THE EYE.
cloud ed in old age. The eye then becomes useless,
for the ligh t cannot pass through it, and we say that
a cataract has form ed. When this cataract is to be
removed by an opera tion, the eye-surgeon cuts into
th e cornea and removes th e lens ; and although the
patient's sight is never again perfect, he can see fairl y
well with the help of specta cles.
8. Thi s most delicate organ is often much abused,
and in consequence many defects of sight arise. There
is nothing so bad for th e eyes as writing, reading,
sewing, or doing any fine work, in a dim light.
School-rooms should have large and high windows,
und the scholars should be so placed t hat th e shadows
of th eir bodies do not fall upon th e paper with whic h
th ey are working. Both in reading and in writing th e
head should be held well up, and should never be bent
over the work, for then the eyes become too full of
blood, and fatigue rapidly comes on. One cannot be
too careful of the eyes in youth, for no loss is greater
than that of sight.
trans-pa-rent
cor-ne-a
scler-ot-ic
scis-sors
glis~ten-ing
chor'-oid
ret-i-na
Io-cus
blurred
in-dis-tinct'
ab-so-lute-ly
erys-tal-Iine
' V OR D EXERCISE :-
I. Give a list of words formed from t he ste m of tran spar ent, with
various prefixes, and their meanin gs.
2. :>Iak e sentences containing the words delicate and delicacy in
various meanings.
3. Give a list of words ending in ore wit h th e sound of -er ,
For N OTES, seepatJe f 69

-POE ~r BY .
L'ALLEGRO.
1. H ence, loath ed }Ielan choly !
Of Cerberus an d blackest :\Iidnigh t born,
In Stygian cave forlorn,
':\Io ngst horrid shapes, and shrie ks, and sights unholy
Find out some uncouth cell,
Where brooding Darkness spr eads his jealous wings .
And the night-rav en sings ;
There, und er ebon shades, an d low-brewed rocks,
A s ragged as thy locks,
I n dark Cimmerian desert ever dwell !
But come, th ou Goddess fair and free,
In H ea ven yc leped Euphrosyn e,
And by men, heart-easing nlirtll .
2. H aste thee, ~.ymph! and bring with thee
J est, and yout hf ul J ollity,
Quips, and cranks, and wanto n wiles,
J. T ods, and becks, an d wreath ed smiles,
Such lIB hang on H ebe's cheek ,
And love to live in dimple sleek ;
Spor t, that wrinkled Care derides ;
And Laughter , holding both his sides.

238 L'ALLEGRO.
3. Come, and trip it, as ye go,
On the light fantastic toe;
A nd in thy right hand lead with thee
Th e mountai n nymph, sweet Liberty.
An d, if I give thee honou r due,
Mir th ! adm it me of thy crew ;
To live with her, and live with thee,
In unreproved pleasur es free;
4. To hear the lark begin his flight,
A nd, singing, startle t he dull N ight
From his watch-tower in th e skies,
Till th e dappled da wn doth rise ;
Th en to come, in spite of sorrow,
And at my window bid good-morrow,
Through th e sweet-bri er, or the vine,
Or th e twi sted eglantine:
While th e cock, with lively din ,
Scatters the rear of darkness thin ;
And to the stack, or the barn door.
Sto utly struts his dam es before:
5. Oft listening how th e hounds and horn
Cheerly rouse th e slumbering morn,
From th e side of some hoar hill
Through th e high wood echoing shrill :
Some time walking, not unseen,
By hedgerow elms on hillocks green,
Ri ght against th e eastern gate,
Where th e great sun begins his sta te,
Robed in flames and am ber light,
Th e clouds in thousand liveries dight :
\Vhil e th e ploughman, near at hand,
\Vhistl es o'er the furrowed land;
And the milkmaid singet h blithe;
And th e mower whets his scythe ;

L'A LLEGRO. 239
And e" ery shepherd tells his tale
Under the hawthorn in th e dale.
6. traight mine eye hath caught new pleasures,
Whilst th e landscape round it measures ;
Russet lawns, and fallows grey,
Wh ere the nibbling flocks do stray;
~Ioun tains, on whose barren breast
The labouring cloud s do often rest;
Meadows trim with dai sies pied ;
Shallow brooks and riv ers wide.
Towers and battlements it sees
Bosomed high in tufted trees ;
Where perhaps some beauty lies,
The Cynosure of neighb ouring eyes.
7. H ard by, a cottage chimney smokes
From betwixt tw o aged oak s;
Wh ere Corydon and 'l'hyrsis, met, .
Are at th eir savoury dinner set,
Of herbs, and oth er country messes,
Wh ich the neat-ha nded P hillis dresses;
An d then in haste the bower she leaves,
W ith Thestylis to bind the sheaves ;
Or, if the earlier season lead,
To the tan ned hay cock in th e mead.
8. Someti mes wit h secure delight
The upland haml ets will invi te;
"-Then the merry bells nil'; round,
A nd the jocund rebecks sound
To many a youth an d many a maid,
Dancing in the chequered shade;
AmI young and old come forth to play
On a sunshine holiday,
Till th e livelong dayl ight fail ;
Then to th e spicy nu t-brown ale,

240 L' ALL EGRO.
W ith stories told of Dlany a feat,
How fairy Mab the junkets eat.
9. She was pinched and pulled, she said:
And he, by friar's lantern led ;
Tells how th e drudging goblin swea
To earn his cream-Low1 duly set;
When, in one night, ere glimpse of morn ,
His shad owy flail hath th reshed the corn
That te u day-labourers could not end ;
Th en lies him down the lub ber fiend,
And, stretched out all th e chimney 's length,
B3.Sks at th e tire his hairy strengt h;
A nd crop-full out of doors he flings,
Ere th e tirst cock his matin rin gs.
Tilus done th e tal es, to bed th ey creep,
By whispering wind s soon lulled asleep,
10. Towered cit ies please us then,
And the busy hum of men;
'W here throngs of knights and barons bold.
I n weeds of peace, high triumphs hold ;
" Tith sto re of ladi es, whose bright eyes
Rain influence, and j udge the pr ize
Of wit, or arms ; while bot h contend
To win her groce, whom all commend.
11. Th ere let H ymen oft app ear,
In saffron robe, with taper clear ;
And pomp, and feast, and revelry,
With mask, and antique pageantry,­
Such sights as youthful poets dream
On summer eves by hau nted st ream.
Then to th e well-tr od starre anon,
If J onson's learn ed sock be on ;
Or sweetes t Shak espeare, Fancy's child,
War ble his native wood-notes wild.

IL
PEYSEROSO.
241
12. And ever, agaiust eating cares,
Lap me in soft Lydian airs,
Married to immor tal verse,
Such as the meet ing soul may pierce,
I n not es, with many a winding bout
Of linked sweet ness long drawn out ;
W ith wanton heed, and giddy cunning,
Th e melting voice th rough mazes ru nning ;
U ntwi st ing all the chains that tie
The hidden soul of harm ony ;
That Orp heus' self Illay heave his head
From golde n slumber on a bed
Of heaped E lysian flowers, and hear
Such strains as would have won the ear
Of Pluto, to hav e quite set free
H is half-regained E urydice.
Th ese delights, if thou canst give,
:Mirth ! wit h thee I mean to live.
lIIILTOX.
IL PENSEROSO.
1. H ence, min deluding joys!
T he brood of Folly without father bred .;
H ow little you best ead,
Or fill th e fixed mind with all your toys!
D well in some idle brain,
And fancies fond with gaudy shapes poss::.::,
As thick and numberless
As th e gay motes that people the sunbeams;
Or lik est hovering dreams,
TIle fickle pensioners of Morpheus' trail'
2. Bu t hail, thou Goddess, sage and holy,
H ail, div inest Meluncholy !
914) 15

242 l L PENSEROSO.
Whose saintly visage is too bright
To hit the sense of human sight;
A nd therefore, to our weaker view,
O'erlaid with black, staid wisdom's hue,­
Black, but such as in esteem
P rince ~I emnon 's sister might beseem;
Or that starred E thi op queen that st rove
To set her beauty's pra ise above
The sea nymphs, and th eir powers offended. .
3. Come, pensive nun! devo ut and pure,
Sober, steadfast, and demure ;
All in a robe of dark est gra in,
Fl owing with majestic t rai n ;
And sable stole of cipres lawn,
Over thy decent shoulders drawn.
Come ! but keep thy wonted sta te,
W ith even ste p, and musing gait,
And looks commercing with the skies,
I'hy rapt soul sitting"in thi ne eyes :
Thero, held in holy passion still,
Forgot thy self to marble, t ill,
W ith a sad, leaden, downward cast,
Thou fix th em on the eart h as fast.
4. A nd join with thee calm P eace, and Quiet,
Spa re Fast, that oft wit h gods doth diet,
And hears the :Muses in a ring
Aye round about J ove's altar sing;
A nd add to these retired Leisure,
Th at in trim gar dens takes his pleasure :
. But first, and chiefest, with th ee Lring
H ill. that soars on ~old en wing,
Guidi ng th e fiery-wheeled throne,
The cher ub Conte mplati on ;

IL PENSEROSO.
A nd th e mute Silence hist aiong,
'Les s Philomel will deign a song,
In her sweetes t, saddest plight ,
Smooth ing th e ru gged brow of night;
While Cynthia checks her drago n yoke,
Gently o'er th ' accustomed oak:
5. Sweet bird, that shunn'st th e noise of folly,
:Most musical, most melanch oly!
Th ee, chantress, oft, the woods among,
I woo to hear thy even·song ;
And, missing th ee, I walk unseen
On th e dry, smooth -shaven green,
To behold th e wand er ing moon,
Riding near her highest noon,
Like one that had been led astray
Through th e H eaven's wide pathless way;
And oft, as if her head she Lowed,
Stooping through a fleecy cloud.
6. Oft, on a plat of rising ground,
I hear the far-off curfe w sound
Over some wide-watered shore,
Swinging slow wit h sull en roar :
Or , if th e air will not permit,
Some still, removed place will fit,
·Where glowing embers, through th e room,
Teach light to counterfeit a gloom;
Far from all resort of mirth,
Save th e cricket on th e hearth,
Or th e bellman's drowsy charm,
To bless th e doors from nightly harm:
7. Or let my lamp, at midnight hour,
Be seen in some high lonely tower,
" There I may oft out-watch the Bear,
' Vith thrice-great H ermes; or unsphere
243

244 IL PE~SEROSO .
Th e spiri t of Plato, to unfold
\Vhat worlds or what vast regions hold
Th e immortal mind th at hath forsook
H er mansion in this fleshly nook;
And of those dremons that are found
I n fire, ai r, flood, or under ground,
Whose power hath a true consent
\Yi th planet, or with element " ,.. .
8. Thus, ~Tight ! oft see me in thy pale caree r,
Till civil-s uited )Iorn appear;
Not tricked and frouneed, as she was wont
W it h the A tt ic boy to hunt,
Bu t kerchiefed in a comely cloud,
\V hile rocki ng wind s ar e pipi ng loud;
Or ushered with a shower st ill,
When th e gust hath blown his fill,
Ending on th e rustling lea ves
Wi th minute drops from 011't he eaves.
9. And when the sun begins to fling
His Haring beams, me, Godd ess ! bring
To arched walks of twi light groves,
And shadows brown, that Sylva n loves,
Of pine, or monumental oak,
Where the rude axe, with heaved st roke,
W as never heard the nymph s to da unt,
Or fright them from their hallowed haunt.
10. Th ere, in close covert by some brook,
\Vhere no profane r eye may look,
H ide me from day's garish pye ;
W hile the bee wit h honeyed thig h,
Th at at her flow'ry work doth si,,~,
And the waters murmurine
\Vith such consort as they keep,
Entice the dewy-feathered leep ;

IL
PENSEROSO.
24 5
And let some strange mysterious dream
W av e at his wings in airy stream
Of lively portraiture display ed,
Soft ly on my eyelids laid.
A nd, as I wak e, sweet music breat h..,
A bove, about, or underneath,
Sent by some spirit to mortals good,
Or th' unseen gen ius of the wood.
11. But let my due feet never fail
To walk the studious cloister's pale ;
And love the high embowed roof,
With antique pillars massy proo f,
A nd sto ried win dows richly dight,
Casting a dim religi ous ligh t.
Th ere let th e pealin g orga n blow
To th e full voiced quire below,
In service high , and anthems clear,
As may with sweetness, through min e ear,
Dissolve me into ecstasies,
And bri ng all H eaven befor e mine eyes.
12. And may, at last, my weary age
Find out th e peaceful hermitage,
T he hairy gown and mossy cell,
Whore I may sit, and rightly spell
Of eyery star th at H eav en doth shew,
A nd eyery herh that sips th e dew ;
Till old experie nce do atta in
T o something like proph etic strain.
T hese pleasures, Meluncholy ! give,
And I with thee will choose to live,
M ILTON.

246 WOLSEY ON HIS FALL.
WOLSEY ON HIS FALL.
[Wolsey, charged with high tr eason, is dep rived of the Grea t Seal and 01
all his goods and lands.]
1. Wolsey. Farewell, a long farewell, to all my greatness I
This is th e state of man : to-day he puts fort h
The te nder leaves of hopes j to-morrow blossoms,
And bears his blushing honours th ick upon him j
The t hird day comes a frost, a killing frost,
And,-when he think s, good easy man, full surely
His greatness is a-ri pening,-nips his root,
And then he falls, as I do.
2. I have ventured,
Lik e littl e wanton boys that swim on bladders,
Thi s many summers in a sea of glory ,
But far beyond my depth : my high-blown pride
At length broke und er me; and now has left me,
\Vcary nr.d old wit h service, to th e mercy
Of a rude st ream, that must for ever hide me.
Vain pomp an d glory of this world, I hate ye :
I feel ,my heart new opened.
3. Oh, how wretched
Is that poor man that hangs on princes' favours !
There is, betwixt that smile we would aspire to,
That sweet aspect of princes, and their ruin,
~[ ore pangs and fears than wars or women have :
And when he falls, he falls like Lucifer,
Never to hope again. ......
Enter CRomvELL
4. Urouucell. .. ....H ow does your grace 1
WolselJ. \ Vhy, well ;
Never so truly happy, my good Cromwell .
I kn ow myself now j and I feel within me

WOLSEY OX HIS FALL. 247
A peace abo ve all earthly dignities,
A still an d quiet conscience. Th e kin g has cured me,
I hum bly than k his grace; and fr om th ese shoulders,
These ruined pillars, out of pity, taken
A load would sink a navy,-too much honour:
Oh, 't is a burden, Cromwell, 'tis a burden
Too heavy for a man that hopes for heaven 1.... ••
'Yhat news abroad 1 .
5. Cronuoell, Th e L'ldy Anne,
'Yhom th e kin g hath in secrecy long married,
This day was viewed in open as his queen,
Going to cha pel; and th e voice is now
Only abou t her coronat ion.
6. Wolsey. Th ere was th e weight that pull ed me down.
o Cromwell,
The kin g has gone beyond me : all my glories
In that one woman I hav e lost for ever :
No sun shall ever usher forth mine honours,
Or gild again th e noble troops that waited
Upon my smiles. Go, get thee from me, Cromwell;
I am a poor fa1l'n man, unworth y now
To be thy lord and master. Seek the king:
That sun , I pray, may never set! I have told him
What and how true th ou art : he will ad vance thee;
Some little memory of me will stir him -
I know his noble nature-not to let
Thy hopeful service perish too : good Cromw ell,
Neglect him not; mak e use now, and provide
For thi ne own future safety.
7. Cromwell. 0 my lord,
Must, I th en leave you 1 must I need. forego
So good, so noble, and so true a master?
Bear witness, all that hav e not hearts of iron,
" Tith what a sorrow Cromw ell leaves his lord.-

248 WOLSEY ON HI S FALL.
Th e king shall ha ve my service ; but my pmyers
For ever and for ever shall be yours.
8. Wof..

MA RK ANTON Y'S SPE ECH .
249
MARK ANTONY'S SPEE CH.
plark An ton y occupies th e rostrum a fte r Brutus has left it . H is
speech is a very ski lfu l piece of pleading. H e works on t he sen.se of
justice of the citizens, on their cupidity, on their pity, on their vengean ce,
and, whil e professing to ha ve no such pu rpose, stirs the m up to mutiny.I
1. Antony. Friend s! R oman s, count rymen, lend me
your ears ;
I come to bury Ceesar, not to pra ise him.
The evil that men do lives after them;
The good is oft inte rred with th eir bones ;
So let it be with Cresar, Th e noble Brutus
H ath told you Cresar was ambitious:
If it were so, it was a gri evous faul t,
AmI gri evously hath Cresar an swered it.
H ere, und er leave of Brutus and the rest, ­
Fo r Brutus is an hono urable man ;
So are they all, all honoura ble men,­
Come I to speak in Cresar's fu neral.
2. H e was Illy fr iend, faith ful an d j ust to me:
But Brutu s says he was ambitious;
A nd Bru tu s is an honoura ble man.
H e hath broug ht many captives home to R ome,
Whose ran soms did th e general coffers fill :
Did thi s in Cresar seem ambitious 1
W hen t hat the poor hav e cried, Cresar hath wept :
A mbition should be mad e of sterner stuff :
Yet Brutus says he was ambitious;
And Brutus is an honourable man.
3. You all did see that on the Lupercal
I thr ice presented him a kingly crown,
W hich he did thrice refuse: was thi s amb ition!
Yet Brutu s says he was ambitious;
And, sure, he is an honoura ble man.

250 JlIARK ANTONY·-S SPEECH.
I speak not to disprove what Brutus spoke ,
But here I am to speak what I do know.
You all did love him once, not without cause :
W hnt, cause withholds you, th en, to mourn for him 7
o j udgment! thou art fled to brutish beasts,
A nd men have lost their reason.-Bear with me;
1\Iy heart is in the coffin th ere with Cresar,
And I must pause till it corns back to me .
4. Bu t yesterday the word of Cresnr might
H ave stood against th e world ; now lies he there,
And none so poor to do him reverence,
o masters, if I were disposed to sti r
Y our hearts and minds to mutiny and rage,
I should do Brutus wrong, and Cassius wrong,
" ' ho, you all know, are honoura ble men.
I will not do them wrong ; I rath er choose
To wrong the dead, to wrong myself and you,
Th an I will wrong such honoura ble men.
6. But here's a parchment with th e seal of Cresar ;
I found it in his closet, 'tis his will :
Let bu t the commons hear thi s testament,­
Which, pard on me, I do not mean to reau,-
And they would go and kiss dead Cresar's wounds,
A nd dip thei r napkins in his sacred blood,
Y en, beg a hair of him for memory.
A nd, dy ing, ment ion it withi n th eir wills,
Bequeathing it as a rich legacy
Unto th eir issue. _.. ...

MARK ANTONY' S SPEECH. 251
And, being men, heari ng the will of Cresar,
It will inflame you, it will mak e you mad :
'Tis good you know not that you are his heirs;
For, if you should, oh, what would come of it!
.A Citizen. Read the will ; we'll hear it , Antony .
Antons], Y ou will compel me, th en, to read the will i
Then mak e a ri ng about th e corpse of Cresar,
And let me show you him that made th e will
Shall 1 descend 1 and will you giv e me leave 1
Several Cit izens. Come down. [A nlony com" down.
7. Antony. Ifyou have tears, prepare to shed them now.
You all do know thi s mantle :-1 remember
The first tim e ever Cresar put it on;
'Twas on a summer's evening, in his tent,
That day he overcame th e N er vii:-
Look, in this place ran Cassius' dagger through :
See what a rent the envious Casca mad e :
Through th is t he well-beloved Brut us stabbed ;
An d as he plucked his cursed steel away ,
Mark how the blood of Crosnr followed it,
As ru shin g out of doors, to be resolved
If Brut us so unkindly knoc ked, or no ;
F or Bru tu s, as you know, was Cresar's angel :­
J udge, 0 you gods, how dear ly Ceesar loved him I
8. This was th e most unkindest cut of all :
For when the noble Cresar sa w him sta b,
Ingratitud e, more strong th an traitors' arm s,
Quite vanquished him: th en burst his mighty heart ;
A nd, in his mantle muflling up his face,
Ev en at the base of P ompey's statua,
Which all the whil e ran blood, great Cresar fell
Oh, what a fall was th ere, my country men!
Then I, an d you, and all of us fell down,
Whilst bloody treason flourished over us.

252 MARK ANTONY'S SPEECH.
9. Oh, now you weep ; and , I perceive, you feel
Th e din t of pity: these are gracious drops.
Kind souls, what, weep you when you but behold
Our Cresar 's vesture wound ed 1 Look you here,
H ere is himself, marred, as you see, with traitors.
A Cit;zm. a piteous spectacle 1......
All . R evenge !- About i-Seek !-Burn !-Fi re !­
Kill !- lay !- Let not a traitor live !
10 Anwny. Good friends, sweet friends, let me not stir
you up
To such a sudden flood of muti ny.
They th at have done this deed are honourable :
'Vhat private griefs th ey have, alas, I know not,
That made th em do it: they are wise and honourable,
And will, no doubt, with reasons answer you.
I come not, friends, to steal away your hearts :
I am no orator, as Brutus is j
But, as you know me all, a plain blunt man,
That love my fricnd j and that they know full well
That gave me public leave to speak of him;
11. For I have ne ither wit, nor words, nor worth ,
A ction, nor utterance, nor the power of speech,
To stir men's blood: I only speak right on j
I tell you that which you yourselves do know j
Show you sweet Cresar's wound s, poor, poor dumb
mouth s,
And bid them speak for me: bu t were I Brutus,
And Bru tu s An tony, th ere were an Antony
Would ruffle up your spirits, and put a tongu e
III every woun d of Ca>sar, th at should move
The stones of Rom e to rise and mutiny.
SH.\KESP".\RE.
J uli u. C

TO A SKYLARK .
253
TO A SKYLARK.
1. H ail to th ee, blithe spirit!
Bird thou never wert,
That from heaven, or near it,
P ourest thy full heart
In profuse stra ins of unpremeditated art.
2. Higher still, and higher,
From the earth th ou springest,
Like a cloud of fire ;
Th e blu e deep thou wingest,
And singing still dost soar, and soaring ever singest.
3. I n the golden lightning
Of the sunken sun ,
O'er which clouds are bri ght'ning,
Thou dost float and run ,
Like an unbodied joy whose race is just begun.
4. Th e pale purple even
Melts around th y flight j
Li ke a star of hea ven,
In th e broad dayl ight
Thou art un seen, but yet I hear thy shrill delight.
5. K een as are the arrows
Of that silver sphere,
" Those intense lamp narrows
In th e white dawn clear,
Until we hardly see, we feel t hat it is there.
6. All the earth and air
Wi th thy voice is loud,
As, when night is bar e,
F rom one lonely cloud
The moon ra ins out her beams, and heav en is overflowed.

254 TO A SKYLARK.
1. ' Yhat thou art we kn ow not ;
What is most like thee 1
From rainbow clouds there flow not
-Drops so bright to see,
As from thy presence showers a rain of melody.
8. Like a poet hid den
I n the light of th ought,
Singing hymns unbidden,
Till th e world is wrought
To sympath y with hopes and fears it heeded not.
9. Li ke a high -born maiden
In a palac e tower,
Soothing her love-laden
Soul in secret hour
With music sweet as love, which overflows her bower.
10. Like a glowworm golden
I n a dell of dew,
Scattering unbeholden
Its aerial hue
Among th e flowers and grass which screen it from the
view.
11. Li ke a rose embowered
I n its own green leaves,
By warm winds deflowered,
Till the scent it gi ves
Makes fain t with too much sweet these heavy-winged
thi eves.
12. Sound of vernal showers
On the tw inkling grass,
Rain-awakened flowers,
All that ever was
J oyous, and clear, and fresh, thy music doth surpass.

TO A SKYLARK. 255
13. Teach us, sprite or bird,
What sweet thoughts are thine j
I have never heard
Praise of love or wine
That panted forth a flood of rapture so divine.
14. Choru s hym eneal,
Or triumphal chant,
~Iatched with thine would be all
But an empty vaunt-
A thing wherein we feel there is some hidden want.
* * * *
15. \Ye look before and after,
*
And pine for what is not j
Our sincerest laughter
\Vith some pain is fraught;
Our sweetest songs are those that tell of saddest
tho ught.
16. Y et if we could scorn
H ate, and prid e, and fear ;
If we were things horn
Not to shed a tea l',
I know not how thy joy we ever could come near.
1i. Better than all measures
Of delight and sound,
Better th an all treas ures
Th at in books are found ,
Thy skill to poet were, thou scorne r of the ground.
18. Teach me half th e gladness
That thy bra in must know,
Such harmonious madness
F IV~ :ny lips would flow,
The world should listen then, as I am listening now.
SHELLEY.

NOrl'InS
AND MEANINGS
1 Sluggish, slowly flowing; inactive.
Flori da, a peninsula in the southeast
of the United States of
Am erica.
2 Exq uIsite , beautiful ; grand.
Myriads, great numbers; tens of
thousands.
3 Lagoon, a shallow lake or pool,
1. AMONG THE ALUGA TORS.
especially one in to which the
tide flows.
4 Fonnidable, terrible; dreadful.
Precaution. caution or care beforehand.
8 Phosphorescent, luminous ; shining
in the dark like phosphorus,
a substance which gives out a
faint li3"3';3t nigh t.
1 Ancest or s, forefatbers; people
who have lived Lefore ue.
Rising higher and high er, ap·
preachi ng nearer to the zenith,
or point overhead.
3 Crescent, curve; the shape of the
new moon.
2. MEASUREMENT OF TIME.
[) Watches, parts of the night; so
called because wen remained
alCake to watch in turn.
Sun-dial. a flat surface with a pin
in the centre for showing the
time bv the sun's shadow.
j Kin g AIired- 849-001.
1 Cocoons , the shells made by insects
to cover- themsel ves.
4 Distinguishing names, names by
which they are known from
one anot her.
5 Amber, yellowish. Amber is n
3. SILK-WORMS.
hard substance found in the
earth .
G Envelo ped, enclose d na in an envelope,
7 Deft, quick ; clever.
9 Texture, composit ion j make.

NOTES AXD ~[EAlS'INGS . 257
4. DIAMOND CUT DIAMOND.
>;rl Cadi. " T urkish judge. 4 COlfe ~, chests for aoidiug valu -
Cause, case ; law -suit.
ab lee.
2 Mosque (malkl, .. ~[ohammedau 6 Venerable, worthy of honour or
church or temple.
reverence.
Perpetual. continual ; cons tant. '7 illustrious, renowned; famous.
Reputation, fame; charac te r. Treachery, faIse deal ing : deceit.
3 Bazaar, market ; place where 8 Koran, th e )loh..mmed..n Bible.
goods are set out for sale. 10 Null II."d void, of no binding
Jld dah, a town in Arabia, the force ; of no effect.
seaport of ~[ ""ca.
11 Eq ui t y, f..irness ; justic•.
Oriental, Eastern; belonging to
the countries of Asia.
Legend, a story founded on the
imagination or on tradition.
I Bred, brought up; reared.
Traits. distinguishing marks of
ap pearance or character ; featu
res.
2 Scept r e, .. staff borne by a sove r­
eign as a mark of power.
6. AN ORIENTAL LEGEND.
3 Universe, creation ; world.
4 Mecca, a city of A rabia, famous
as tbebirthplaceof )[ohamme1 ;
the boly city of the ) Ioha m­
medans .
Allah, the A ra bic name for Goo.
S Assu age , allay; lessen.
Meteth . meas ureth ; distribute-tho
Imp art ial, fair ; acting in the
sa me way to every one,
Scrub, low gro wt h of bushes .
Kassala, a town in Nu bia, a countrv
in the north-east of A frica.
Dev1at1on,alteration in the course.
2 Sheik, the head of an Arab fa mily
or tribe ; th e chief of all A rab
village,
6. A HI PPOPOTAMUS HUNT.-L
3 studded, dotted; covered .
Discarded, too k off; rejected.
4 Equipped , fitted out; provided
with what is required.
6 Wake. track.
SUbmerge d, covered with water.
, Veteran, old end experienced.
7. A HIPPOPOT AMUS HUNT.-IL
1 Ungalnly, ungraceful; awkward. 15 Purcha se, advantage; gain of
5 At bay. on defence. power,
Irresis tible, resist]ess ; carrying16Warlly, watchfully.
all before it .
7 Projecttcn, juttiug-out portion.
D1verting, drnwing awav r taking 9 Tran sported, col1\"eyed ; carr-ie..l or
off the attention.
taken from one place to another.
mn 16

258 NOTES AND MEANINGS.
8. KAMTCHATKA AND ITS PEOPLE.
1 Spur, a smaller rang e of moun ­
tains running off at an angl e
from a larger one.
Picturesque, fitted to form a
good pict ure.
2 Inhospitable, un in viting ; ble ak .
Luxuriant, abundant; having a
very great growth.
7 Domes, rounded roofs 01 "ceilings.
8urmounted, to pped.
~ Steppes (steps), un cult ivated
plains ; wast es.
n Restraint, being kept under control.
Self-rellant, depending entirely
on one's self.
9. A LUMBER CAMP.
1 llm1t, a tract of land within a 14 Teamsters, thos e who driv e teams
certain limit or bound .
of horses or of oxen.
2 Scout , one sent before to report. 6 SUbstantial, solid; of good sub -
Z Capacious , large ; holding much. stance.
2 BrIndled, marked with brown
streaks; striped.
Moose, the largest deer of North
America,
3 Break asunder, thaw; th row off.
10. THE LUMBERMAN.
9 Sabre, a sword with a broad,
heavy blade an d a thick back,
curv ed backward at the point .
Lance, a long shaft of wood with
a metal point.
2 Propelling. moving, dri ving forward
.
Glacier , a field of ice on a mountain
side.
3 Fissures, deep cracks ; cleft s.
5 Unstable, un st ead y ; easily moved.
Equilibrium, bal an ce.
11. ABOUr ICEBERGS.
6 Dissolution, breaking up .
Cascades, lit tle waterfalls.
7 Concussion, agitation; a violent
shal-ing caused by oue body
striking against another.
8 Touri sts, travellers for pleasure.
Cataracts, wa terfalls.
12. TH Z HEROINE OF CASTLE DANGI:«OUS.
Heroine, a. very bra ve woman.
2 Seigneur, the French for " lord."
9 Iroquois , a group of Indi an tri bes,
form erly occupyi ng th e di strict
south of th e river St . Lawrence.
5 Breaches , broken places; opei.­
in gs.
Ammunition, powder, balls, etc.
7 Garrlson , a body of soldiers for
def ending a st rong hold.

NOTES AND MEANINGS .
2 59
2 Quaint , antique; odd.
Pr1m1Uve, old-fn.shioned ; anc ient.
3 Tradition, stories handed down
from one generation to another.
t Dtlapldatlon, destruction; falling
down of stonework.
13. A CITY IN THE ANDES.
4 Depravi ty. wickedness.
Cone plcuous outstanding; noticeable.
6 Wholesale, in large quantities.
7 Credi t , trust given or received.
9 Submissive, yielding ; ready to
submit.
1 Modill ed, moderated; lessened.
Alternation, succession; a coming
in turns,
Conet ltutes, composes ; makes up.
3 Pheno menon, unusual occurrence.
Azure, light blue; sky-coloured.
14. LAND AND SEA BREEZES.
3 Develop ed, sbow n in a complete
form.
5 Symptom, sign; mark.
7 Challng, irritation; fretting.
9 Valparalso, the chief seaport d
Chili, South America.
1 F1alI , an implement for thrn.sbing
grain by hand.
2 Oenll ,spiri ts ;supe rnatural beings.
3 Sangulne, blood -red .
Meteor, flashing.
Ardours, wannth ; Ier vours.
4 Woof, th e cross thread s in a web.
15. THE CLOl1D.
5 Pavtllon, canopy ; a building having
a dome -shaped roof.
Convex . rounded outwa rds ; opposite
of concave.
Cenotaph, memori al built to one
who is bu ried elsewhe re ; empty
tomb .
1 Bedawtn, A ra bs belongi ng to the
wan derin g tribes of the desert.
2 Clrcult, journey round.
3 Karyeteln, a town in Syria, near
Damasc us.
[hump.
6 Dromedaries, camels with one
16. A DESERT RIDE.- L
7 Breech-loaders, guns which are
loaded from tbe breecb or
part wbere tbe barre l [oins
tbe stock.
9 saturated, soaked.
10 Rus e, trick; stratagem.
1 Unmolested. with out hindrance.
4 Trespassers, peop le going where
th ey have no righ t to go.
S Pasha, a Turkish gove rno r of a
province; a title of rank in
Turkey.
17. A DESERT RIDE.-IL
i Resti ve, restless; impatient,
8 Bluuderbuss, an old kind of gun
wi th a wide muzzle.
9 Elrectlv e, efficient; able to do
what is wanted .
12 Palmyra, a town in Syria.

260 NOTES AND MEANINGS.
18. THE
1 Deplorable, pitia ble ;
mourn ful results.
3 Lamentation, wailing j" weep ing.
Distracted, conf used ; perpl exed .
Consternati on, confusion; great
terror.
19. ON
1 Permanent, lusting,
5 Perusing, carefully rea ding
throu gh.
Distraction, confusion of mind;
per plexi ty .
6 EXClusive, entire; shutti ng ou t
7 Topics, su bjects. [all else.
Supplementing, adding someth
ing ec.
Clarendon (1608-1674), E dward
H yde, E arl of, Lord H igh
Chance llor of Englan d.
GREAT FIRE OF LONDON.
having
5 catamttous, disastrous; causing
ruin or great loss.
Impetuous, heety ; rush ing with
gr eat force.
8 Avaricious, greedy .
9 Utensils, vessels or tools.
READING.
8 Scott, Sir W alt er (1771- 1832),
great novelist.
Marvell, Andrew (1621- 1678), for
some time assista nt Latin secreta
ry to M ilton .
Mllton, J ohn (1608-1674), great
Engli sh poe t.
Dryden, J ohn (1631-1 700), famous
Engli sh poet.
Pampblets, small books; tract s.
10 Concentrate, fix; bring towards
the centre.
20. HASTE NOT, REST NOT.
1 Spell, charm ; words supposed to 14 Polar guide, com pass, the nee dle
have a magic power.
of which always points to the
2 Mar, ruin ; damage. pole. '
Atone, make up for.
Betide, befall ; ha ppen.
21. NATIVE SPORTS IN HAWAII.
1 Aquat ic, connected with wate r. I stant ly in the same direction.
'Pastime, sport; amusement. 4 In conceivable, unimaginable ;
3 Trade winds

NOTES AND MEANIN GS.
261
2 Booms, beam. to wkich certain
sa il. are fas te ned.
Studding-salls, small sails used
in a light wind.
3 Forecastle, th e front part of th e
deck, usually raised,
Yards, spars wh ich cross th e
mas ts of a shi p.
4 Relentless, merciless ; pi tiless .
5 Privateer, an arm ed ship belong.
in g to a private person or persons,
having authority from
government to attack and plunder
an enemy's ships.
23. A THREE DAYS' CHASE.-L
6 Invulnerablllty, state of being
secure from injury.
Voracious. gluttonous; greedy in
eat ing.
j Starboard, th e righ t-hand side ;
steer-boa rd .
Yaw , sudden change of course.
Intrepid, fearless.
9 Maintop-gallant sheet, th e rope
su pporting th e top-gallant sail
(th e third sail above the deck)
on the mainmast .
Stern-chaser, a gun fired over
th e ste rn.
24. A THREE DAYS' CHASE.-IL
I JIb-boom, th e boom or beam for
th e jib, th e sail furthest in front.
Tallrall, th e rail round the after
part of th e deck or quarterdeck.
2 Reeving, pas sing t hrough t he
blocks or pu lleys .
5 Weather quarter, th e weath er or
wind side of th e quarter-deck,
th e after part of th e deck.
6 Bear up, to run before th e wind;
to put the helm up, or to the
wind side, turning the ship to
leeward.
Heave to, tum the ship's side to
t he wind so as to drift slowly .
I Unknelled, having no fun era l
bell tolled for him.
8 Armaments, weapons of war ;
ships of war .
Leviathan, ship of very large
size; a vel")" large sea -animal,
215. THE OCEAN.
mentioned in th e Book of J ob.
3 Arbiter, judge ; one chosen to
decid e between two parties.
5 Glasses, reflects, lik e a lookingglass.
Fathomless, bottomless,
26. THE KRAKATOA ERUPTIOn.
2 Sc1entl1tc observations, notes and
observations made for t he benefit
of science.
3 DIameter, d istance th rough th e
centre ; breadth.
6 Sextant, an inst ru ment for meaauring
angles, consisting of the
sixth part of a circle, mounted
on a fram e, and marked with
degrees, minutes, etc.
6 Mercury, a white liquid metal ;
quicksilver.
9 SUbterranean, underground.
10 EnguUe

262 NOTES AND MEANINGS,
1 Atrocities, great wickedness or
cru elti es.
2 Humane,merciful ;tender-hear ted.
4 American Civ1l War (1861- 1865),
between t he N ort hern and th e
Sou thern States of Am erica on
27. HUMANITY IN WAR.
th e qu estion of negr o slave ry.
7 Floe , a floating field of ice.
9 Ambulance- wagon, a carri age
used to carry th e wounded to
th e hospi tal.
10 lnternational, between nati ons.
28. THE BATTLE OF CORUNNA.- L
1 Glasses, field-glasses ; telescopes.
Ominous, threate ning ; foreboding
evil.
S Purser, the na val officer who
keeps th e accounts of a shi p,
and has charge of th e pro visions,
etc.
I> Corps (cor) , division; body of
troops.
Ficket , outposts ; soldiers sta ­
tioned at a distance from th e
main body to gua rd agai nst
surprisea ,
5 Windfall, unexpected piece 01
good fortune. [Literall y, fru it
blown down by the wind, not
req uir ing to be plucked off the
tree.]
7 Cannonad e, bombardm ent ; alltack
by firing cannon.
Sal vo, volley; discharg e.
8 Fieces, guns.
29. THE BATTLE OF CORUNNA.- II.
1 Pr ecise, exact.
2 Abrupt, steep ; rough.
S Ba tt ery, artillery ; guns placed
in order for shooting.
Colonel (kur'nel ), the lead er of a
body of soldiers ; the chief offi
cer of a regiment.
7 Demonstration, indication; show.
9 Consign ed, committed ; given up.
Exultation, great delight.
30. THE ARSENAL AT SPRINGFIELD.
Arsenal, a place for making or
storing material required in
war.
2 Miserer e (mi.·er-a're), th e name
of the La tin version of the
5lot Psalm . [L iterall y, " have
pity.'']
Symphonies, harmonies; agreement
of sound.
S Reverberations, reflections of
sound ; echoes .
! C1mbric, belonging to the Cimbri,
an ancient people of north ­
western Europe.
4 Tartar, a nati ve of Tarta ry.
5 Aztec, belonging to a race 01
people who settled in :'Iexico
in th e fourteenth century.
Teocallis, build ings for worship
in ancient Mexico, faded.
6 Beleaguered, besieged; block­
7 Diapason, the harmony of notes
an octave apa rt; a full dee p
tone.

NOTES AND :\IEANINGS.
263
3L TBi:
1 Campaign, war; the time during
which an army keeps the
field.
" Vive Ie petit caporal," th e
F rench for " Long live the little
corporal."
Ii: Conspicuous , outstanding ; that
cannot be missed by the ere.
a Rep rimand, rebuke; blame severely.
LITTLE CORPORAL-L
3 Squadron, square body of troops.
Rallied, reunited ; brought together
again.
7 Legion or Honour, an order in
stituted by Napoleon I. ill 1802
for merit.
u Viva l'Empereur ." the French
for " Long live the Emperor."
9 Breaches or disc ipline, acts of
disobedience.
1 Marsbal, the highest military
officer in F rance.
Bato n, staff showing the office of
him who carries it.
Kna psac k , a bag for carrying
provisions, used by soldiers and
travellers.
32. THE LITTLE CORPORAL-ll
1 Private,sold ier of th e lowest rank.
2 Retort, quick and witty rep ly.
3 Intrencbments , trenches or walls
made for defence.
4 Gagged, forced something intn
their mouths to prevent th ,m
speaking.
33. PERFUMES.
1 Beneficial, fitt ed to do good.
2 Myrrh, a gum from Arabia havin
g a bitter taste.
Essences, per fumes made from
flowers ; extracts.
3 Frankincense, a gum or resin
with a sweet smell. [wife.
Dowry, the portion gi ven with a
5 Pliny (23-79 A.D), a Latin historian.
Edict, decree ; orde r.
Amphitheatre, a circular building
with seats all round, which rise
towards the back, and having
an ope n space, called the aren...
in the centre.
34. A DINNER-PARTY IN ANCIENT THEBES.
1 Obeli sk , monument; " four-sided
tapering pillar, ending at the
top in a sma ll pyramid.
~ Hierogl yp hi cs, the figures or
pictures which the ancient
E gyptian s used instead of
letters of the alp habet.
Colonna de, rows of columns at
equa l distances.
3 Sandal, a shoe consisting of a
sole strapped to the foot, leaving
the upper part hare.
4 Queue (ku), a twist of hai r worn
at the back of the head ; pigtail.
(Also spelt eue.)
7 Stuccoed , covered with a plaster
made of limp, sand, and finely '
crushed marble.

264 NOTES AND MEANINGS.
35. ELEGY WRITTEN IN A COUNTRY CHURCHYARD.
Elegy, a funeral song.
5 Clarion, note; a truropet with a
loud, clear sound.
7 Glebe, soil ; land for cultivating.
9 Heraldry, a kn owledge of th e
coats of arms and history of
noble fam ilies.
Inevitable. certain; t ha t cannot
be avoided.
11 Storied, bearing a story or in ­
scription.
Urn, a vessel for holding th e
ashes of th e dead .
Animat ed, lifelike .
13 Penury, poverty; wa nt.
15 Hampden. J ohn (1594- 1643), a
famous patriot, who was tried
in I G36 for resisting t he pay ­
men t of ship -mone y.
17 Circumscribed. confined .
IS Ingenuous. fra nk; honourable.
19 Sequestered, retired.
Tenor, course.
20 Uncouth, rough.
21 Unlettered, uneducated.
22 Precincts, regions ; boundaries.
29 Dirges, fun eral chants.
Epitaph, inscription on a tomb .
8 Verst, a Ru ssian measure of
len gt h, almost tw o-thirds of an
E nglish m ile.
D Mechanically, in a m achine-lik e
way,
36. A TEA-CARAVAN.
7 Frontier, herder ; th e part of a
country th at [routs or faces
anoth er.
S Consignment, goods ent rusted to
one for sale.
5 Congealed, froz e; turned into
ice.
6 MIniature, small.
Boulevard, bro ad prom enad e or
st reet whi ch occu pies th e site
37. ACROSS LAKE BAIKAL.
of demoli shed fortificati ons (as
the French name impli es).
7 Abyss , chasm ; bottomless pit.
Fascination, spell; act of workin g
on by a charm,
38. THE WORLD BEFORE COLUMBUS.
2 Barrier, o ustacle; bar ; somet hing
stopping t he way.
Christendom, t hat part of th e
world whi ch has become Christi
an.
Mohammed (570-632 A.D.), th e
found er of the M ohammedan
religion.
Ii Latin races, races of sout hern
E urope, akin to th e inhabitants
of Italy .
5 Germanic races, races of northern
E urope, akin to th e inh abit an ts
of German y. [peoples.
Barbarfans, Ravages : uncivilized
7 Inadequate, insufficient; not
equal to what is wanted.
9 Cumbrous. clumsy; un wieldy.

NOTES AND MEANI NGS.
265
2 Pas sIon, strong desire.
6 Ambassa dor, a ministe r of high
rank sent by one government to
another to look after its int erests
; representative .
39. MONTEZUMA.-L
7 TyrannIcal, despotic ; acting like
a tyran t or absolut e rul er.
Courteously, respect fully ; havi ng
the manners of a courtier.
9 Diadems, crowns.
2 Tapestry, cloth of wool and silk
covered with woven or sewed
figures.
3 Pendants, hanging orna ments.
5 Draperies, hangings of cloth .
intoxicating, making dr unk .
40. MONTEZUMA.-IL
7 Audience, interview; mee ting.
S Voluntarily, of his own free will.
Degradation, humiliation ; lowering
of position.
9 Virtually, practi cally ; really; to
all intents and pur poses.
b-R.
41. MONTEZUMA.-m.
1 Allegiance, obed ience.
S Oracl es, say ings of prophets; th e
places where " god is belie ved
to speak.
~ Profanation, abu se ; violat ion.
3:Jt_ Conceded, granted ; yielded .
tf!!t'
42. THE PLA.TE OF GOLD.
6 Prostrated, lay flat on the
ground.
S Contempt, scorn ; disregard.
Intolerable, unbearable; that
cannot be endured .
10 OVerwhelming, overpowe ring.
) J 2 Adjudge, awa rd ; decide as a 14 Guerdon, reward; recompense.
'(( (. judge. 6 Shrivelled, withered up; shrunk,
t .j . 3 Hermit, a holy man who lives 7 Wrangled, disputed ; quarrelled.
...-- apa rt from others. S Lustre, brig ht ness.
43. THE LAND OF THE WHITE ELEPHANT.
S Panora.m.a, a view in every direction.
Ingenuity, genius ; cleverness or
skill sho wn in the plan or mak e
of a thing.
4 Pagodas, Indian or Chin ese temples.
5 Consul, ambassador ; one who
looks afte r his country's inter:
ests in a foreign land.
6 Handicraft, tr ade or cra ft done
by th e hand .
7 BuddhIsm, t he religious system
founded in I ndia by Buddha,
9 Hereditary, inh erited ; passing
from a person to his heir.

266 NOTES A~D MEANINGS.
44. CROSSmG THE BAR.-I.
h .
45. CROSSING
J? It- 2 Adversaries, enemies; opponents .
r /
I Felucca , a small vessel carrying a commander; in the army ,
lateen sails.
Frigate, a swift-sa iling warshi p
next below a captai n.
3 Telegrap hed, signalled.
next in size to a battleship or
ship of the line.
Suppressing, putting down.
5 Lit erally true, true to the letter.
Reconn oitring , inspection ; cast-­
ing the eye over.
01llng, the part of the sea off the
shore towards the horizon.
6 Prognostica t ions,
pred ictions.
prophecies;
2 Man groves, trees which grow on
mud dy shores and river-hanks
8 Gun wal e (gun'/), the upper edge
of a ship's side.
of wann countries.
9 Impalpa ble, shadow)' ; not easily
a Lieu tenan t (lef-ten'ant), an officer perceived ; what cannot be
in the navy next in rank below tou ched.
Pace, st ep ; a length of about two
'; • and a half feet.
a Tau t , tight; firm .
5 Trenchant, sharp; cutting.
a Sped, rui ned; condemned to die.
1 Amain , as steadily as possible;
with might and main.
9 Warily, cautiously ; guarding
agai nst danger.
11 Ol'en, give n.
THE BAR.- ll.
46. MOY CASTLE.
8 Luff, turn a ship's head towards
th e wind.
Phantom, fan ciful; spec tral .
10 Buoyantl y, floating easily, cising
to the waves.
16 Skl rl, scream.
11 Mlrk, mur ky ; dark .
18 Slogan, th e war-cry of a Scottish
Hi ghl and clan.
22 Hlrpl!n g, limping; walk ing as
if lame.
i 'j ..
->:
47. A RIVER m THE OCE.AN.
a Shoal s, great numbers ; croWdS ' 8 Ave ra ge, taking one day wit h
toge ther.
another.
1 Origi n, begi nning ; source. Temp erature, th e amount or de-
Accumulat ed, collected.
gree of heat or cold.
48. THE .. KURO SIWO."
I St un t ed, dwarfed ; stopped in 2 Exca vat e, hollow out.
their growth. [tion, 5 Junk, a flat·bot tom ed Chinese
Equable, un iform ; without varia - or J apan ese ship with three
2 Degree,the 360th partoftheearth's masts.
circumfere nce (here equ al to 69 6 Suggeste d.. call ed to th e mind;
miles).
1 proposed.

NOTE S AND MEANINGS.
267
49. STORIES OF ALEXANDER THE GREAT.-L
1 Anecdotes, sto ries; incident s.
2 Shrewdness, cleverness ; farseeing
power.
Enterprising, adventurous; fond
of difficult undertak ings.
4 Forfeit, pena lty ; payment for
doing wrong.
G Acclamations, shouts of joy or
welcome; applause. [mind.
7 Unanimously, being all of one
Philosophers , wise men ; lovers
of wisdom.
Dlogenes (412-322 B.C.), Greek
phil osoph er.
110. STORIES OF ALEXANDER THE GREAT.-IL
1 Decreed , ordained ; decided. 14 Repartee, retort; a smart, witty
3 Unembarrassed , not perplexed. answer.
Calumny, evil speaking ; a false 16Prudence, foret hough t ; hab it of
statement mad e to do harm to th inkin g well before ac ting.
some one. 7 Comprehended, inc luded .
Ill. DAVID'S LAMENT FOR ABSALOM.
1 Pall, th e cloth placed over a coffin
at a funeral.
Symmetry, proportion.
2 BIer, coffin ; a bed or frame on
which a dead body is carrie d.
Stea dfas tly, in a fixed manner.
3 Sackcloth, coarse cloth, formerly
worn as a sign of mourning or
of repe ntance.
5 Yearning, longing.
9 Convuls ively, with a sudden st art]
in an agita ted manner.
Route (r oot), course; tr ack.
1 Doubling, sailing round .
Dispat ches, letters, usually on
public business.
3 Aval anche , a mass of snow or ice
slipping down a moun tain side.
112. THE OVERLAND ROUTE.
4 Veh emence, eagerness ; greaeforce
in doing anything.
7 Dis suade him, tum away hi.
mind from; discourage him.
8 Delirious, raving; wandering in
mind.
113. THE RUBBER-TREES OF THE AMAZON.
1 Isolate d, det ached; sepa rated.
2 Impenetrable, impassable ; that
cannot be entered or passed
t hrou gh .
3 Crude, unrefined ; raw.
I.gue, a fever followed by fits of
cold and shivering.
3 Rheumatism, pains in the muscles
and joints.
5 Calabash. T he hard shell of the
fruit of th e calabash t ree is used
for jugs, drinking-vessels, etc.
6 Coagulates, becomes thi ck or
curdled .

268 NOTES AXD ~EAXI XG S .
1 Penetrate , pierce ; enter into.
2 Crevices, narrow openings.
FIlaments, fibres ; thin or threadlik
e things.
Dtsrupted, broken apart ; ru p­
tu red .
64. USES OF FORESTS.
2 Decompose, sepcratc ; break up
in to parts.
3 Diminishes, decreases; lessens.
6 SubsoU, th e under lay er of the
soil.
7 Ess ential to , necessary fer.
ee, A FOREST HYMN.
1 Architrave (ar'ki-Ir,it·) , a beam 2 Sanctuaries, sacred places ; places
which extends from one pill ar of worship.
to anoth er in a building ; th e 3 Communion,converse ;fellowship.
chi ef beam.
4 Fantastic, whimsical ; fanciful.
Suppllca t lon, entreaty ; earnest 6 Annihilate d, extinguished; blotted
prayer.
out.
In&cces slble, unap proochable ; Coronal, crown; chaplet.
th at can not be reached.
Emanation.. outcome ; iS8Ue.
Ga. THE NERVES AND THE
BRAIN.
3H1croscope, an instrument for /8Capacity, ability.
viewing very sma ll obj ects . Acquiring, procu ri ng ; get ting by
4 WustraUol:. , exatr ple. seeking or working,
1 SelW tlve, able to feel keenl y.
2 Locatin g , placi ng; settling the
poeit ion of.
4 Obstacle, hindran ce; any thing in
t he way .
G7. TOUCH.
5 Lukewarm, te pid; neither cold
nor hot.
G Tbermom ater, an instrument for
meas uri ng the temperature or
degree of heat.
lIS. TASTE AND SMELL.
4 Dellcate , finely mad e. I much used as medicine.
5 Quinine, a subetn nce got from 7 Dlsaolvecl, melted.
the bark of the cinchona tree, 8 Consumption, eating ; using up.

NOTP:,> A!\ D )(EANINGS.
269
59. THE EAR.
1 External, outside.
Tremors, vibrations j tremblings;
movements.
3 Bushmen, men who live in the
U bush," or wild, wCKXIE'd eountry,
of Australia.
Squatting, sitting on the ground
with the legs crossed.
G Vibrate, quiver ; move backwards
and forwards.
Tra.n.smltted, conducted;· sent
from one place or person to
an other.
7 Membrane, film; a thin ski n.
S Practically, really ; to "II intents
and purposes,
60. THE EYE.
2 Lens , magnifying-glass ; a glass I pupil of the eye,
with one or both sides curved. G Blurred, made indistinct.
Irts, the coloured ring round the Absolutely, entirely; quite.

WORD-BUILDING AND DERIVATION.
MEANING AND USE OF PREFIXES.
1. LATIX PREFIXES.
Lat in Prellxes are prepositions or adverbs put before root- words in th e
La t in language. in orde r to mak e compou nds . T he Latin compounds
hav e in most cases been converted into English words. but sometimes a
La tin prefix is joined to an English word; as, asue-room.
The prefix alters or modifies tbe meaning of the root to which it is
joined. Thus. cud or cede means to go : "",·cud means to go out or
beyond; pro-ceed, to go forward; pre-cede, to go before ; re-cede , to go
back; 8UC·C

WORD-BUILDING AND DERIVATION. 271
P9r, through : also pel-:
pe r -mit, pe r . sli t. pel e lncid (clea r
through and through).
Post, after :
post -pone . pos t-humous (afte r death),
post -script.
Pre, before:
pr e-fix, pr e-figur e: pr e-dict, pre-cede,
pre-fer.
Preter, beyond :
preter-natural, preter-mit.
Pro, before, in stead of ; also pol- , por- ,
pur- :
pro-duce, pr o-noun, pol-lute (to overdow),
por-tend (to stretch Iorward),
pur-vey. pur-pose.
Re, back, again; also re d-:
re-mit . re-peat, red-emption (buying
back) .
Rdtro, ba ckwa rd :
retro-spect. retro-grad e.
Be, apart ; als o sed. :
se-cede, sed-ition (going away).
Sin e, wltb out :
stne -cure (wit hout care).
Sub, under ; also 8Uo-. auf-, aug-. snm-,
BUp-, BUr · , SUB-. SU-:
sub-jec t, suc-c eed , euf-Ier, eug-gest (to
carry under one's notic e), sum -mon,
sup-pe rt, aur-reptdtious, BUB-pend, BUepect
.
Subter, ben eath :
eub te r-Iuge (an underhand esca pe).
Super , over; also supra- , sur-:
sup er-lative, sup er-sede, supra-mundane,
sur -pris e, sur-mount, sur-ve l.
sur -pass.
Trans, beyond , across ; also tr an-, tra- :
tr an s - port , tr an - spire (to breathe
thr ough ; to become public), tra -verse,
tra -duce.
Ultra, beyond, extr emely:
ultra-marin e (beyond th e sea), ultramontane
(beyond th e mount ains-thai
te, t he Alps: hence , I talian), ultralibe
ral (ove r-Ilbe ra l).
The following are examples of DOUble Prefixes :-circum-amb -ient,
re -col-lect, re-com-mence, in-cor -rec t, re-im -pose , in -sub-ordinate , in.
t rans-itive.
2. ENGLISH PREFIXES.
English Prellx es are pr efixes der ived fr om Old Engli sh (or Anglo­
Saxon ) words.
In some cases an Engli sh pr efix is joined to no word of Latin or French
orig in; as, out-cry, out-line, out-post. S uch compounds a re called
Hy brids.
~ on : also an- , on-, 0':
a-board , a-root , a-bed , a-wake , a-rise,
an-on (in one -instant), on-set, o'clock.
Be, by, a bou t:
be-speak, be-dew, be-calm, be-praise.
be-spatt er, be-neath , be-Iow.
For, again st :
ror-bid, for-swear.
Fore , before:
fore-see, tore-knew, fore-tell.
Gain, against ;
Off, from, proceeding from :
off-shoot, off-spring, off-lng_
Out, beyond:
out-liv e, ou t-do, out-run, out-side, outlaw,
out-look.
Over , above, beyond :
over-do, over-charge, over-throw, overseer,
ove r-look.
Over , upper :
over-coat , over-shoes,
To, for, to :
gain-say.
to -day (JOT the day) , to -night, tomorrow
In , in, to make: also en -, em-, Im-:
In-come-e n-throne, em-bark, ira-bitter,
M1.s, wrong :
mis-deed, mis-hap, mis-conduct.
No, not ; usually n - :
; to -gether, to-ward.
Un, not (wit h adjectives):
un-h ap py, un- abl e, un-cl ean, un-fair,
un -wise.
Un, reversal (with verbs) :
n-aught, n-ay, n-eith er, n-ever, n-one, un-do, un-tte, un-bind, un -fold, uncover,
n-or, no-body ( = none-body ).
un-dress, un-make.

272 WORD-B UILDI NG AND DERIVATION.
Un, on :
Up, upward :
un-til , un -to.
up -heave, up-hold, up -land, up -ward.
Under . beneath:
With, against, back:
under-stan d, und er-sell, under-neat h. I with-hold , wit h-dra w wit h-stan d.
3. GREEK PREFIXES.
Greek Prellxes are d erived fr om Ancient Greek.
in scientific terms.
A, withou t, not ; etec an - :
a-theist (without God), a-pa th y (with.
out feeli ng), an-archy (without government).
Amphl, both:
amphi-bious (with both lives - land
and wat er), amp hi-thea tre (a circular
theatr e).
Ana, through , up :
ana-lysis (a loosening up), ana-tomy (a
cu tting up).
Anti, a.ga.inst; also ant- :
anti-dote (given against poison), antagonist
(a st river agai nst).
Apo, from ; also a p- :
apo-state (an offsta nder), ap-bello n
(far th est from th e sun).
Cata, down, against :
cata-ract (8.rushing down), cata-strophe
(an over-turning).
Dia, th rough :
dla -met er (a measure through), dla -tri be
(a ru bbin g th rough-a bitter speech).
En, in or on ; also em-:
en-demic (in, or peculia r t o, a people).
em-ph asis (a sho wing 0 0, making
clear).
They are frequent
End oD, with in:
endo-genous (growing from with in).
Epi, upon:
epi-de mic (00, or com mon t o, a people),
epi-taph (on a to mb).
Exo , without : also ex-:
exo-geno us (growing outside), ex-odus
(a way out).
Hyp er, over, above :
hyper-critical (over cr itic al).
Hypo, under :
hypo-thesis (some thing place d under).
Met a, cha nge:
meta -ph or (a cha nge of objec t, a name
belonging to one thing ap plied to an
ot he r),
Par a, agai nst, side by side; aleo par- t
pa ra -dox (against common opinion).
para-phrase (some thi ng besid e or like
somet hing else), par-a11el (one beside
P ert , rou nd about:
(another).
per i-me ter (measure ment ar ound).
Syn, t ogeth er ; also sy -, sy l ~. s ym~:
syn-thesis (a placing toget her), sy-stem
(pa rt s placed toget her ), syl-lable (letters
taken together), sym-pa thy (feeling together).
AFFIXES OR TERMINATIONS,
In the following lists, the mo st common Affixes or Terminations used
in En gli sh are gro uped according to th eir meaninz or force, not accordin
g to their origi n in diff erent languages :-
(1.) D enot ing the agent , or t he er reader, baker.
doer of a thing. 1st botanis t, duellist.
or
confessor, in spect or.
an
grammarian, librarian. ster ma ltster, spinster.
ant
descendant, occupant.
ar
begga r, liar.
(3.) D enoting the object, or the
ard drunkard, sluggard.
receiver of a thing.
a ry , lapidary, plenip otentiary. ate
advocate. confederate.
eer
auc tioneer, mutineer. eo
tru stee, committee.
eu t.
respondent, agent. ita. . . ••• . . . . . . favour it e.

WORD -BUILDING AND DERIVATION. 273
(3.) Denoting state of being,
or quality.
acy accuracy, celibacy.
age . .. . . .• . • . .average, foliage .
a nce, anoy. . . . fragrance, occupancy.
dam .. ..... • . •kingdom, freed om.
ence , eDOY. . . .excellence, tendency.
hood. •... . . . . . manhood, nelgbbourhood.
Ion •... . . . ••• .creatlon, ten sion.
lsm•. . . ••• . . .. heroism, egotism .
men t • . . . •. •. .banishment, engagement.
mony ••• .. . •.. pantmoDy, testimony.
nsss ...• ••.. . . hardness, darkness.
ry .. .. .. .... ..•tavery, bravery.
ship . . •• . . •• .. eourtshtp, partners blp.
t
weight, helgbL
th
warmth, health.
tude .• .• .. . . . . mul tltude, gratitude.
ty
royalty, poverty.
urs• . . . . . • . • . . pleasur e, rapt ure.
y
jealous y, victo ry.
(4.) Denoting littleness (diminuti
ve).
ete , 0'118 ••••• •partlcle, ani malcule.
kin, en. • . • •. . . lambkin, kitten .
Ie t . .•• .. . •... •rivulet, eaglet.
lin g darlln g, seedling.
ock
hl1lock, pad dock,
y
baby, Tommy.
(5.) Denotin g rank or ofilee.
aoy . . . . . . . . .cu racy, papac y.
ate... . . . . . ...•protecto ra te, ponti ficate.
dam duk edom , kin gdom.
no
bishopric.
ship mastership, clerkship.
(6.) Denoting place.
ary, ory library, depository.
eri e menageri e.
ery, ry. •. . . . . .brew ery, heron ry .
y
recto ry.
(7.) Denoting tun ot.
M
pleuurul, be&uurul.
!cal method ical, poetical.
lVO••••••• •••• wLlueUve, operaUve.
ase•.... " . • .. verbose, jocose.
ous . . . . ... . •• . POPUIOUlI, glorious,
some • . . . . .. . . fulsome, wearis ome.
y
weal thy, healthy.
(8.) Denoting or, or belonging to.
ac . . . •. . •. ....demoniac, elegtec,
..I
paternal, Ollal.
an, ane human, humane.
ar . . . • . • . . . . . . circ ular, ocula r.
ary
mili ta ry, ad vena7.
en
wooden, golden.
tc . . .• . • . . ••. . publl c, domestic,
ld florid , morbid .
Uo•• . . •• •• •• •.juvenile, hostil c.
me
feminine, sangoine.
Ish . •.. . .. . . . •• Britlsb, selllsh.
(9.) Other Adjective terminations.
. { abundant,
ant, ent , dcn oting bt'mu···· pr evalen t.
ble , ; . . . . may b< •• { audible.
arable,
em. . . • . • directiQu { sou tehern ,
wes rn ,
lie . . . . . •
J docile,
tnay b~ . . 1tractUe.
Ie••. .. ..
llko .. . . ..
Iy .
'U t {careless ,
1Cl l OU " homeless.
l ik { warlike,
eneu . . man lfke,
. { friendly, •
likeness.. brot herly.
(10.) Denoting to mak e.
a t e •. . . . . . . . . . . . . .abdica te, complicate.
en , deepen , length en.
ry
be&ullly, 8&ncllly.
1sIL,
publish , admonish.
tse,
adv ertl se.
1%.8•••• •• •• •• •• •• ••eutbortee.
(11.) Ad verbial term inations,
. { ar tfu lly,
ly den oting lilu. learlnll y.
war d. .
d 'rectl { home ward,
,c:m.. outward.
wise . . manner.. . . { otherwise.
likewise.
17

274 WORD-BUILDING AND DERIVATION.
COMMON ROOTS AND THEm DERIVATIVES.
(Li.t. of Word. grouped for A na lg. i. and Axpla1Ullioll.)
a.c,eag
(.harp, .our)
acid
acerbity
acrid
acrimonious
acute
acumen
eager
vinegar
act, ag,lg
(do, act)
act
action
active
actuate
actual
counteract
enact
exact
reaction
transac t
agen t
agitate
ag ile
:~;~l~te
a mbig uous
ex igent
naviga te
pr odigal
coge nt
(cog.= co+ag)
cogitate
excogitate
am,amic
(lot', poliM)
bran
brand
brandish
brander
brand-new
brandy
brimstone
brindled
bru nt
brown
bronze
auburn
burnish
cad, cas, cld
(fall)
cadence
decad ence
case
casual
cascade
occasion
accident
accidence
coincide
deciduous
incident
occidental
decay
chance
cld, ols
(rut, kill)
decide
fratricide
homicide
regicide
parricide
suicide
concise
decision
excise
excision
incisor
incision
precise
camp,cbamp
antic ipate
incipient
participate
pri ncipal
recipe
receipt
concei t
deceit
conceive
deceive
receive
(plain) 1- - - - ­
cap, cbap,
ctp , chlef
(head)
cap
cal"
capital
capitu late
recapitulate
captain
deca pita te
chapter
chaplet
OCCIpita l
precipitate
precipi ce
chief
chieftain
kerchief
mischief
achieve
camp
encamp
decamp
campaign
aide-de -camp
champaign
champagne
champion
cant, cent,
chant (. ing)
cant
canticle
canto
cantata
descant
incantation
recant
ascent
precent or
chant
enchant
disenchant
charm
cap, cep , olp,
oelpt, celt,
celv (lake)
ca l..ble
capacity
captor
captive
accept
conception
deception
except
intercept
perception
precept
reception
susceptible
car, char
(,mgon )
car
carry
cam age
carpenter
cargo
car t
chariot
charge
charger
dil'Charge
cess, coo
(00, pielei)
accession
ancestor
(

WORD-BUILDI XG AN D DE RIY AT IO N. 275
predecessor
proces s
procession
recess
secession
succ ess
suc cesso r
cede
accede
antecedent
con cede
exceed
in tercede
precede
proceed
reced e
seced e
succeed
cease
cessat ion
decease
cern . ere;
(Beparcue. decide)
concern
unconcerned
decem
discern
indiscernible
decree
decret al
d iscreet
d iscret ion
secrete
sec ret
secretion
sec retary
diacriminnt ...
cit (cal l up )
cite
citation
excite
incite
recit e
recitation
recital
recita tive
civilit y
civilian
unci vilized
C!tr
citizen
citadel
clam, clalm
(shout, call)
clamour
clamant
cla morous
accla matio n
acclamatory
e xcla mut.ion
proclam ati on
claim
claimant
acclaim
declaim
disclaim
excla im
proclaim
reclaim
laus, cti «,
clo s, clud
(sh ut )
clause
conclusio n
exclusion
recl use
seclusion
close
enclos e
inclose
d isclose
closet
conclude
exclude
includ e
preclud e
seclude
COf, CO'U
(the heart)
core
cordial
accord
resu scitat e accorda nt
- - - - - 1accordion
clv, cit ( =
clvit) (city)
civic
civil
civili ze
concord
conco rdance
discord
record
courage
encourage
discourage
corp , cors
(bod y)
corpse
corporal
corpo rea l
corpulent
corpuscle
corps
corpo rat ion
inco rpora te
co ree
corslet
corse t
cred, creed
(beli eve)
credence
credential
cred it
creditable
creditor
credible
credulous
increduli ty
accredit
discredit
creed
recrean t
miscreant
cres, creas,
cret, eru
(f/rO/v)
crescent
decrescent
excrescence
decrease
increase
concrete
accretio n
accrue
recruit
cUr (care)
cure
curable
curate
curato r
curious
accurate
procure
procurator
(proctor
proxy d1, dlur, Jour
(=procu racy) (daV)
secure dial
insec ure diary
sinec ure diet
sure
di urnal
(= secure) journal
surety journey
assure journeyman
reass ure adjourn
insure sojourn
ensure
curs, cur,
dat, d1t, don,
do Wu..}
cours (run) da te
curso ry datum
discursive ad dition
excursion (ad d)
incursion edition
precursor editor
current perdi tion
concurrence recondite
incur tradition
occur traitor
recur (=traditor)
course treas on
concou rse betray
di scourse donation
intercou rse donor
reco urse pardon
succo ur dose
anecdote
die, dlct (, ail, dowry
tell, appoint ) endow
ded icate end ue
abdicate
indicate dnc , du ct
indi cat ive (lead)
pr ed icat e conduce
predicament deduce
dictate educe
dic tator induce
di ct ion introduce
d ict ionary prodn ce
addict reduce
bened ict ion d nct
contradict ductile
edict conduct
indict dedu ct
(indite) indu ctio n
in terd ict introduction
jurisdiction producti on
predict reduction
malediction viadu ct
valedi ction aqueduct
verdict duke ..

276 W ORD- BUILDING AND DERIVATlON.
duchess
ducal
ducat
eqn (eqllal)
equ al
equable
co -equal
equation
equ ator
equity
in equity
ad equate
equ ilateral
equinox
equivalent
equivocate
fact .rae, feet ,
fie, fy (do,
make)
fact
factory
ben efactor
facul ty
facility
affect
affection
confectioner
defect
effect
infect
perf ect
refecto ry
beneficial
deficient
efficient
sufficient
edifice
office
artificial
difficult
proficiency
maguify
feat
fit
forfeit
f,.".e (go)
far e
farew ell
th oroughfare
warfare
welfar e
wayfarer
ferry
ford fin, finx ,finet
(flo.c)
fer fluent
(carry, bear) fluid
fertile affluent
oonfer affluence
circumference superfluous
odori ferous influence
defer influx
deferenti al fluctn ate
di ffer
indiff erent fort, fore
infer (.trong )
offer fort
prefer fort ify
refer fortitude
ref eree comfort
suffer effort
tran sfer force
vociferous enforce
I
reinforce
fig,fiet
(form ) fract, frang
figure etc , (break)
fi~rative fra ction
e gy fracture
configura tion infr acti on
di sfigur e refr act
transtlguration refractory
ficti on fran gible
fictitious fragment
feign
infringe
feint irrefragable
- -----
fin (elld, fus, found
belll/(/aI'y) (from )
final
fuse
finish confuse
finite diff use
infinite effusio n
affinity infuse
confine profu se
define refuse
definite t ran sfu se
definition suffuse
foundry
fiex,fiect confound
(bend) ------
flexible ger, gest
reflex
(ea,.,." on,
circ umflex bear)
deflect bellige rent
inflect vicege rent
reflect gestur e
reflector congest
reflec tion digest
sugll'e.t rej..,t
register subjec t
trajectory
grad, gress ejaculate
( .t~p) jet
grade jetty
re adual
egrade
jut
retrograde leg, lect
aggressor (read )
congress legible
digression lecture
egress legend
progress dialect
retr ogres si ve - - - - -
tran sgress lect (choose)
degree collect
ingredient elect
inte llect
graph, gram neglect
(1m tt ,tcrit· recollect
ten)
EIaphic leg (law)
iography legal
f;eographh
ille~1
ith ograp legislate
paragraph Je!litim ate
photogrnph privilege
telegrnp h
~ ~nm m n r log (rrason.,
( Ingram science , dtsprogramme
course)
telegram logic
------ catalogue
It (go) dialogue
exit etymology
circuit prologue
initial theology
ambition
ohituary Ioq.Joe
sed ition (.pea k)
trans itio n loquac ious
transiti ve soliloquy
itin erary elocution
perish
man, main
ject.Jac (han d )
(throlO) manage
abjec t man ifest
ad jective manual
conjec ture manoeuvre
dejec ted manipulate
eject manufact ure
in terjection manuscript
object ema nc ipa te
J1I"oiect maIntaIn

mit, miss
(,end)
admit
commit
emit
demi t
permit
remit
subm it
transmit
missive
m issile
mis sion
commission
dismiss
emissary
promise
mod {'ma ,mer,
71l.easUl'c)
mode
model
modi fy
modern
moderate
modest
commodious
accommodat e
in commode
pat, pass
(w.lfer)
pati ent
passion
passive
compassion
p ,I, puIs
(dr irtmrm teau
Import
importance
export
opportunity
purpo rt
report
su ppo r t
transport
port ly
dep ortmen t
(2, yale )
portal
por ter
portico
porc h
(3, hlll'bour)
sea port
Oporto
port (wi ne)
preh end ,
prts , etc.
{take, t'al ue}
ap pre hend
oomprehe nd
appris e
comprise
ent erpr ise
reprisal
surprise
prison
price
prize
praise
appreciate
depreciate
pute (Ihln k)
compute
dispu te
impute
repute
count
(= comp t)
acco unt
diBCOunt
ques, quls,
quer, qu ir
(seek )
quest
ques tion
conques t
inquest
request
exq uisite
d isqui sition
inquiaition
inquisitive
perquisite
requisite
query
conquer
acq uire
inqu ire
requ ire
rapt.rap.rav,
et c. (seizP,
take awa y )
rapid
rapt
ra pacious
ravage
ra vine
ravel
raven
ber eave
reft
rifle
rive
rife
reg, reet
(rul e, ruled ,
r ight )
regent
regim ent!
regal
regicide
regul ar
regi on
recto r
correct
dir ect
erect
rectif y
rect itude
rectangle
sect, seg
(cuI)
sect
section
bisect
dissect
insect
intersect
segme nt
sed. sid , sess,
sit, set
(8il, place)
seden ta ry
sediment
ass iduous
presid ent
resid e
subsi de
sess ion
possess
sit
set
set tle
seat
saddle
sad
sequ , secu,
sue (follo.e)
seq uence
conseq uent
couse-uti V6
execute
persecute
prosecute

l!78 WORD-BUILDING AND DERIVATION.
sue sta te ment tend, tent, track vid, vi s, vey
ensue station tens{:;lriu, train (see)
pursue statistics streteh) treatment ev ident
suit estate tendency entrant provide
pursuit reinstate atte nd t reaty visible
- - -- stat ue conte nd treat ise vision
serv (wait on, sta tute d iste nd retreat visit
keep) constitute exte nd retire visor
conservati ve superstition intend advi se
conservatory destitute pret end val, vall provi sion
observe institution superintend (strong) revise
preserve restitution tent valid supervise
reserve substitute att ent ive invalid vista
reservoir sta ble content ious valiant survey
serv e esta blish extent valou r purveyo r
servant substa nce int ention value view
servile circumstance tempt conva lescent
deserve constant attempt equivalent viv, vie t , vi
subservient distant tension prevalent (li ve)
serf instan t extensive avai l vivid
desert' desti ny intense preva il vivifr
dessert obstinate pretension con vivial
rest pretence ven , vent revi ve
solv, solut arrest (eome, yo) survive
(loose, melt) teg, tect, t ex avenue vict ual
solv e stru, struc t (cover, ue ar e) contravene vital
solv en t (build) integument convener viands
absolved construe dete ct convenien t
dissolve instrument protect covenan t voe, vok, etc.
resol ve construct text intervene (t'o;ee, eaU)
insolvency structure text ure revenue vocal
solu tion destruction context supervene vociferate
in soluble obstruct pretext ventu re advocate
ab solute destroy advent equivocal
d issolution tort, tor adv enture invocation
resol ution ten, tent, (twist ) circ um vent provocation
splr (breathe)
tain, tin tortuous convent irrevocably
(hold , keep) torture conve nticle evoke
spirit tenant contortion event con voke
aspire tenacious extort invent invoke
aspirate suste nance distort prevent provoke
consp ire con te nts retor t revoke
dispirited conte ntme nt torment vert, vers voice
expire retentive (tu rn) vowel
inspiration abstain tract, tr ain, ave rt - ---
perspirntio n contain treat, etc. convert volv, volu
respira tion detain (draw ) di vert ("all)
transpire entertain tract invert evolve
sprite maintain tractable pervert invol ve
sprightly obtain attra ct revert revo lve
reta in contrac t subvert voluble
stat,stit, ata, sustain det ract verse volume
stan, stin, at abstinence distract adversary convolvu lus
(staud, .fix ) conti nue extract averse re volut ion
state cont inent pro tract con versation revolt
stately retinue subtract di verse vault
"

PA n T
GRAlIDIAR AND ANALYSIS.
GRAMMAR AND ANALYSIS.
PARSING T A B L E.
OF KIND. P E RSON. NU MB E R. GEND E R. C£SE. SYN TAX..
S PEE CH .
- - - - ---
~.c.S Od ~
B -< UJ ~ ='
M _ =.... 0
Proper.
~ 0 ;::I 0 l:l
Masculine.
:i
Nominative .. T--.
Commo n. I:~: g .... ~ Singu lar. Feminine.
D
(Ab str act .) ~ ~ 'g .~ If3 Plural.
Po eseselve. . •. Qualifying-.
0 Neuter.
Objective. •. .. A fte r-.
(Collecti ve.)
'"
Common.
~]:~ s
~ 0 e g;'g
Z"'O' ce CN
K IND. P ERSON. NCltIllEIt. O Ero'D E R . CASE. f Y N T A X .
D Pers. } Anteced· 1st, 2nd, Masculine.
0 Nominative . . To--.
ReI. en t- . 3rd. Singular. Femi nino .
"
0
Po ssessive . • .. Quali fying-.
I nd efinite. --- - Plural Neu ter .
Objective. ••. . After-.
'" Inter rogative. Srd. Common.
KI N O. CO S J U OATlON. VOleF.. Moo n. T E N S E . NU :,>IBER. PERSON . SYNT AJ:.
Tr an sf- Weak Indicativ e.
ti ve. or Subjun cti ve. Pr esent.
1st. Nom -
"
Intran - Strong. Active (Potential.) Past. Sing ula r .
~
'" 2nd . inative
I> siti ve. R egular Passiv e Imperative. Future. Plural.
3rd.
Sub - or Infinitive. Etc. . - .
sta nti ve Irregular . Participl e.
KIND. DEORER. SYNTAX . KIND. DEGREE. SY NT A X.
,;
Manner.
I> Qualify in g-
Demonstrative.
P ositive.
~ Time.
{uttrilm-
Positive.
Quality.
"'" Pla ce. Modify-
~ Compara ti ve. ti vely 0 1 ~ Comparative.
Qua.ntUy.
Cause. ing - .
a Superlati ve. pr edica- .. '"
Superla tive.
... Numbe r. Etc.
Degree.
tlv ely.
Et c.
t' RF- POSITION. I CO NJUNC7TON.
J N T Elt.J E CTI O N.
Relating to , and Co-ordina te } connec ting E xpressing surprise , fear,
govern ing - . Subordinate and - -. joy , etc .
Cru el
tr eatment
or
a nimals
Is rorbldden
n ow
by
la w.
EX AMPLE.-Cruel lrent ment 0/ an.ima ls is now Jorbidd~n by lnw.
adj. of quat. pes. degree, qual. treatment att ributive ly.
noun, com. (abstract), Brd. pcrs,, sing. numb., neut, gend ., nom , case to is
f orbidden.
prep., rel. treat ment to anim als, and gov. animal.!.
noun, eom., Srd pers., plu. numb., com. gend., obj . ceae, gov. by of.
verb, irreg., tr an s., pass. voice, ind o mood, pr es. t ense, sing. numb.• grd
pers., agree ing with treatment.
adv ., tim e. pos. degree, mod. is forbidden.
pr ep., reI. is j orbidden to la w, and gO Y. law.
noun, com. , 3rd peee., sing. numb., neut. gcnd., ob]. case, gov. by bV.
J
I

280 GRAMMAR AND ANALYSIS.
ANALYSIS OF
SENTENOES.
L
THE SIMPLE SENTENCE.
TIle simple Subj ect of a sentence may be either a Noun or
SODle word equivalent to a Noun; for example,­
I. A N oun; as, B irds sing.
2. A Pronoun; as, TI,ey sing.
3. An llIji" itil'e or a Gerund; as, To err is human. Singi7lf!
is pleasant.
4. An Adjective used Substantit-ely ; as, The brave deserve
the fair.
Th e simple Predicate is always a finite Verb ; as, Birds sing.
The prisoner should hate been punished.
The A djunct s (or Attributes) of the Su bj ect are Adjectives,
or other qualifying words or phrases; as,-
I. An Adjective ; as, Som e bird. sing. The clock strikes.
2. A Participle; as, R olling ston es gather no Dl OSS.
3. A Posseesive ; as, ,Vary's bird sings.
4. A Noun in apposition ; as, Cousin Will iam pain ts.
0. A Phrase; as, Bird s 01 a l eather flock togeth er.
Th e Adjuncts of the Predicate are eit her A dverbs or Compl
em ents.
An Adverbial Adjunct (or Extension ) is a word or a phrase
add ed to a Verb to express Time, Pla ce, .JIa nner, or Cause. It
may be,-
I. An Adrerb ; as, Bird. sing sweetly (Manner).
2. A Phrase; as, Birds sing during the day (Time), in the
'I&OOds (Place).
A Complement is a word or a phrase added to an incomplete
Verb, to complete the sense. It may be,-
I. An Object after a Tra nsitive Verb; as, George killed a
la lnw n.
2. A Noun or an Adjective after an Intransitive or Substantive
Verb; as, Victoria is Queen. TIle apples are ripe.
The woods became green. Philip has grown stout.
.

GRAMMAR AND ANALYSIS. 281
3. An I nfinitive; as, The French d etermined to retire. The
whole Assembly seem ed to comply.
No te th at th e complement, lik e th e no minative, may be enlarge d with
adjuncts; as, George kill ed a >ery large salmon, Victoria was Queen
of England.
Some V erbs require a double complement to complete the
sense ; a s,-
Th e people ma de (1) Paul (2) a ood.
Th e master gave (1) his son (2) a book.
'fhe general ordered (1) the caml1'Y (2) to ad m>tce.
They accused (1) the toy (2) of theft,
Note th at th e P assives of th ese Ve rbs may re tain one of th eir complements;
as,- P aul was made a god .
Th e cavalry was ord ere d to admnce.
The boy was accused of theft.
The following are exam p les of two m ethods of analysis:­
1. A NALYTIC P ARSI NG.
U The English commander, perceiving his advantage, at once ord ered
a coupl e of gun s to be placed on th e kn oll."
Verb, ordered.
Nominative, commander,
Th e English commander ' " Whol e Subject.
per ceiving his ad vantage, at once orde red a couple of } Wh I P d ' Ie
'guns to be placed on th e kn oll. .... .. ...... ... .......... ..... 0 e re tea •
The
Adjunct to Sub.
English
Adjunct to Sub.
command er
S;m:11e Subject.
per ceiving his advantage Adu rbial Adjunct (eauu).
at once
Adverbiai Adjunct (time).
ord ered
Simple Predicate.
D. couple of gun s Obj . Complement.
to be placed on the kno ll
Second Complement.
2. T ABULAR A N ALYSI S.
8UBJEcrr.
PUE DICATE.
A ttribute. Nominati.ve.
I
Verb. Complemeni, Extension.
The commander orde red (1) a cou ple of (1) at once
English guns (old.) (time)
(2) to be placed (2) perc eiving
on th e knoll his advant -
age (enu se)

282 GRAMMAR AND ANALYSIS.
2. THE COMPLEX SENTENCE.
The complex resembles th e simple sentence in having only
one principal Predicat e. The difference between them lies in the
form of the oth er terms. A simple sentence may be made com- .
plez by exp anding one of its term s into a clause; as,-
Simple. Before inviting you into my society, I shall be frank with
you.
COmplex. Before I invite you into my society, I shall be frank with :
you.
A complex sentence has as many clau ses as it ha s Predicates.
Th at containing the pr incipal Predicat e is called the principal
clause. Th e others are called subordinate clauses.
Subordinate clauses are named according to th eir fun cti on or
work in the sentence, and are of t hree kinds-N oun clauses,
Adjective clauses, and Adverbial clauses.
A Noun clause nam es a thing, or does th e work of a N oun,
either as th e su bj ect or as th e complement ; as, " That you ha ve
wronged Ine doth appear in this."
The connectives of Noun clauses are tho subordinating conjunctions
that, whether, if, ete.
Relative clauses with the antecedent omitted may be treated as Noun
clauses ; 80S, lVho was the than e, lives yet . IV/,at yo 'u say is true. So
also, How ke got home is a mystery (how= the manner in which).
An Adject ive clause describes a thing, and may he attached
to a Noun ill allY part of the sentence ; as, "Uneasy lies the head
that wears a crown."
The connectit'es of Adjective clauses are the relative pronouns, which
also form the subject or the object of the Adjective clause ; and tbe
relative conjunctions where, when, why = place at which, time at which,
reason for which, etc., etc.
Sometimes the relati ve is omitted; as, .. I am monarch of all (that) I
survey."
•
An Adverbial clause describes an acti on, and is joined to a
Verb, to an Adj ective, or to another Adverb ; as,­
I. Th e upright man SPEAKS as he thinks.
2. You have MORE caution than the case needs.
3. He is as happy AS a king (is happy).

GRA~lMAR AND ANALYSIS. 283
Adver bial C!;.USC3 express Tim e, Place, Manner. Cause,
Condition, Concession. etc.
Th e following are the conneeli,·., of each kind :­
Ad verbial of Time .•.... ..... TVhen. tth ile, etc.
Adverbia l of P lace H'kn"t, Whtllct, etc.
Adverbial of }Iauller A', al.o.a 6, 1O . ••that, etc.
Adverbial of Cau se Beca use, that, leu , thoullh. etc
Adverbial of Condition .If , lIntC" , etc.
Ad ver bial of Con cessi on T huugh. altlwull h, etc.
I n analyzing a com plex sentence, first find the principal
Verb; t hen separate the cla uses ; and lastly, separate each clause
into its terms.
The following is all example of th e analysis of a complex
sentence :- .
.. That thou shouldst my firmness the refore doubt
To God or thee, because we have a foe
:lIIay tempt it, I expected not to hear. •
1. GENERAL AliALTSrs.
A. I expected not to hear {a'l Principal clam e.
Dol. that thou shoul dst dou bt my !i rlllllcss } Nou n clau Be, object
to God or thee therefore (a') ......... of hear.
• be I f ( 3)
n.• rouse we lave a oe a.. ..
{ Ad•. clau.,. of ,a"se.
mod. doubt.
a 3 • (who) may tempt it
A dj . clau se. qual. f oe.
2. T ABULAR AliALT"rs.
..
SUBJECT• PRE DICATE.
..
COS SEOt>
:i
TIY£,
"
.All,.. N cmtiu. V(1"b• Cu m pl~ Jnnt t. Ezl~ llsU)1t.
A - I expected to hear (a'l not (neg.)
at that - thou shouldst (my) firmdoubt
ness (to God therefore
or thee)(oIq'.) (a'l
(r ca.ron)
a' because - we have a foe (a l ) -
..I (who) - (who) may tem pt
(obj. )
it (obj .) -

284 GRAMMAR .AND ANALYSIS.
3. THE COMPOUND SENTENCE.
The compound sentence consists of two or more principal
clauses, which may have subordinate clau ses attached to any or
to all of them.
The members of a compound sente nce are thus either rimple clalUtl,
which are analyzed like simple sentences, or compte» clause.. which are
analyzed like complex sente nces.
The Connectives " f th e compound sentence are the co-ord inative
Conjuncti ons and, or, nor, but, and fur.
Co-ordination is of four k ind s, each of wh ich may he indicated
by a characteristic Conjunction; as,-
1. Copulative . expressed by and. 13. Anti th etical, expressed by lrtlt.
2. Alternative . expressed by or, n.:>r. 4. Causative, expressed by f or.
Example of analyais of a compound sen te nce:-
U Th e sofa suits
The gouty limb, 'tis tru e: but guuty limb.
Though on a sofa, may I never feel,"
1. GEX EH,\ L A~ALY SIS .
A. It (a') is t ru e Ist priudpal clau &

F IGURES OF SPEECH.
285
FIGURES OF SPEECH.
Some knowledge of the more common figu res of speech is
essential in the study of poetry, especially of suc h pot'ms as are
given for recitation in this book, and is also usefu l in the
thorough study of prose, and in th e pra ctice of composition.
A F igure of Speech is an expression in whi ch certain words
are used, not in th eir literal sense, but in a seuse suggested by
the imagina t ion ; ~-
.. The king was the lion of the field."
.. The lion is the I.:ifl(! of beasts."
In the first example U king n is used lite rally and U lion to figuratively, in
the sense of U the bravest. " In the second example II lion "is used literally
and II king" figurativ ely, in the sense of "the noblest " or U the chie f. n
The fignr es of speech most commonly used depend on three
principles- namely, Resemb lance, Contrast, an d Association. A
few others are grammat ical figur es, or figures of const ruction.
I. - F IGU RES OF RESEM m,ANC F~
I. Th e Simile is th e figure of comparison : one thing is said
to be like another ; as,-
.. The Assyrian came down like a wolf on the f old."
2. Th e Metaphor is th e figu re of substitution : one thing is p ut
f or or said to be another, and the word like or a8 is not used; as,-'--
" The Assyrian .rolfcame down on the fold."
H ere both .. wolf " and" fold" are used figuratively. Sennaeherib the
AI'S)'rian is called a "wolf," and the camp of the Israelites is called a
" fold."
3. Personificat ion is the figure in whi ch lifeless things an d th e
lower animals are spoken of as persons : :\S . -
.. All the trees of the field shall

286 FIG URES OF SPEECH.
P ersonification is th e converse of meta phor. The lat ter speaks of
human beings as animals, the fonn er speaks of animals as human beings.
'f he comp ari son is often implied in an epithet - as, gloomy winter; the
angry sea ; the thirsty ground.
4. Apostrophe is a form of p ers onifi cat ion . It ad dresses t he
absent a nd t he dead, a nd a lso animals and lifeless t h ings; as,-
"'Vith thee, sweet Hope, resides the heavenly light."- CAlIPBELL.
The poet or the orator I' turns aside " from his main theme to address
Borne absent hero or some virtue or principle.
A prolonged apostrophe is called Vision. In it th e writer describes an
imagi nary scene as if it were real.
5. Hyperbole is t h e figu re of exagg eration or overstatem ent:
it genera lly implies com parison; as,-
.. Th e horses passed like lightning" (simile).
.. The invaders shed r irers of Mood" (meta phor).
H yperbole means overshooting the mark .
mind's love of the wonderful.
The figure appea ls to th e
6. Euphemism is th e figur e of mi ti gation or un derstatem ent :
it softens the ex pression, a nd is thus t he conv erse of hyperbole;
as,- " H e has not kept .~ f rictly to the truth ;" for U he has told a li e."
Eu phemism means wall -speaking,
an inoffensive way.
n.-FIGURES OF CONTRAST.
T he figure is used to state a fact in
1. Antithesis is t he figur e of d ire ct contra st; as,­
" Speech is silvern, ~llt silence is golden."
H ere th ere are t wo contrasted similes, and the antit hesis lies not in
the meaning of th e words but in the grouping of th e two sta tements.
A ntithesis means a setting in opposition.
2. Epigram is th e figure 'of surpr ise: the contrast is bet ween
the a pparent mea ning and the r eal mean ing ; as,-
." Th e child is fat her of th e man."
Thi s statement seems to involve a contradiction, and even to be absurd ;
y et it is true, becau se H fath er " is used not in a literal but in a figurative
sense. Epigram meant first an inscripti on on a tomb ; secondly , a short
witty poem; lastly, any pointed and wittJl saying.

FIGURES OF SPBECII . ~8 7
3. Irony is th e figure of d isguise : it mea ns th e opposite of
what is said ; a8,-
II Y ou are a derer felww ,"=JIow stupid you are !
I t may in one sense beconsidered a euphemism, or a softened expression.
I rony means disguise or dissimulation, Ita sting til'S in the (act that
it ascribes a good quality in such a way as to withhold it. It praises in
ridicule.
I1I .-FlGURES OF ASSOCIAT IOS .
The figures depending on Association of ideas h av e many form s
an d bea r various names. T hey Illay be inclu ded under th e single
term M et onymy, which mea ns cha nge of name.
Metonymy is t he figure of exchange or tra nsposi tion; as,­
" He dran k the fata l cup " (for poison).
The following are the chief cases of transposition:-
(1.) Proper name for common ; as, a Solomon, for a wise man; a H ercules
for a strong man.
(2.) Abstract name for concrete ; as, Her J.,rajt8(y , for the Queen; hia
lord,hip, for a nobleman; youth, for young persons.
(3.) Concrete for abstract; as, the foot, for folly; the mother, for
motherly love.
(4.) Part for whole; as, fifty Baa, for ships ; four hundred hands, for
workmen ; thirty summers, for years.
(5.) Whole for part; as, the darkening year, for winter.
(G.) Symbol for omce or power; as, the ero""" for royalty ; the mitre,
for episcopal rank; the 3woJ'd, for military power ; th» pen , for literature.
(7.) Author for works; as, " He is reading lIlilt on," for Milton's poems.
(8.) Vessel for content s; as, tlte cup, for poison ; the purse, for money;
the cradle, for childhood ; the city, for the people in it.
(9.) Country (or people; as, U Fraw-e is eager for war."
(10.) Estate for owner ; as, .. E very one blamed Glmlyon "- tha t is,
Campbell of Glenlyon.
(11.) Effect for cause ; as, the shade, for trees ; the lillht, for sun ; the
lil]ht, for cand le ; gnp hairs, for old age.
(12.) Material for product ; as, Bt

288 FIGURES OF SPEECH.
1. Interrogation is an assertion put in the form of a question;
as,-
"'Vho can p..aIntIike N ature ! "= .J.Yo one can paint like Nature.
" Who does not hope to live long? "=Every one hopes to live long.
2. Exclamation is an assertion in the form of an inte rjection
or cry; as,-
((' Vhat a piece of work is man!"= ) 1an is a very wonderful piece of
work.
3. Climax is a series of assertions or exclamations increas ing in
strength ; as,-
U'Vhat a piece of work is man! how noble in reason ; how infinite in
facultics ; in form and moving, how express and admirable ; in action,
how like an nngel ; in apprehension, how like a god ! "-SHAKESPEARE.
Climax means an ascending scale or ladder. Th e name may apply to
a series of sentences in a paragraph , or to a ser ies of paragraphs in a
chapter or discourse. A sudd en fall at the close of a series is termed an
aiui-climax,
Figures of speech should be used sparingly in composition. A
large number of comparisons, contrasts, and illustr at ions perplexes
the mind of the reader, and offends against good taste.